Nortel Networks Layer 2-7 GbE Switch Module Command Reference

Command Reference
TM
Alteon OS 20.1
Layer 2-7 GbE Switch Module
for IBM
BladeCenter
Part Number: 13N0340, March 2004
4655 Great America Parkway
Santa Clara, CA 95054
www.nortelnetworks.com
Reference: 215655-B
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
Copyright © 2004 Nortel Networks, Inc., 4655 Great America Parkway, Santa Clara, California, 95054,
USA. All rights reserved. Part Number: 13N0340.
This document is protected by copyright and distributed under licenses restricting its use, copying,
distribution, and decompilation. No part of this document may be reproduced in any form by any means
without prior written authorization of Nortel Networks, Inc. Documentation is provided “as is” without
warranty of any kind, either express or implied, including any kind of implied or express warranty of noninfringement or the implied warranties of merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose.
U.S. Government End Users: This document is provided with a “commercial item” as defined by FAR
2.101 (Oct. 1995) and contains “commercial technical data” and “commercial software documentation” as
those terms are used in FAR 12.211-12.212 (Oct. 1995). Government End Users are authorized to use this
documentation only in accordance with those rights and restrictions set forth herein, consistent with FAR
12.211- 12.212 (Oct. 1995), DFARS 227.7202 (JUN 1995) and DFARS 252.227-7015 (Nov. 1995).
Nortel Networks, Inc. reserves the right to change any products described herein at any time, and without
notice. Nortel Networks, Inc. assumes no responsibility or liability arising from the use of products
described herein, except as expressly agreed to in writing by Nortel Networks, Inc. The use and purchase of
this product does not convey a license under any patent rights, trademark rights, or any other intellectual
property rights of Nortel Networks, Inc.
Originated in the USA.
Alteon OS, and Alteon are trademarks of Nortel Networks, Inc. in the United States and certain other
countries. Cisco® and EtherChannel® are registered trademarks of Cisco Systems, Inc. in the United States
and certain other countries. Any other trademarks appearing in this manual are owned by their respective
companies.
2
13N0340, March 2004
Contents
Preface 11
Who Should Use This Book 11
How This Book Is Organized 11
Typographic Conventions 13
How to Get Help 14
Chapter 1: The Command Line Interface 15
Connecting to the Switch 16
Management Module Setup 16
Factory-Default vs. MM assigned IP Addresses 16
Default Gateway 17
Configuring the Management Module for Switch Access 17
Connecting to the Switch via Telnet 19
Running Telnet 19
Using a BOOTP Server 20
Establishing an SSH Connection 20
Running SSH 21
Accessing the Switch 22
Setup Versus CLI 24
Command Line History and Editing 24
Idle Timeout 24
Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration 25
Using the Setup Utility 25
Information Needed For Setup 25
Starting Setup When You Log In 26
Stopping and Restarting Setup Manually 27
Stopping Setup 27
Restarting Setup 27
Setup Part 1: Basic System Configuration 27
3
13N0340, March 2004
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
Setup Part 2: Port Configuration 29
Setup Part 3: VLANs 31
Setup Part 4: IP Configuration 32
IP Interfaces 32
Default Gateways 33
IP Routing 34
Setup Part 5: Final Steps 35
Optional Setup for SNMP Support 36
Optional Setup for Telnet Support 36
Setting Passwords 37
Changing the Default Administrator Password 37
Changing the Default User Password 39
Changing the Default Layer 4 Administrator Password 40
Chapter 3: Menu Basics 43
The Main Menu 43
Menu Summary 44
Global Commands 45
Command Line History and Editing 47
Command Line Interface Shortcuts 48
Command Stacking 48
Command Abbreviation 48
Tab Completion 48
Chapter 4: The Information Menu 49
Information Menu 49
General System Information 52
Show Last 30 Syslog Messages 53
FDB Information Menu 55
Show All FDB Information 57
Clearing Entries from the Forwarding Database 57
Link Aggregation Control Protocol menu 58
Link Aggregation Control Protocol 58
Spanning Tree Information 60
Trunk Group Information 62
VLAN Information 63
IP Routing Information 66
Show All IP Route Information 67
4 Contents
13N0340, March 2004
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
ARP Information 68
Show All ARP Entry Information 69
ARP Address List Information 70
BGP Information Menu 71
BGP Peer information 71
BGP Summary information 72
Dump BGP Information 72
OSPF Information 73
OSPF General Information 74
OSPF Interface Information 74
OSPF Database Information 75
OSPF Information Route Codes 76
IP Information 77
VRRP Information 77
SLB Information 79
Session Table Information 80
Samples of Session Dumps for Different Applications 82
Session dump information in Alteon OS 83
Show All Layer 4 Information 85
Link Status Information 86
Port Information 87
Information Dump 88
Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 89
Statistics Menu
89
Port Statistics Menu 91
Bridging Statistics 92
Ethernet Statistics 93
Interface Statistics 96
Interface Protocol Statistics 98
Link Statistics 99
RMON Statistics 99
FDB Statistics 103
LACP Statistics 104
OSPF Statistics Menu 106
OSPF Global Statistics 107
IP Statistics 111
Route Statistics 113
13N0340, March 2004
Contents 5
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
ARP statistics 114
VRRP Statistics 115
DNS Statistics 116
ICMP Statistics 116
Interface Statistics 118
TCP Statistics 120
UDP Statistics 121
Load Balancing Statistics Menu 122
Server Load Balancing SP statistics Menu 124
SP Real Server Statistics 125
Real Server SLB Statistics 127
Per Service Octet Counters 127
Real Server Group Statistics 128
Virtual Server SLB Statistics 129
Filter SLB Statistics 129
SLB Layer7 Statistics Menu 130
Layer7 Redirection Statistics 130
Layer 7 SLB String Statistics 131
Layer 7 SLB Maintenance Statistics 132
SLB Secure Socket Layer Statistics 134
File Transfer Protocol SLB and Filter Statistics Menu 135
Active FTP SLB Parsing and Filter Statistics 135
Passive FTP SLB Parsing Statistics 136
FTP SLB Maintenance Statistics 136
FTP SLB Statistics Dump 137
RTSP SLB Statistics 138
DNS SLB Statistics 138
WAP SLB Statistics 140
SLB TCP Rate Limiting Statistics 142
SLB Maintenance Statistics 142
Clearing the SLB Statistics 144
Management Processor Statistics 145
MP Packet Statistics 146
TCP Statistics 147
UCB Statistics 147
MP-Specific SFD Statistics 148
CPU Statistics 148
SP Specific Statistics Menu
148
6 Contents
13N0340, March 2004
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
SNMP Statistics 150
Statistics Dump 153
Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 155
Configuration Menu
155
Viewing, Applying, and Saving Changes 156
Viewing Pending Changes 157
Applying Pending Changes 157
Saving the Configuration 157
System Configuration 159
System Host Log Configuration 160
SSH Server Configuration Menu 161
RADIUS Server Configuration
163
NTP Server Configuration 164
System SNMP Menu 165
System Access Menu
167
User Access Control Configuration 168
Port Configuration 170
Port Link Configuration 172
Temporarily Disabling a Port 173
Port Mirroring Menu 173
Port-Mirroring Menu 174
Layer 2 Menu
175
Spanning Tree Configuration 176
Bridge Spanning Tree Configuration 177
Spanning Tree Port Configuration 179
Trunk Configuration 180
IP Trunk Hash menu 181
Layer 2 IP Trunk Hash menu 181
Layer 3 IP Trunk Hash menu 182
Link Aggregation Control Protocol menu 184
LACP Port menu 184
VLAN Configuration 186
Layer 3 Menu
188
IP Interface Configuration 189
Default Gateway Configuration 191
Default Gateway Metrics 192
IP Static Route Configuration 192
13N0340, March 2004
Contents 7
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
IP Forwarding Configuration 193
Local Network Route Caching Definition
193
Defining IP Address Ranges for the Local Route Cache 194
Network Filter Configuration 195
Routing Map Configuration 196
IP Access List Configuration Menu 198
Autonomous System Filter Path 199
Routing Information Protocol Configuration 200
Open Shortest Path First Configuration 202
Area Index Configuration Menu 203
OSPF Summary Range Configuration Menu 205
OSPF Interface Configuration Menu 206
OSPF Virtual Link Configuration Menu 207
OSPF Host Entry Configuration Menu 209
OSPF Route Redistribution Configuration Menu. 210
OSPF MD5 Key Configuration Menu 211
Border Gateway Protocol Configuration 211
BGP Peer Configuration Menu 213
BGP Redistribution Configuration Menu 215
BGP Aggregation Configuration 216
IP Port Configuration 217
Domain Name System Configuration 218
Bootstrap Protocol Relay Configuration 219
VRRP Configuration 220
Virtual Router Configuration 221
Virtual Router Priority Tracking Configuration 224
Virtual Router Group Configuration 226
Virtual Router Group Priority Tracking Configuration 228
VRRP Interface Configuration 230
VRRP Tracking Configuration 231
Default Gateway Metrics 232
Setup 233
Dump 233
Saving the Active Switch Configuration 234
Restoring the Active Switch Configuration 234
8 Contents
13N0340, March 2004
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 235
SLB Configuration 235
Filtering and Layer 4 (Server Load Balancing) 237
Real Server SLB Configuration 237
Real Server Layer 7 Configuration 241
Real Server Group SLB Configuration 242
Server Load Balancing Metrics 245
Virtual Server SLB Configuration 247
Virtual Server Service Configuration 249
Virtual Server RTSP Configuration 253
Cookie-Based Persistence 254
SLB Filter Configuration 255
Defining IP Address Ranges for Filters 259
Advanced Filter Configuration 260
Advanced Filter TCP Configuration 262
IP Advanced Menu 263
Layer 7 Advanced Menu 264
ICMP Message Types 265
Port SLB Configuration 266
Layer 7 SLB Resource Definition Menu 268
Web Cache Redirection Configuration 269
Server Load Balance Resource Configuration Menu 270
WAP Configuration 271
Synchronize Peer Switch Configuration 272
Peer Switch Configuration 273
Advanced Layer 4 Configuration 274
SYN Attack Detection Configuration
276
Scriptable Health Checks Configuration 278
WAP Health Check Configuration 279
Proxy IP Address Configuration Menu 280
Chapter 8: The Operations Menu 281
Operations Menu 281
Operations-Level Port Options 283
Operations-Level SLB Options 284
Operations-Level VRRP Options. 285
Operations-Level IP Options 285
Operations-Level BGP Options 286
13N0340, March 2004
Contents 9
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
Chapter 9: The Boot Options Menu 287
Boot Menu 287
Updating the Switch Software Image 288
Downloading New Software to Your Switch 288
Selecting a Software Image to Run 289
Uploading a Software Image from Your Switch 290
Selecting a Configuration Block 291
Resetting the Switch 292
Chapter 10: The Maintenance Menu 293
Maintenance Menu 293
System Maintenance Options 295
Forwarding Database Options 295
Debugging Options 297
ARP Cache Options
298
IP Route Manipulation 299
Uuencode Flash Dump 300
TFTP System Dump Put 301
Clearing Dump Information 301
Panic Command 302
Unscheduled System Dumps 302
Appendix A: Alteon OS Syslog Messages 303
LOG_WARNING 303
LOG_ALERT 304
LOG_CRIT 304
LOG_ERR 305
LOG_NOTICE 311
LOG_INFO 313
Appendix B: Alteon OS SNMP Agent 315
Glossary 319
Index 323
10 Contents
13N0340, March 2004
Preface
The Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference describes how to configure and use the Alteon OS
software with your GbE Switch Module.
For documentation on installing the switches physically, see the Installation Guide for your
GbE Switch Module.
Who Should Use This Book
This Command Reference is intended for network installers and system administrators engaged
in configuring and maintaining a network. The administrator should be familiar with Ethernet
concepts, IP addressing, the IEEE 802.1d Spanning Tree Protocol, and SNMP configuration
parameters.
How This Book Is Organized
Chapter 1 “The Command Line Interface,” describes how to connect to the switch and access
the information and configuration menus.
Chapter 2 “First-Time Configuration,” describes how to use the Setup utility for initial
switch configuration and how to change the system passwords.
Chapter 3 “Menu Basics,” provides an overview of the menu system, including a menu map,
global commands, and menu shortcuts.
Chapter 4 “The Information Menu,” shows how to view switch configuration parameters.
Chapter 5 “The Statistics Menu,” shows how to view switch performance statistics.
Chapter 6 “The Configuration Menu,” shows how to configure switch system parameters,
ports, VLANs, Spanning Tree Protocol, SNMP, Port Mirroring, IP Routing, Port Trunking, and
more.
11
13N0340, March 2004
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
Chapter 7 “The SLB Configuration Menu,” shows how to configure Server Load Balancing,
Filtering, Global Server Load Balancing, and more.
Chapter 8 “The Operations Menu,” shows how to use commands which affect switch performance immediately, but do not alter permanent switch configurations (such as temporarily
disabling ports). The menu describes how to activate or deactivate optional software features.
Chapter 9 “The Boot Options Menu,” describes the use of the primary and alternate switch
images, how to load a new software image, and how to reset the software to factory defaults.
Chapter 10 “The Maintenance Menu,” shows how to generate and access a dump of critical
switch state information, how to clear it, and how to clear part or all of the forwarding database.
Appendix A, “Alteon OS Syslog Messages,” shows a listing of syslog messages.
Appendix B, “Alteon OS SNMP Agent,” lists the Management Interface Bases (MIBs) sup-
ported in the switch software.
“Glossary” includes definitions of terminology used throughout the book.
“Index” includes pointers to the description of the key words used throughout the book.
12 Preface
13N0340, March 2004
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
Typographic Conventions
The following table describes the typographic styles used in this book.
Table 1 Typographic Conventions
Typeface or
Symbol
Meaning
Example
AaBbCc123
This type is used for names of commands,
files, and directories used within the text.
View the readme.txt file.
It also depicts on-screen computer output and Main#
prompts.
AaBbCc123
This bold type appears in command examples. It shows text that must be typed in
exactly as shown.
Main# sys
<AaBbCc123> This italicized type appears in command
To establish a Telnet session, enter:
examples as a parameter placeholder. Replace host# telnet <IP address>
the indicated text with the appropriate real
name or value when using the command. Do
not type the brackets.
[ ]
13N0340, March 2004
This also shows book titles, special terms, or
words to be emphasized.
Read your User’s Guide thoroughly.
Command items shown inside brackets are
optional and can be used or excluded as the
situation demands. Do not type the brackets.
host# ls [-a]
Preface 13
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
How to Get Help
If you need help, service, or technical assistance, see the “Getting help and technical assistance” appendix in the Nortel Networks Layer 2-7 GbE Switch Module for IBM eServer BladeCenter Installation Guide on the IBM BladeCenter Documentation CD.
14 Preface
13N0340, March 2004
CHAPTER 1
The Command Line Interface
Your GbE Switch Module is ready to perform basic switching functions right out of the box.
Some of the more advanced features, however, require some administrative configuration
before they can be used effectively.
The extensive Alteon OS switching software included in your switch provides a variety of
options for accessing and configuring the switch:
A built-in, text-based command line interface and menu system for access via a Telnet session
SNMP support for access through network management software such as IBM Director or
HP OpenView
Alteon OS Browser-Based Interface (BBI)
The command line interface is the most direct method for collecting switch information and
performing switch configuration. Using a basic terminal, you are presented with a hierarchy of
menus that enable you to view information and statistics about the switch, and to perform any
necessary configuration.
This chapter explains how to access the Command Line Interface (CLI) for the switch.
15
13N0340, March 2004
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
Connecting to the Switch
You can access the command line interface in any one of the following ways:
Using a Telnet via the management module
Using a Telnet connection over the network
Using a SSH connection to securely log into another computer over a network
Management Module Setup
The BladeCenter GbE Switch Module is an integral subsystem within the overall BladeCenter
system. The BladeCenter chassis includes a management module (MM) as the central element
for overall chassis management and control.
You can use the 100-Mbps Ethernet port on the Management Module to configure and manage
the GbE Switch Module. The GbE Switch Module communicates with the management module through its internal port 15 (MGT1) and port 16 (MGT2), which you can access through the
100 Mbps Ethernet port on the management module. The factory default settings will only permit management and control access to the switch module through the 10/100 Mbps Ethernet
port on the management module. You can use the four external 10/100/1000 Mbps Ethernet
ports on the switch module for management and control of the switch by selecting this mode as
an option through the management module configuration utility program (see the applicable
BladeCenter Installation and User’s Guide publications on the IBM BladeCenter Documentation CD for more information).
Factory-Default vs. MM assigned IP Addresses
Each GbE Switch Module must be assigned its own Internet Protocol address, which is used
for communication with an SNMP network manager or other transmission control protocol/
Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) applications (for example, BootP or TFTP). The factory-default IP
address is 10.90.90.9x, where x corresponds to the number of the bay into which the GbE
Switch Module is installed. For additional information, see the Installation Guide). The management module assigns an IP address of 192.168.70.1xx, where xx corresponds to the number
of the bay into which each GbE Switch Module is installed, as shown in Table 1-1:
16 Chapter 1: The Command Line Interface
13N0340, March 2004
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
Table 1-1 GbE Switch Module IP addresses, based on switch-module
bay numbers
Bay number
Factory-default IP address
IP address assigned by MM
Bay 1
10.90.90.91
192.168.70.127
Bay 2
10.90.90.92
192.168.70.128
Bay 3
10.90.90.94
192.168.70.129
Bay 4
10.90.90.97
192.168.70.130
Default Gateway
The default Gateway IP address determines where packets with a destination address outside
the current subnet should be sent. Usually, the default Gateway is a router or host acting as an
IP gateway to handle connections to other subnets of other TCP/IP networks. If you want to
access the GbE Switch Module from outside your local network, use the management module
to assign a default Gateway address to the GbE Switch Module. Choose I/O Module Tasks >
Management from the navigation pane on the left, and enter the default Gateway IP address
(for example, 192.168.70.125). Click Save.
Configuring the Management Module for Switch Access
Complete the following initial configuration steps:
1.
Connect the Ethernet port of the management module to a 10/100 Mbps network (with
access to a management station) or directly to a management station.
2.
Access and log on to the management module, as described in the BladeCenter Management Module User’s Guide on the IBM BladeCenter Documentation CD. The management
module provides the appropriate IP addresses for network access (see the applicable BladeCenter Installation and User’s Guide publications on the IBM BladeCenter Documentation CD for more information).
13N0340, March 2004
Chapter 1: The Command Line Interface 17
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
3.
Select Management on the I/O Module Tasks menu on the left side of the BladeCenter
Management Module window. See Figure 1.
Figure 1 Switch management on the BladeCenter management module
4.
You can use the default IP addresses provided by the management module, or you can
assign a new IP address to the switch module through the management module. You can
assign this IP address through one of the following methods:
Manually through the BladeCenter management module.
Automatically through the IBM Director Configuration Wizard (when it becomes
available)
NOTE – If you change the IP address of the GbE Switch Module, make sure that the GbE
Switch Module and the management module both reside on the same subnet.
18 Chapter 1: The Command Line Interface
13N0340, March 2004
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
5.
Enable the following features in the management module (Switch Tasks > Management >
Advanced Management):
External Ports
External management over all ports (required if you want to access the management network through the four external ports on the GbE Switch Module)
The default value is Disabled for both features. If these features are not already enabled,
change the value to Enabled, then Save.
NOTE – In the switch management Advanced Setup, enable “Preserve new IP configuration on
all switch resets,” to retain the switch’s IP interface when you restore factory defaults. This setting preserves the management port’s IP address in the management module’s memory, so you
maintain connectivity to the management module after a reset.
You can now start a Telnet session, Browser-Based Interface (Web) session, or a Secure Shell
session to the GbE Switch Module.
Connecting to the Switch via Telnet
Use the management module to access the GbE Switch Module through Telnet. Choose
I/O Module Tasks > Management from the navigation pane on the left. Select a bay number
and click Advanced Management > Start Telnet/Web Session > Start Telnet Session. A
Telnet window opens a connection to the Switch Module.
Once that you have configured the GbE Switch Module with an IP address and gateway, you
can access the switch from any workstation connected to the management network. Telnet
access provides the same options for user and administrator access as those available through
the management module, minus certain Telnet and management commands.
To establish a Telnet connection with the switch, run the Telnet program on your workstation
and issue the Telnet command, followed by the switch IP address:
telnet <switch IP address>
Running Telnet
Once the IP parameters on the GbE Switch Module are configured, you can access the CLI using
a Telnet connection. From the management module, you can establish a Telnet connection with
the switch.
You will then be prompted to enter a password as explained on page 20.
13N0340, March 2004
Chapter 1: The Command Line Interface 19
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
Using a BOOTP Server
If you have a BOOTP server on your network, add the MAC address of the switch to the
BOOTP configuration file located on the BOOTP server. The MAC address can be found on a
small white label on the back panel of the switch. The MAC address can also be found in the
System Information menu (see “System Information” on page 52).
Establishing an SSH Connection
Although a remote network administrator can manage the configuration of a GbE Switch Module
via Telnet, this method does not provide a secure connection. The SSH (Secure Shell) protocol
enables you to securely log into another computer over a network to execute commands
remotely. As a secure alternative to using Telnet to manage switch configuration, SSH ensures
that all data sent over the network is encrypted and secure.
The switch can do only one session of key/cipher generation at a time. Thus, a SSH/SCP client
will not be able to login if the switch is doing key generation at that time or if another client
has just logged in before this client. Similarly, the system will fail to do the key generation if a
SSH/SCP client is logging in at that time.
The supported SSH encryption and authentication methods are listed below.
Server Host Authentication: Client RSA-authenticates the switch in the beginning of
every connection.
Key Exchange: RSA
Encryption: 3DES-CBC, DES
User Authentication: Local password authentication, Radius
20 Chapter 1: The Command Line Interface
13N0340, March 2004
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
The following SSH clients have been tested:
SSH 1.2.23 and SSH 1.2.27 for Linux (freeware)
SecureCRT 3.0.2 and SecureCRT 3.0.3 (Van Dyke Technologies, Inc.)
F-Secure SSH 1.1 for Windows (Data Fellows)
NOTE – The Alteon OS implementation of SSH is based on SSH version 1.5 and supports
SSH-1.5-1.X.XX. SSH clients of other versions (especially Version 2) will not be supported.
Running SSH
Once the IP parameters are configured and the SSH service is turned on the GbE Switch Module,
you can access the command line interface using an SSH connection. The default setting for
SSH access is disabled.
To establish an SSH connection with the switch, run the SSH program on your workstation by
issuing the SSH command, followed by the switch IP address:
>> # ssh <switch IP address>
or, if SecurID authentication is required, use the following command:
>> # ssh -1 ace <switch IP address>
You will then be prompted to enter your user name and password.
13N0340, March 2004
Chapter 1: The Command Line Interface 21
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
Accessing the Switch
To enable better switch management and user accountability, seven levels or classes of user
access have been implemented on the GbE Switch Module. Levels of access to CLI, Web management functions, and screens increase as needed to perform various switch management
tasks. Conceptually, access classes are defined as follows:
User interaction with the switch is completely passive—nothing can be changed on the
GbE Switch Module. Users may display information that has no security or privacy implications, such as switch statistics and current operational state information.
Operators can only effect temporary changes on the GbE Switch Module. These changes
will be lost when the switch is rebooted/reset. Operators have access to the switch management features used for daily switch operations. Because any changes an operator
makes are undone by a reset of the switch, operators cannot severely impact switch operation.
Administrators are the only ones that may make permanent changes to the switch configuration—changes that are persistent across a reboot/reset of the switch. Administrators can
access switch functions to configure and troubleshoot problems on the GbE Switch Module.
Because administrators can also make temporary (operator-level) changes as well, they
must be aware of the interactions between temporary and permanent changes.
Access to switch functions is controlled through the use of unique surnames and passwords.
Once you are connected to the switch via local Telnet, remote Telnet, or SSH, you are
prompted to enter a password. The default user names/password for each access level are listed
in the following table.
NOTE – It is recommended that you change default switch passwords after initial configuration
and as regularly as required under your network security policies. For more information, see
“Setting Passwords” on page 37.
Table 1-2 User Access Levels
User Account
Description and Tasks Performed
Password
User
The User has no direct responsibility for switch management.
He or she can view all switch status information and statistics,
but cannot make any configuration changes to the switch.
user
22 Chapter 1: The Command Line Interface
13N0340, March 2004
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
Table 1-2 User Access Levels
User Account
Description and Tasks Performed
SLB Operator
The SLB Operator manages Web servers and other Internet ser- slboper
vices and their loads. In addition to being able to view all
switch information and statistics, the SLB Operator can enable/
disable servers using the Server Load Balancing operation
menu.
Layer 4 Operator
The Layer 4 Operator manages traffic on the lines leading to
l4oper
the shared Internet services. This user currently has the same
access level as the SLB operator. and the access level is
reserved for future use, to provide access to operational commands for operators managing traffic on the line leading to the
shared Internet services.
Operator
The Operator manages all functions of the switch. In addition
to SLB Operator functions, the Operator can reset ports or the
entire switch.
oper
SLB Administrator
The SLB Administrator configures and manages Web servers
and other Internet services and their loads. In addition to SLB
Operator functions, the SLB Administrator can configure
parameters on the Server Load Balancing menus, with the
exception of not being able to configure filters or bandwidth
management.
slbadmin
Layer 4
Administrator
The Layer 4 Administrator configures and manages traffic on
the lines leading to the shared Internet services. In addition to
SLB Administrator functions, the Layer 4 Administrator can
configure all parameters on the Server Load Balancing menus,
including filters and bandwidth management.
l4admin
Administrator
Password
The superuser Administrator has complete access to all menus, admin
information, and configuration commands on the GbE Switch
Module, including the ability to change both the user and
administrator passwords.
NOTE – With the exception of the “admin” user, access to each user level can be disabled by
setting the password to an empty value. All user levels below “admin” will (by default) be initially disabled (empty password) until they are enabled by the “admin” user. This is done in
order to avoid inadvertently leaving the switch open to unauthorized users.
13N0340, March 2004
Chapter 1: The Command Line Interface 23
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
Setup Versus CLI
Once the administrator password is verified, you are given complete access to the switch. If the
switch is still set to its factory default configuration, the system will ask whether you wish to
run Setup (see Chapter 2, “First-Time Configuration”), a utility designed to help you through
the first-time configuration process. If the switch has already been configured, the Main Menu
of the CLI is displayed instead.
The following table shows the Main Menu with administrator privileges.
[Main Menu]
info
stats
cfg
oper
boot
maint
diff
apply
save
revert
exit
-
Information Menu
Statistics Menu
Configuration Menu
Operations Command Menu
Boot Options Menu
Maintenance Menu
Show pending config changes [global command]
Apply pending config changes [global command]
Save updated config to FLASH [global command]
Revert pending or applied changes [global command]
Exit [global command, always available]
NOTE – If you are accessing a user account or Layer 4 administrator account, some menu
options will not be available.
Command Line History and Editing
For a description of global commands, shortcuts, and command line editing functions, see
“Menu Basics” on page 43.”
Idle Timeout
By default, the switch will disconnect your Telnet session after five minutes of inactivity. This
function is controlled by the idle timeout parameter, which can be set from 1 to 60 minutes. For
information on changing this parameter, see “System Configuration” on page 159.
24 Chapter 1: The Command Line Interface
13N0340, March 2004
CHAPTER 2
First-Time Configuration
To help with the initial process of configuring your switch, the Alteon OS software includes a
Setup utility. The Setup utility prompts you step-by-step to enter all the necessary information
for basic configuration of the switch. This chapter describes how to use the Setup utility and
how to change system passwords. Before you run Setup, you must first connection to the
switch (see Chapter 1, “Connecting to the Switch”).
Using the Setup Utility
Whenever you log in as the system administrator under the factory default configuration, you
are asked whether you wish to run the Setup utility. Setup can also be activated manually from
the command line interface any time after login.
Information Needed For Setup
Setup requests the following information:
Basic system information
Date & time
Whether to use BOOTP or not
Whether to use Spanning Tree Group or not
Optional configuration for each port
Speed, duplex, flow control, and negotiation mode (as appropriate)
Whether to use VLAN tagging or not (as appropriate)
Optional configuration for each VLAN
Name of VLAN
Which ports are included in the VLAN
25
13N0340, March 2004
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
Optional configuration of IP parameters
IP address, subnet mask, and VLAN for each IP interface
IP addresses for up to four default gateways
Destination, subnet mask, and gateway IP address for each IP static route
Whether IP forwarding is enabled or not
Whether the RIP supply is enabled or not
Starting Setup When You Log In
The Setup prompt appears automatically whenever you login as the system administrator under
the factory default settings.
1.
Connect to the switch.
After connecting, the login prompt will appear as shown below.
Enter Password:
2.
Enter admin as the default administrator password.
If the factory default configuration is detected, the system prompts:
Connected to GbE Switch Module
18:44:05 Wed Jan 3, 2001
The switch is booted with factory default configuration.
To ease the configuration of the switch, a "Set Up" facility which
will prompt you with those configuration items that are essential to
the operation of the switch is provided.
Would you like to run "Set Up" to configure the switch? [y/n]:
NOTE – If the default admin login is unsuccessful, or if the administrator Main Menu appears
instead, the system configuration has probably been changed from the factory default settings.
If you are certain that you need to return the switch to its factory default settings, see “Selecting a Configuration Block” on page 291.
3.
Enter y to begin the initial configuration of the switch, or n to bypass the Setup facility.
26 Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration
13N0340, March 2004
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
Stopping and Restarting Setup Manually
Stopping Setup
To abort the Setup utility, press <Ctrl-C> during any Setup question. When you abort Setup,
the system will prompt:
Would you like to run from top again? [y/n]
Enter n to abort Setup, or y to restart the Setup program at the beginning.
Restarting Setup
You can restart the Setup utility manually at any time by entering the following command at
the administrator prompt:
# /cfg/setup
Setup Part 1: Basic System Configuration
When Setup is started, the system prompts:
"Set Up" will walk you through the configuration of
System Date and Time, BOOTP, Spanning Tree, Port Speed/Mode,
VLANs, and IP interfaces. [type Ctrl-C to abort "Set Up"]
-----------------------------------------------------------Will you be configuring VLANs? [y/n]
1.
Enter y if you will be configuring VLANs. Otherwise enter n.
If you decide not to configure VLANs during this session, you can configure them later using
the configuration menus, or by restarting the Setup facility. For more information on configuring VLANs, see the Alteon OS 20.1 Application Guide.
Next, the Setup utility prompts you to input basic system information.
2.
Enter the year of the current date at the prompt:
Enter year [2003]:
Enter the last two digits of the year as a number from 00 to 99. “00” is considered 2000. To
keep the current year, press <Enter>.
13N0340, March 2004
Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration 27
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
NOTE – When the GbE Switch Module is reset, the date and time to revert to default values.
Use /cfg/sys/date and /cfg/sys/time to reenter the current date and time.
The system displays the date and time settings:
System clock set to 18:55:36 Wed Jan 3, 2003.
3.
Enter the month of the current system date at the prompt:
System Date:
Enter month [1]:
Enter the month as a number from 1 to 12. To keep the current month, press <Enter>.
4.
Enter the day of the current date at the prompt:
Enter day [3]:
Enter the date as a number from 1 to 31. To keep the current day, press <Enter>.
5.
Enter the hour of the current system time at the prompt:
System Time:
Enter hour in 24-hour format [18]:
Enter the hour as a number from 00 to 23. To keep the current hour, press <Enter>.
6.
Enter the minute of the current time at the prompt:
Enter minutes [55]:
Enter the minute as a number from 00 to 59. To keep the current minute, press <Enter>.
7.
Enter the seconds of the current time at the prompt:
Enter seconds [37]:
Enter the seconds as a number from 00 to 59. To keep the current second, press <Enter>.
The system displays the date and time settings:
System clock set to 8:55:36 Wed Jan 3, 2001.
28 Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration
13N0340, March 2004
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
8.
Enable or disable the use of BOOTP at the prompt:
BootP Option:
Current BOOTP: disabled
Enter new BOOTP [d/e]:
If available on your network, a BOOTP server can supply the switch with IP parameters so that
you do not have to enter them manually. BOOTP must be disabled however, before the system
will prompt for IP parameters.
Enter d to disable the use of BOOTP, or enter e to enable the use of BOOTP. To keep the current
setting, press <Enter>.
9.
Turn Spanning Tree Protocol on or off at the prompt:
Spanning Tree:
Current Spanning Tree Group 1 setting: ON
Turn Spanning Tree Group 1 OFF? [y/n]
Enter y to turn off Spanning Tree, or enter n to leave Spanning Tree on.
Setup Part 2: Port Configuration
NOTE – When configuring port options for your switch, some of the prompts and options may
be different.
1.
Select the port to configure, or skip port configuration at the prompt:
Port Config:
Enter port alias or port number (INT1-14, MGT1-2, EXT1-4):
If you wish to change settings for individual ports, enter the number of the port you wish to
configure. To skip port configuration, press <Enter> without specifying any port and go to
“Setup Part 3: VLANs” on page 31.
2.
Configure Gigabit Ethernet port flow parameters.
If you selected a port that has a Gigabit Ethernet connector, the system prompts:
Gig Link Configuration:
Port Flow Control:
Current Port EXT1 flow control setting:
both
Enter new value ["rx"/"tx"/"both"/"none"]:
13N0340, March 2004
Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration 29
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
Enter rx to enable receive flow control, tx for transmit flow control, both to enable both, or
none to turn flow control off for the port. To keep the current setting, press <Enter>.
3.
Configure Gigabit Ethernet port autonegotiation mode.
If you selected a port that has a Gigabit Ethernet connector, the system prompts:
Port Auto Negotiation:
Current Port EXT1 autonegotiation:
Enter new value ["on"/"off"]:
on
Enter on to enable port autonegotiation, off to disable it, or press <Enter> to keep the current
setting.
4.
If configuring VLANs, enable or disable VLAN tagging for the port.
If you have selected to configure VLANs back in Part 1, the system prompts:
Port VLAN tagging config (tagged port can be a member of multiple VLANs)
Current TAG support:
disabled
Enter new TAG support [d/e]:
Enter d to disable VLAN tagging for the port or enter e to enable VLAN tagging for the port.
To keep the current setting, press <Enter>.
5.
The system prompts you to configure the next port:
Enter port alias or port number (INT1-14, MGT1-2, EXT1-4):
When you are through configuring ports, press <Enter> without specifying any port. Otherwise, repeat the steps in this section.
30 Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration
13N0340, March 2004
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
Setup Part 3: VLANs
If you chose to skip VLANs configuration back in Part 1, skip to “Setup Part 4: IP Configuration” on page 32.
1.
Select the VLAN to configure, or skip VLAN configuration at the prompt:
VLAN Config:
Enter VLAN number from 2 to 4095, NULL at end:
If you wish to change settings for individual VLANs, enter the number of the VLAN you wish
to configure. To skip VLAN configuration, press <Enter> without typing a VLAN number and
go to “Setup Part 4: IP Configuration” on page 32.
2.
Enter the new VLAN name at the prompt:
VLAN is newly created.
Pending new VLAN name: VLAN 2
Enter new VLAN name:
Entering a new VLAN name is optional. To use the pending new VLAN name, press <Enter>.
3.
Configure jumbo frame support for the VLAN:
VLAN Jumbo Frame Support:
Current jumbo frame support: disabled
Enter new jumbo frame support [d/e]:
4.
Enter the VLAN port numbers:
Define Ports in VLAN:
Current VLAN 2: empty
Enter ports one per line, NULL at end:
Enter each port, by port number or port alias, and confirm placement of the port into this
VLAN. When you are finished adding ports to this VLAN, press <Enter> without specifying
any port.
5.
Configure Spanning Tree Group membership for the VLAN:
Spanning Tree Group membership:
Enter new Spanning Tree Group index [1-16]:
13N0340, March 2004
Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration 31
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
6.
The system prompts you to configure the next VLAN:
VLAN Config:
Enter VLAN number from 2 to 4095, NULL at end:
Repeat the steps in this section until all VLANs have been configured. When all VLANs have
been configured, press <Enter> without specifying any VLAN.
Setup Part 4: IP Configuration
The system prompts for IP parameters.
IP Interfaces
IP interfaces are used for defining subnets to which the switch belongs.
Up to 128 IP interfaces can be configured on the GbE Switch Module. The IP address assigned to
each IP interface provide the switch with an IP presence on your network. No two IP interfaces
can be on the same IP subnet. The interfaces can be used for connecting to the switch for
remote configuration, and for routing between subnets and VLANs (if used).
1.
Select the IP interface to configure, or skip interface configuration at the prompt:
IP Config:
IP interfaces:
Enter interface number: (1-128)
If you wish to configure individual IP interfaces, enter the number of the IP interface you with
to configure. To skip IP interface configuration, press <Enter> without typing an interface
number and go to “Default Gateways” on page 33.
NOTE – Interface 128 is reserved for switch management. If you change the IP address of IF
128, you can lose the connection to the management module. Use the management module to
change the IP address of the Gbe Switch Module.
2.
For the specified IP interface, enter the IP address in dotted decimal notation:
Current IP address:
Enter new IP address:
0.0.0.0
To keep the current setting, press <Enter>.
32 Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration
13N0340, March 2004
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
3.
At the prompt, enter the IP subnet mask in dotted decimal notation:
Current subnet mask:
Enter new subnet mask:
0.0.0.0
To keep the current setting, press <Enter>.
4.
If configuring VLANs, specify a VLAN for the interface.
This prompt appears if you selected to configure VLANs back in Part 1:
Current VLAN:
Enter new VLAN:
1
Enter the number for the VLAN to which the interface belongs, or press <Enter> without specifying a VLAN number to accept the current setting.
5.
At the prompt, enter y to enable the IP interface, or n to leave it disabled:
Enable IP interface? [y/n]
6.
The system prompts you to configure another interface:
Enter interface number: (1-128)
Repeat the steps in this section until all IP interfaces have been configured. When all interfaces
have been configured, press <Enter> without specifying any interface number.
Default Gateways
1.
At the prompt, select a default gateway for configuration, or skip default gateway configuration:
IP default gateways:
Enter default gateway number: (1-132)
Enter the number for the default gateway to be configured. To skip default gateway configuration, press <Enter> without typing a gateway number and go to “IP Routing” on page 34.
13N0340, March 2004
Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration 33
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
2.
At the prompt, enter the IP address for the selected default gateway:
Current IP address:
Enter new IP address:
0.0.0.0
Enter the IP address in dotted decimal notation, or press <Enter> without specifying an address
to accept the current setting.
3.
At the prompt, enter y to enable the default gateway, or n to leave it disabled:
Enable default gateway? [y/n]
4.
The system prompts you to configure another default gateway:
Enter default gateway number: (1-132)
Repeat the steps in this section until all default gateways have been configured. When all
default gateways have been configured, press <Enter> without specifying any number.
IP Routing
When IP interfaces are configured for the various subnets attached to your switch, IP routing
between them can be performed entirely within the switch. This eliminates the need to send
inter-subnet communication to an external router device. Routing on more complex networks,
where subnets may not have a direct presence on the GbE Switch Module, can be accomplished
through configuring static routes or by letting the switch learn routes dynamically.
This part of the Setup program prompts you to configure the various routing parameters.
1.
At the prompt, enable or disable forwarding for IP Routing:
Enable IP forwarding? [y/n]
Enter y to enable IP forwarding. To disable IP forwarding, enter n and proceed to Step 2.To
keep the current setting, press <Enter>.
2.
At the prompt, enable or disable the RIP supply:
Enable RIP supply? [y/n]
34 Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration
13N0340, March 2004
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
Setup Part 5: Final Steps
1.
When prompted, decide whether to restart Setup or continue:
Would you like to run from top again? [y/n]
Enter y to restart the Setup utility from the beginning, or n to continue.
2.
When prompted, decide whether you wish to review the configuration changes:
Review the changes made? [y/n]
Enter y to review the changes made during this session of the Setup utility. Enter n to continue
without reviewing the changes. We recommend that you review the changes.
3.
Next, decide whether to apply the changes at the prompt:
Apply the changes? [y/n]
Enter y to apply the changes, or n to continue without applying. Changes are normally applied.
4.
At the prompt, decide whether to make the changes permanent:
Save changes to flash? [y/n]
Enter y to save the changes to flash. Enter n to continue without saving the changes. Changes
are normally saved at this point.
5.
If you do not apply or save the changes, the system prompts whether to abort them:
Abort all changes? [y/n]
Enter y to discard the changes. Enter n to return to the “Apply the changes?” prompt.
NOTE – After initial configuration is complete, it is recommended that you change the default
passwords as shown in “Setting Passwords” on page 37.
13N0340, March 2004
Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration 35
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
Optional Setup for SNMP Support
NOTE – This step is optional. Perform this procedure only if you are planning on using SNMPbased tools.
1.
Enable SNMP and select one of the options.
>> # /cfg/sys/snmp dis|read|write
2.
Set SNMP read or write community string. By default, they are public and private
respectively.
>> # /cfg/snmp/rcomm|wcomm
3.
Apply and save configuration if you are not configuring the switch with Telnet support.
Otherwise apply and save after “Optional Setup for Telnet Support” on page 36.
>> System# apply
>> System# save
Optional Setup for Telnet Support
NOTE – This step is optional. Perform this procedure only if you are planning on connecting to
the GbE Switch Module through a remote Telnet connection.
1.
Telnet is enabled by default. To change the setting, use the following command:
>> # /cfg/sys/tnet
2.
Apply and save SNMP and /or telnet configuration(s).
>> System# apply
>> System# save
If your network uses Routing Interface Protocol (RIP), enter y to enable the RIP supply. Otherwise, enter n to disable it. When RIP is enabled, RIP listen is set by default.
36 Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration
13N0340, March 2004
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
Setting Passwords
It is recommended that you change the user and administrator passwords after initial configuration and as regularly as required under your network security policies.
To change both the user password and the administrator password, you must login using the
administrator password. Passwords cannot be modified from the user command mode.
NOTE – If you forget your administrator password, call your technical support representative
for help using the password fix-up mode.
Changing the Default Administrator Password
The administrator has complete access to all menus, information, and configuration commands, including the ability to change both the user and administrator passwords.
The default password for the administrator account is admin. To change the default password,
follow this procedure:
1.
Connect to the switch and log in using the admin password.
2.
From the Main Menu, use the following command to access the Configuration Menu:
Main# /cfg
The Configuration Menu is displayed.
[Configuration Menu]
sys
- System-wide Parameter Menu
port
- Port Menu
pmirr
- Port Mirroring Menu
l2
- Layer 2 Menu
l3
- Layer 3 Menu
slb
- Server Load Balancing (Layer 4-7) Menu
setup
- Step by step configuration set up
dump
- Dump current configuration to script file
ptcfg
- Backup current configuration to tftp server
gtcfg
- Restore current configuration from tftp server
3.
From the Configuration Menu, use the following command to select the System Menu:
>> Configuration# sys
13N0340, March 2004
Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration 37
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
The System Menu is displayed.
[System Menu]
syslog
sshd
radius
ntp
ssnmp
access
date
time
idle
notice
bannr
smtp
hprompt
bootp
cur
4.
-
Syslog Menu
SSH Server Menu
RADIUS Authentication Menu
NTP Server Menu
System SNMP Menu
System Access Menu
Set system date
Set system time
Set timeout for idle CLI sessions
Set login notice
Set login banner
Set SMTP host
Enable/disable display hostname (sysName) in CLI prompt
Enable/disable use of BOOTP
Display current system-wide parameters
From the System Menu, use the following command to select the System Access Menu:
>> System# access
The System Access Menu is displayed.
[System Access Menu]
user
- User Access Control Menu (passwords)
http
- Enable/disable HTTP (Web) access
wport
- Set HTTP (Web) server port number
mnet
- Set management network
mmask
- Set management netmask
snmp
- Set SNMP access control
tnet
- Enable/disable Telnet access
tnport
- Set Telnet server port number
cur
- Display current system access configuration
5.
Select the administrator password.
System Access# user/admpw
6.
Enter the current administrator password at the prompt:
Changing ADMINISTRATOR password; validation required...
Enter current administrator password:
38 Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration
13N0340, March 2004
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
NOTE – If you forget your administrator password, call your technical support representative
for help using the password fix-up mode.
7.
Enter the new administrator password at the prompt:
Enter new administrator password:
8.
Enter the new administrator password, again, at the prompt:
Re-enter new administrator password:
9.
Apply and save your change by entering the following commands:
System# apply
System# save
Changing the Default User Password
The user login has limited control of the switch. Through a user account, you can view switch
information and statistics, but you can’t make configuration changes.
The default password for the user account is user. This password cannot be changed from the
user account. Only the administrator has the ability to change passwords, as shown in the following procedure.
1.
Connect to the switch and log in using the admin password.
2.
From the Main Menu, use the following command to access the Configuration Menu:
Main# cfg
3.
From the Configuration Menu, use the following command to select the System Menu:
>> Configuration# sys
4.
From the System Menu, use the following command to select the System Access Menu:
>> System# access
13N0340, March 2004
Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration 39
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
5.
Select the user password.
System# user/usrpw
6.
Enter the current administrator password at the prompt.
Only the administrator can change the user password. Entering the administrator password
confirms your authority.
Changing USER password; validation required...
Enter current administrator password:
7.
Enter the new user password at the prompt:
Enter new user password:
8.
Enter the new user password, again, at the prompt:
Re-enter new user password:
9.
Apply and save your changes:
System# apply
System# save
Changing the Default Layer 4 Administrator Password
The Layer 4 administrator has limited control of the switch. Through a Layer 4 administrator
account, you can view all switch information and statistics, but can configure changes only on
the Server Load Balancing menus.
The default password for the Layer 4 administrator account is l4admin. To change the
default password, follow this procedure:
1.
Connect to the switch and log in using the administrator account.
To change any switch password, you must login using the administrator password. Passwords
cannot be modified from the Layer 4 administrator account or the user account.
2.
From the Main Menu, use the following command to access the System Menu:
Main# /cfg/sys/access/user
40 Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration
13N0340, March 2004
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
3.
Select the Layer 4 administrator password:
System# l4apw
4.
Enter the current administrator password (not the Layer 4 administrator password) at
the prompt:
Changing L4 ADMINISTRATOR password; validation required...
Enter current administrator password:
NOTE – If you forget your administrator password, call your technical support representative
for help using the password fix-up mode.
5.
Enter the new Layer 4 administrator password at the prompt:
Enter new L4 administrator password:
6.
Enter the new administrator password, again, at the prompt:
Re-enter new L4 administrator password:
7.
Apply and save your change by entering the following commands:
System Access# apply
System Access# save
13N0340, March 2004
Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration 41
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
42 Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration
13N0340, March 2004
CHAPTER 3
Menu Basics
The GbE Switch Module’s Command Line Interface (CLI) is used for viewing switch information and statistics. In addition, the administrator can use the CLI for performing all levels of
switch configuration.
To make the CLI easy to use, the various commands have been logically grouped into a series
of menus and sub-menus. Each menu displays a list of commands and/or sub-menus that are
available, along with a summary of what each command will do. Below each menu is a prompt
where you can enter any command appropriate to the current menu.
This chapter describes the Main Menu commands, and provides a list of commands and shortcuts that are commonly available from all the menus within the CLI.
The Main Menu
The Main Menu appears after a successful connection and login. The following table shows
the Main Menu for the administrator login. Some features are not available under the user
login.
[Main Menu]
info
stats
cfg
oper
boot
maint
diff
apply
save
revert
exit
-
Information Menu
Statistics Menu
Configuration Menu
Operations Command Menu
Boot Options Menu
Maintenance Menu
Show pending config changes [global command]
Apply pending config changes [global command]
Save updated config to FLASH [global command]
Revert pending or applied changes [global command]
Exit [global command, always available]
43
13N0340, March 2004
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
Menu Summary
Information Menu
Provides sub-menus for displaying information about the current status of the switch:
from basic system settings to VLANs, Layer 4 settings, and more.
Statistics Menu
Provides sub-menus for displaying switch performance statistics. Included are port, IF, IP,
ICMP, TCP, UDP, SNMP, routing, ARP, DNS, VRRP, and Layer 4 statistics.
Configuration Menu
This menu is available only from an administrator login. It includes sub-menus for configuring every aspect of the switch. Changes to configuration are not active until explicitly
applied. Changes can be saved to non-volatile memory.
Operations Command Menu
Operations-level commands are used for making immediate and temporary changes to
switch configuration. This menu is used for bringing ports temporarily in and out of service, performing port mirroring, and enabling or disabling Server Load Balancing functions. It is also used for activating or deactivating optional software packages.
Boot Options Menu
This menu is used for upgrading switch software, selecting configuration blocks, and for
resetting the switch when necessary.
Maintenance Menu
This menu is used for debugging purposes, enabling you to generate a dump of the critical
state information in the switch, and to clear entries in the forwarding database and the
ARP and routing tables.
44 Chapter 3: Menu Basics
13N0340, March 2004
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
Global Commands
Some basic commands are recognized throughout the menu hierarchy. These commands are
useful for obtaining online help, navigating through menus, and for applying and saving configuration changes.
For help on a specific command, type help. You will see the following screen:
.
Global Commands: [can be issued from any menu]
help
up
print
lines
verbose
exit
diff
apply
save
ping
traceroute
telnet
pushd
popd
pwd
quit
revert
history
The following are used to navigate the menu structure:
. Print current menu
.. Move up one menu level
/ Top menu if first, or command separator
! Execute command from history
Table 3-1 Description of Global Commands
13N0340, March 2004
Command
Action
? command
or help
Provides more information about a specific command on the current menu.
When used without the command parameter, a summary of the global commands is displayed.
. or print
Display the current menu.
.. or up
Go up one level in the menu structure.
/
If placed at the beginning of a command, go to the Main Menu. Otherwise,
this is used to separate multiple commands placed on the same line.
lines
Set the number of lines (n) that display on the screen at one time. The default
is 24 lines. When used without a value, the current setting is displayed.
diff
Show any pending configuration changes.
apply
Apply pending configuration changes.
save
Write configuration changes to non-volatile flash memory.
Chapter 3: Menu Basics 45
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
Table 3-1 Description of Global Commands
Command
Action
revert
Remove pending configuration changes between “apply” commands. Use
this command to restore configuration parameters set since last “apply” command.
exit or quit
Exit from the command line interface and log out.
ping
Use this command to verify station-to-station connectivity across the network. The format is as follows:
ping <host name>|<IP address> [tries (1-32)> [msec delay]] [-m|
-mgmt|-d|-data]
Where IP address is the hostname or IP address of the device, tries (optional)
is the number of attempts (1-32), msec delay (optional) is the number of milliseconds between attempts. By default, the -d or -data option for network ports is in effect. If the management port is used, specify the -m or
-mgmt option. The DNS parameters must be configured if specifying hostnames (see “Domain Name System Configuration” on page 218).
traceroute
Use this command to identify the route used for station-to-station connectivity across the network. The format is as follows:
traceroute <host name>| <IP address> [<max-hops (1-32)>
[msec delay]] [-m|-mgmt|-d|-data]
Where IP address is the hostname or IP address of the target station, maxhops (optional) is the maximum distance to trace (1-16 devices), and delay
(optional) is the number of milliseconds for wait for the response. By default,
the -d or -data option for network ports is in effect. If the management
port is used, specify the -m or -mgmt option. As with ping, the DNS
parameters must be configured if specifying hostnames.
pwd
Display the command path used to reach the current menu.
verbose n
Sets the level of information displayed on the screen:
0 =Quiet: Nothing appears except errors—not even prompts.
1 =Normal: Prompts and requested output are shown, but no menus.
2 =Verbose: Everything is shown.
When used without a value, the current setting is displayed.
telnet
This command is used to telnet out of the switch. The format is as follows:
<hostname>|<IP address> [port] [-m|-mgmt|-d|-data].
Where IP address is the hostname or IP address of the device. By default, the
-d or -data option for network ports is in effect. If the management port is
used, specify the -m or -mgmt option.
history
This command brings up the history of the last 10 commands.
46 Chapter 3: Menu Basics
13N0340, March 2004
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
Command Line History and Editing
Using the command line interface, you can retrieve and modify previously entered commands
with just a few keystrokes. The following options are available globally at the command line:
Table 3-2 Command Line History and Editing Options
Option
Description
history
Display a numbered list of the last 10 previously entered commands.
!!
Repeat the last entered command.
!n
Repeat the nth command shown on the history list.
<Ctrl-p>
(Also the up arrow key.) Recall the previous command from the history list. This can
be used multiple times to work backward through the last 10 commands. The recalled
command can be entered as is, or edited using the options below.
<Ctrl-n>
(Also the down arrow key.) Recall the next command from the history list. This can be
used multiple times to work forward through the last 10 commands. The recalled command can be entered as is, or edited using the options below.
<Ctrl-a>
Move the cursor to the beginning of command line.
<Ctrl-e>
Move cursor to the end of the command line.
<Ctrl-b>
(Also the left arrow key.) Move the cursor back one position to the left.
<Ctrl-f>
(Also the right arrow key.) Move the cursor forward one position to the right.
<Backspace>
(Also the Delete key.) Erase one character to the left of the cursor position.
<Ctrl-d>
Delete one character at the cursor position.
<Ctrl-k>
Kill (erase) all characters from the cursor position to the end of the command line.
<Ctrl-l>
Redraw the screen.
<Ctrl-u>
Clear the entire line.
Other keys
Insert new characters at the cursor position.
13N0340, March 2004
Chapter 3: Menu Basics 47
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
Command Line Interface Shortcuts
Command Stacking
As a shortcut, you can type multiple commands on a single line, separated by forward slashes
(/). You can connect as many commands as required to access the menu option that you want.
For example, the keyboard shortcut to access the Spanning Tree Port Configuration Menu from
the Main# prompt is as follows:
Main# cfg/stg/port
Command Abbreviation
Most commands can be abbreviated by entering the first characters which distinguish the command from the others in the same menu or sub-menu. For example, the command shown above
could also be entered as follows:
Main# c/st/p
Tab Completion
By entering the first letter of a command at any menu prompt and hitting <Tab>, the CLI will
display all commands or options in that menu that begin with that letter. Entering additional
letters will further refine the list of commands or options displayed. If only one command fits
the input text when <Tab> is pressed, that command will be supplied on the command line,
waiting to be entered. If the <Tab> key is pressed without any input on the command line, the
currently active menu will be displayed.
48 Chapter 3: Menu Basics
13N0340, March 2004
CHAPTER 4
The Information Menu
You can view configuration information for the switch in both the user and administrator command
modes. This chapter discusses how to use the command line interface to display switch infor-
mation.
/info
Information Menu
[Information Menu]
sys
- System Information Menu
l2
- Layer 2 Information Menu
l3
- Layer 3 Information Menu
slb
- Layer 4-7 Information Menu
link
- Show link status
port
- Show port information
dump
- Dump all information
The information provided by each menu option is briefly described in Table 4-1 on page 49,
with pointers to where detailed information can be found.
Table 4-1 Information Menu Options (/info)
Command Syntax and Usage
sys
Displays the System Information Menu. For details, see page 50.
l2
Displays the Layer 2 Information Menu. For details, see page 54.
l3
Displays the Layer 3 Information Menu. For details, see page 64.
slb
Displays the Layer 4 Information Menu. For details, see page 79.
49
13N0340, March 2004
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
Table 4-1 Information Menu Options (/info)
Command Syntax and Usage
link
Displays configuration information about each port, including:
Port alias
Port speed (10, 100, 10/100, or 1000)
Duplex mode (half, full, or auto)
Flow control for transmit and receive (no, yes, or auto)
Link status (up or down)
For details, see page 86.
port
Displays port status information, including:
Port alias
Whether the port uses VLAN Tagging or not
Port VLAN ID (PVID)
Port name
VLAN membership
For details, see page 87.
dump
Dumps all switch information available from the Information Menu (10K or more, depending on
your configuration).
If you want to capture dump data to a file, set your communication software on your workstation to
capture session data prior to issuing the dump commands.
/info/sys
System Information
[System Menu]
general - Show general system information
log
- Show last 30 syslog messages
dump
- Dump all system information
50 Chapter 4: The Information Menu
13N0340, March 2004
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
The information provided by each menu option is briefly described in Table 4-2 on page 51,
with pointers to where detailed information can be found.
Table 4-2 System Menu Options (/info/sys)
Command Syntax and Usage
general
Displays system information, including:
System date and time
Switch model name and number
Switch name and location
Time of last boot
MAC address of the switch management processor
IP address of IP interface #1
Hardware version and part number
Software image file and version number
Configuration name
Log-in banner, if one is configured
For details, see page 52.
log
Displays 30 most recent syslog messages. For details, see page 53.
dump
Dumps all switch information available from the Information Menu (10K or more, depending on
your configuration).
13N0340, March 2004
Chapter 4: The Information Menu 51
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
/info/sys/general
General System Information
System Information at
0:57:36 Thu Jul
1, 2003
Layer 2-7 Gigabit Ethernet Switch Module for IBM eServer BladeCenter
Switch is up 5 days, 1 hour, 1 minute and 21 seconds.
Last boot: 0:01:03 Thu Jul 1, 2003 (power cycle)
MAC Address: 00:09:97:ec:e6:00
Management IP Address (if 128):
10.90.90.97
Hardware Order No:
EL4512001
PLD Firmware Version: 3.4
Software Version 20.1.0.15 (FLASH image2), active configuration.
NOTE – The display of temperature will come up only if the temperature of any of the sensors
exceeds the temperature threshold. There will be a warning from the software if any of the sensors exceeds this temperature threshold. The switch will shut down if the power supply overheats.
System information includes:
System date and time
Switch model
Switch name and location
Time of last boot
MAC address of the switch management processor
IP address of IP interface #1
Hardware version and part number
Software image file and version number
Configuration name
Log-in banner, if one is configured
52 Chapter 4: The Information Menu
13N0340, March 2004
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
/info/sys/log
Show Last 30 Syslog Messages
Date
Jul
Jul
Jul
Jul
Jul
Jul
Jul
Jul
Jul
Jul
Jul
Jul
Jul
Jul
Jul
Jul
Jul
Jul
Jul
Jul
Jul
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
Time
17:25:41
17:25:41
17:25:41
17:25:41
17:25:41
17:25:41
17:25:41
17:25:41
17:25:41
17:25:41
17:25:41
17:25:41
17:25:41
17:25:41
17:25:42
17:25:42
17:25:42
17:25:42
17:25:42
17:25:42
17:25:42
Criticality level
NOTICE
system:
NOTICE
system:
NOTICE
system:
NOTICE
system:
NOTICE
system:
NOTICE
system:
NOTICE
system:
NOTICE
system:
NOTICE
system:
NOTICE
system:
NOTICE
system:
NOTICE
system:
NOTICE
system:
NOTICE
system:
NOTICE
system:
NOTICE
system:
NOTICE
system:
NOTICE
system:
NOTICE
system:
NOTICE
system:
NOTICE
system:
Message
link up
link up
link up
link up
link up
link up
link up
link up
link up
link up
link up
link up
link up
link up
link up
link up
link up
link up
link up
link up
link up
on
on
on
on
on
on
on
on
on
on
on
on
on
on
on
on
on
on
on
on
on
port
port
port
port
port
port
port
port
port
port
port
port
port
port
port
port
port
port
port
port
port
INT1
INT8
INT7
INT12
INT11
INT14
INT13
INT6
INT5
EXT4
EXT1
EXT3
EXT2
INT13
INT2
INT4
INT3
INT6
INT5
INT10
INT9
Each syslog message has a criticality level associated with it, included in text form as a prefix
to the log message. One of eight different prefixes is used, depending on the condition that the
administrator is being notified of, as shown below.
EMERG: indicates the system is unusable
ALERT: Indicates action should be taken immediately
CRIT: Indicates critical conditions
ERR: indicates error conditions or errored operations
WARNING: indicates warning conditions
NOTICE: indicates a normal but significant condition
INFO: indicates an information message
DEBUG: indicates a debut-level message
13N0340, March 2004
Chapter 4: The Information Menu 53
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
/info/l2
Layer 2 Menu
[Layer 2 Menu]
fdb
lacp
stg
trunk
vlan
dump
-
Forwarding Database Information Menu
Link Aggregation Control Protocol Menu
Show STG information
Show Trunk Group information
Show VLAN information
Dump all layer 2 information
The information provided by each menu option is briefly described in Table 4-3 on page 54,
with pointers to where detailed information can be found.
Table 4-3 Layer 2 Menu Options (/info/l2)
Command Syntax and Usage
fdb
Displays the Forwarding Database Information Menu. For details, see page 55.
lacp
Displays the Link Aggregation Control Protocol Menu. For details, see page 58.
stg
In addition to seeing if STG is enabled or disabled, you can view the following STG bridge information:
Priority
Hello interval
Maximum age value
Forwarding delay
Aging time
You can also see the following port-specific STG information:
Port alias and priority
Cost
State
For details, see page 60.
trunk
When trunk groups are configured, you can view the state of each port in the various trunk groups.
For details, see page 62.
54 Chapter 4: The Information Menu
13N0340, March 2004
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
Table 4-3 Layer 2 Menu Options (/info/l2)
Command Syntax and Usage
vlan
Displays VLAN configuration information, including:
VLAN Number
VLAN Name
Status
Port membership of the VLAN
For details, see page 63.
dump
Dumps all switch information available from the Layer 2 menu (10K or more, depending on your
configuration).
If you want to capture dump data to a file, set your communication software on your workstation to
capture session data prior to issuing the dump commands.
/info/l2/fdb
FDB Information Menu
[Forwarding Database Menu]
find
- Show a single FDB entry by MAC address
port
- Show FDB entries on a single port
trunk
- Show FDB entries on a single trunk
vlan
- Show FDB entries on a single VLAN
refpt
- Show FDB entries referenced by a single port
dump
- Show all FDB entries
The forwarding database (FDB) contains information that maps the media access control
(MAC) address of each known device to the switch port where the device address was learned.
The FDB also shows which other ports have seen frames destined for a particular MAC
address.
13N0340, March 2004
Chapter 4: The Information Menu 55
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
NOTE – The master forwarding database supports up to 2K MAC address entries on the MP
per switch. Each SP port supports up to 1K entries.
Table 4-4 FDB Information Menu Options (/info/l2/fdb)
Command Syntax and Usage
find <MAC address> [<VLAN>]
Displays a single database entry by its MAC address. You are prompted to enter the MAC address
of the device. Enter the MAC address using the format, xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx. For example,
08:00:20:12:34:56.
You can also enter the MAC address using the format, xxxxxxxxxxxx.
For example, 080020123456.
port <port number or alias (1-20)>
Displays all FDB entries for a particular port.
trunk <Trunk Group number>
Displays all FDB entries on a single trunk.
vlan <VLAN number (1-4095)>
Displays all FDB entries on a single VLAN.
refpt <SP number (1-4)>
Displays the FDB entries referenced by a single port.
dump
Displays all entries in the Forwarding Database. For more information, see page 57.
56 Chapter 4: The Information Menu
13N0340, March 2004
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
/info/l2/fdb/dump
Show All FDB Information
MAC address
VLAN Port Trunk State Referenced SPs Learned port
----------------- ---- ---- ----- ----- -------------- ----------00:02:01:00:00:00 300 EXT1
FWD
2
EXT1
00:02:01:00:00:01 300 INT11
FWD
1
INT11
00:02:01:00:00:02 300 INT10
FWD
2
INT10
00:02:01:00:00:03 300 INT7
FWD
1
INT7
00:02:01:00:00:04 300 INT13
FWD
1
INT13
00:02:01:00:00:05 300 INT14
FWD
2
INT14
00:02:01:00:00:06 300 INT6
FWD
2
INT6
00:02:01:00:00:07 300 INT12
FWD
2
INT12
00:02:01:00:00:08 300 INT5
FWD
1 2
INT5
00:02:01:00:00:09 300 INT4
FWD
1 2
INT4
00:02:01:00:00:0a 300 INT3
FWD
1 2
INT3
00:02:01:00:00:0b 300 INT2
FWD
1 2
INT2
00:02:01:00:00:0c 4095 MGT1
FWD
1
MGT1
An address that is in the forwarding (FWD) state, means that it has been learned by the switch.
When in the trunking (TRK) state, the port field represents the trunk group number. If the state
for the port is listed as unknown (UNK), the MAC address has not yet been learned by the
switch, but has only been seen as a destination address. When an address is in the unknown
state, no outbound port is indicated, although ports which reference the address as a destination
will be listed under “Reference ports.”
If the state for the port is listed as an interface (IF), the MAC address is for a standard VRRP
virtual router. If the state is listed as a virtual server (VIP), the MAC address is for a virtual
server router—a virtual router with the same IP address as a virtual server.
Clearing Entries from the Forwarding Database
To delete a MAC address from the forwarding database (FDB) or to clear the entire FDB, refer
to “Forwarding Database Options” on page 295.
13N0340, March 2004
Chapter 4: The Information Menu 57
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
/info/l2/lacp
Link Aggregation Control Protocol menu
[LACP Menu]
aggr
port
dump
- Show LACP aggregator information for the port
- Show LACP port information
- Show all LACP ports information
Use these commands to display LACP status information about each port on a GbE Switch Module.
Table 4-5 Link Aggregation Control Protocol (/info/l2/lacp)
Command Syntax and Usage
aggr
Displays detailed information of the LACP aggregator used by the selected port.
port
Displays LACP information about the selected port.
dump
Displays a summary of LACP information. For details, see page 58.
/info/l2/lacp/dump
Link Aggregation Control Protocol
port
lacp
adminkey
operkey
selected
prio
attached trunk
aggr
-------------------------------------------------------------EXT1 active
30
30
y
128
17
19
EXT2 active
30
30
y
128
17
19
EXT3 off
19
19
n
128
--EXT4 off
20
20
n
128
---
LACP dump includes the following information for each external port in the GbESM:
lacp
Displays the port’s LACP mode (active, passive, or off)
adminkey
Displays the value of the port’s adminkey.
58 Chapter 4: The Information Menu
13N0340, March 2004
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
operkey
Shows the value of the port’s operational key.
selected
Indicates whether the port has been selected to be part of a Link Aggregation Group.
prio
Shows the value of the port priority.
attached aggr
Displays the aggregator associated with each port.
trunk
This value represents the LACP trunk group number.
13N0340, March 2004
Chapter 4: The Information Menu 59
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
/info/l2/stg
Spanning Tree Information
Spanning Tree Group 1: On
Current Root:
8000 00:03:42:fa:3b:80
Parameters:
Priority
32768
Port Priority
---- -------INT1
128
INT2
128
INT3
128
INT4
128
INT5
128
INT6
128
INT7
128
INT8
128
INT9
128
INT10
128
INT11
128
INT12
128
INT13
128
INT14
128
EXT1
128
EXT2
128
EXT3
128
EXT4
128
60 Chapter 4: The Information Menu
Cost
---5
5
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
10
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Path-Cost
0
Hello
2
MaxAge
20
Port Hello MaxAge FwdDel Aging
0
2
20
15
300
FwdDel
15
Aging
300
State
Designated Bridge
Des Port
---------- ---------------------- -------FORWARDING
8000-00:03:42:fa:3b:80
32769
FORWARDING
8000-00:03:42:fa:3b:80
32770
DISABLED
DISABLED
DISABLED
DISABLED
DISABLED
DISABLED
DISABLED
DISABLED
FORWARDING
8000-00:03:42:fa:3b:80
32779
DISABLED
DISABLED
DISABLED
DISABLED
DISABLED
DISABLED
DISABLED
13N0340, March 2004
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
The switch software uses the IEEE 802.1d Spanning Tree Protocol (STP). In addition to seeing
if STG is enabled or disabled, you can view the following STG bridge information:
Priority
Hello interval
Maximum age value
Forwarding delay
Aging time
You can also see the following port-specific STG information:
Slot number
Port alias and priority
Cost
State
The following table describes the STG parameters.
Table 4-6 Spanning Tree Parameter Descriptions
Parameter
Description
Priority (bridge)
The bridge priority parameter controls which bridge on the network will
become the STG root bridge.
Hello
The hello time parameter specifies, in seconds, how often the root bridge
transmits a configuration bridge protocol data unit (BPDU). Any bridge that
is not the root bridge uses the root bridge hello value.
MaxAge
The maximum age parameter specifies, in seconds, the maximum time the
bridge waits without receiving a configuration bridge protocol data unit
before it reconfigure the STG network.
FwdDel
The forward delay parameter specifies, in seconds, the amount of time that a
bridge port has to wait before it changes from learning state to forwarding
state.
Aging
The aging time parameter specifies, in seconds, the amount of time the
bridge waits without receiving a packet from a station before removing the
station from the Forwarding Database.
priority (port)
The port priority parameter helps determine which bridge port becomes the
designated port. In a network topology that has multiple bridge ports connected to a single segment, the port with the lowest port priority becomes the
designated port for the segment.
13N0340, March 2004
Chapter 4: The Information Menu 61
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
Table 4-6 Spanning Tree Parameter Descriptions (Continued)
Parameter
Description
Cost
The port path cost parameter is used to help determine the designated port for
a segment. Generally speaking, the faster the port, the lower the path cost. A
setting of 0 indicates that the cost will be set to the appropriate default after
the link speed has been auto negotiated.
State
The state field shows the current state of the port. The state field can be either
BLOCKING, LISTENING, LEARNING, FORWARDING, or DISABLED.
/info/l2/trunk
Trunk Group Information
Trunk group 1, failover ena, port state:
1: STG 1 forwarding
2: STG 1 forwarding
When trunk groups are configured, you can view the state of each port in the various trunk
groups.
NOTE – If Spanning Tree Protocol on any port in the trunk group is set to forwarding, the
remaining ports in the trunk group will also be set to forwarding.
62 Chapter 4: The Information Menu
13N0340, March 2004
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
/info/l2/vlan
VLAN Information
VLAN
---1
2
7
11
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
24
300
4000
4095
Name
Status Jumbo Ports
-------------------------------- ------ ----- ---------------Default VLAN
ena
n
EXT1 EXT3
pc03p
ena
n
INT2
pc07f
ena
n
INT7
pc04u
ena
n
INT11
8600-14
ena
n
INT14
8600-15
ena
n
INT5
8600-16
ena
n
INT6
8600-17
ena
n
INT8
35k-1
ena
n
INT9
35k-2
ena
n
INT10
35k-3
ena
n
INT12
35k-4
ena
n
INT13
pc07z
ena
n
INT6
redlan
ena
n
INT7
ixiaTraffic
ena
n
EXT1 INT12 INT13
bpsports
ena
n
INT3-INT6
Mgmt VLAN
ena
n
MGT1 MGT2
This information display includes all configured VLANs and all member ports that have an
active link state. Port membership is represented in slot/port format.
VLAN information includes:
VLAN Number
VLAN Name
Status
Jumbo frame support
Port membership of the VLAN
13N0340, March 2004
Chapter 4: The Information Menu 63
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
/info/l3
Layer 3 Menu
[Layer 3 Menu]
route
arp
bgp
ospf
ip
vrrp
dump
-
IP Routing Information Menu
ARP Information Menu
BGP Information Menu
OSPF Routing Information Menu
Show IP information
Show Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol information
Dump all layer 3 information
The information provided by each menu option is briefly described in Table 4-7 on page 64,
with pointers to where detailed information can be found.
Table 4-7 Layer 3 Menu Options (/info/l3)
Command Syntax and Usage
route
Displays the IP Routing Menu. Using the options of this menu, the system displays the following
for each configured or learned route:
Route destination IP address, subnet mask, and gateway address
Type of route
Tag indicating origin of route
Metric for RIP tagged routes, specifying the number of hops to the destination (1-15 hops, or 16
for infinite hops)
The IP interface that the route uses
For details, see page 66.
arp
Displays the Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) Information Menu. For details, see page 68.
bgp
Displays BGP Information Menu. To view menu options, see page 71.
ospf
Displays OSPF routing information menu. For details, see page 73.
64 Chapter 4: The Information Menu
13N0340, March 2004
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
Table 4-7 Layer 3 Menu Options (/info/l3)
Command Syntax and Usage
ip
Displays IP Information. For details, see page 77.
IP information, includes:
IP interface information: Interface number, IP address, subnet mask, VLAN number, and opera-
tional status.
Default gateway information: Metric for selecting which configured gateway to use, gateway
number, IP address, and health status
IP forwarding information: Enable status, lnet and lmask
Port status
vrrp
Displays the VRRP Information Menu. For details, see page 77.
dump
Dumps all switch information available from the Layer 3 Menu (10K or more, depending on your
configuration).
If you want to capture dump data to a file, set your communication software on your workstation to
capture session data prior to issuing the dump commands.
13N0340, March 2004
Chapter 4: The Information Menu 65
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
/info/l3/route
IP Routing Information
[IP Routing Menu]
find
- Show
gw
- Show
type
- Show
tag
- Show
if
- Show
dump
- Show
a single route by destination IP address
routes to a single gateway
routes of a single type
routes of a single tag
routes on a single interface
all routes
Using the commands listed below, you can display all or a portion of the IP routes currently
held in the switch.
Table 4-8 Route Information Menu Options (/info/l3/route)
Command Syntax and Usage
find <IP address (such as 192.4.17.101)>
Displays a single route by destination IP address.
gw <default gateway address (such as 192.4.17.44)>
Displays routes to a single gateway.
type indirect|direct|local|broadcast|martian|multicast
Displays routes of a single type. For a description of IP routing types, see Table 4-9 on page 67.
tag fixed|static|addr|rip|ospf|bgp|broadcast|martian|vip
Displays routes of a single tag. For a description of IP routing types, see Table 4-10 on page 68.
if <interface number (1-128)>
Displays routes on a single interface.
dump
Displays all routes configured in the switch. For more information, see page 66.
66 Chapter 4: The Information Menu
13N0340, March 2004
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
/info/l3/route/dump
Show All IP Route Information
Status code: * - best
Destination
Mask
Gateway
Type
Tag
Metr If
--------------- --------------- --------------- --------- --------- ---- -* 11.0.0.0
255.0.0.0
11.0.0.1
direct
fixed
211
* 11.0.0.1
255.255.255.255 11.0.0.1
local
addr
211
* 11.255.255.255 255.255.255.255 11.255.255.255 broadcast broadcast
211
* 12.0.0.0
255.0.0.0
12.0.0.1
direct
fixed
12
* 12.0.0.1
255.255.255.255 12.0.0.1
local
addr
12
* 12.255.255.255 255.255.255.255 12.255.255.255 broadcast broadcast
12
* 13.0.0.0
255.0.0.0
11.0.0.2
indirect ospf
2 211
* 47.0.0.0
255.0.0.0
47.133.88.1
indirect static
24
* 47.133.88.0
255.255.255.0
47.133.88.46
direct
fixed
24
* 172.30.52.223
255.255.255.255 172.30.52.223
broadcast broadcast
2
* 224.0.0.0
224.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
martian
martian
* 224.0.0.5
255.255.255.255 0.0.0.0
multicast addr
The following table describes the Type parameters.
Table 4-9 IP Routing Type Parameters (/info/l3/route/dump/type)
Parameter
Description
indirect
The next hop to the host or subnet destination will be forwarded through a
router at the Gateway address.
direct
Packets will be delivered to a destination host or subnet attached to the
switch.
local
Indicates a route to one of the switch’s IP interfaces.
broadcast
Indicates a broadcast route.
martian
The destination belongs to a host or subnet which is filtered out. Packets to
this destination are discarded.
multicast
Indicates a multicast route.
13N0340, March 2004
Chapter 4: The Information Menu 67
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
The following table describes the Tag parameters.
Table 4-10 IP Routing Tag Parameters (info/l3/route/tag)
Parameter
Description
fixed
The address belongs to a host or subnet attached to the switch.
static
The address is a static route which has been configured on the GbE Switch
Module.
addr
The address belongs to one of the switch’s IP interfaces.
rip
The address was learned by the Routing Information Protocol (RIP).
ospf
The address was learned by Open Shortest Path First (OSPF).
bgp
The address was learned via Border Gateway Protocol (BGP)
broadcast
Indicates a broadcast address.
martian
The address belongs to a filtered group.
vip
Indicates a route destination that is a virtual server IP address. VIP routes are
needed to advertise virtual server IP addresses via BGP.
/info/l3/arp
ARP Information
[Address Resolution Protocol Menu]
find
- Show a single ARP entry by IP address
port
- Show ARP entries on a single port
vlan
- Show ARP entries on a single VLAN
refpt
- Show ARP entries referenced by a single port
dump
- Show all ARP entries
help
- Show help on the fields of ARP entries
addr
- Show ARP address list
The ARP information includes IP address and MAC address of each entry, address status flags
(see Table 4-11 on page 68), VLAN and port for the address, and port referencing information.
Table 4-11 ARP Information Menu Options (/info/l3/arp)
Command Syntax and Usage
find <IP address (such as, 192.4.17.101>
Displays a single ARP entry by IP address.
68 Chapter 4: The Information Menu
13N0340, March 2004
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
Table 4-11 ARP Information Menu Options (/info/l3/arp)
Command Syntax and Usage
port <port alias or number (1-20)>
Displays the ARP entries on a single port.
vlan <VLAN number (1-4095)>
Displays the ARP entries on a single VLAN.
refpt <port alias or number (1-4)>
Displays the ARP entries referenced by a single port.
dump
Displays all ARP entries. including:
IP address and MAC address of each entry
Address status flag (see below)
The VLAN and port to which the address belongs
The ports which have referenced the address (empty if no port has routed traffic to the IP
address shown)
For more information, see page 70.
help
Displays Help information about ARP entries.
addr
Displays the ARP address list: IP address, IP mask, MAC address, and VLAN flags.
/info/l3/arp/dump
Show All ARP Entry Information
IP address
Flags
--------------- ----47.80.22.1
47.80.23.243
P
47.80.23.245
190.10.10.1
P
MAC address
VLAN Port Referenced SPs
----------------- ---- ---- --------------00:e0:16:7c:28:86
1 INT6
empty
00:03:42:fa:3b:30
1
1 2
00:c0:4f:60:3e:c1
1 INT6
empty
00:03:42:fa:3b:30
10
1 2
Referenced ports are the ports that request the ARP entry. So the traffic coming into the referenced ports has the destination IP address. From the ARP entry (the referenced ports), this traffic needs to be forwarded to the egress port (port INT6 in the above example).
NOTE – If you have VMA turned on, the referenced port will be the designated port. If you
have VMA turned off, the designated port will be the normal ingress port.
13N0340, March 2004
Chapter 4: The Information Menu 69
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
The Flag field is interpreted as follows:
Table 4-12 ARP Dump Flag Parameters
Flag
Description
P
Permanent entry created for switch IP interface.
P 4
Permanent entry created for Layer 4 proxy IP address or virtual server IP
address.
R
Indirect route entry.
U
Unresolved ARP entry. The MAC address has not been learned.
/info/l3/arp/addr
ARP Address List Information
IP address
--------------205.178.18.66
205.178.50.1
205.178.18.64
70 Chapter 4: The Information Menu
IP mask
MAC address
VLAN Flags
--------------- ----------------- ---- ----255.255.255.255 00:70:cf:03:20:04
P
255.255.255.255 00:70:cf:03:20:06
1
255.255.255.255 00:70:cf:03:20:05
1
13N0340, March 2004
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
/info/l3/bgp
BGP Information Menu
[BGP Menu]
peer
- Show all BGP peers
summary - Show all BGP peers in summary
dump
- Show BGP routing table
Table 4-13 BGP Peer Information Menu Options
Command Syntax and Usage
peer
Displays BGP peer information. See page 71 for a sample output.
summary
Displays peer summary information such as AS, message received, message sent, up/down, state.
See page 72 for a sample output.
dump
Displays the BGP routing table. See page 72 for a sample output.
/info/l3/ip/bgp/peer
BGP Peer information
Following is an example of the information that /info/l3/ip/bgp/peer provides.
BGP Peer Information:
3: 2.1.1.1
, version 0, TTL 1
Remote AS: 0, Local AS: 0, Link type: IBGP
Remote router ID: 0.0.0.0,
Local router ID: 1.1.201.5
BGP status: idle, Old status: idle
Total received packets: 0, Total sent packets: 0
Received updates: 0, Sent updates: 0
Keepalive: 0, Holdtime: 0, MinAdvTime: 60
LastErrorCode: unknown(0), LastErrorSubcode: unspecified(0)
Established state transitions: 0
4: 2.1.1.4
, version 0, TTL 1
Remote AS: 0, Local AS: 0, Link type: IBGP
Remote router ID: 0.0.0.0,
Local router ID: 1.1.201.5
BGP status: idle, Old status: idle
Total received packets: 0, Total sent packets: 0
Received updates: 0, Sent updates: 0
Keepalive: 0, Holdtime: 0, MinAdvTime: 60
LastErrorCode: unknown(0), LastErrorSubcode: unspecified(0)
Established state transitions: 0
13N0340, March 2004
Chapter 4: The Information Menu 71
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
/info/l3/ip/bgp/summary
BGP Summary information
Following is an example of the information that /info/l3/ip/bgp/summary provides.
BGP Peer Summary
Peer
--------------1: 205.178.23.142
2: 205.178.15.148
Information:
V
AS
MsgRcvd MsgSent Up/Down
State
- -------- -------- -------- -------- ---------4
142
113
121 00:00:28 established
0
148
0
0 never
connect
/info/l3/ip/bgp/dump
Dump BGP Information
Following is an example of the information that /info/l3/ip/bgp/dump provides.
>> BGP# dump
Status codes: * valid, > best, i - internal
Origin codes: i - IGP, e - EGP, ? - incomplete
Network
Next Hop
Metr LcPrf Wght
--------------- --------------- ----- ---- ----*> 10.0.0.0
205.178.21.147
1
256
*>i205.178.15.0
0.0.0.0
*
205.178.21.147
1
128
*> 205.178.17.0
205.178.21.147
1
128
13.0.0.0
205.178.21.147
1
256
Path
-------------147 148 i
0 i
147 i
147 i
147 {35} ?
The 13.0.0.0 is filtered out by rrmap; or, a loop detected.
72 Chapter 4: The Information Menu
13N0340, March 2004
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
/info/l3/ospf
OSPF Information
[OSPF Information Menu]
general - Show general information
aindex - Show area(s) information
if
- Show interface(s) information
virtual - Show details of virtual links
nbr
- Show neighbor(s) information
dbase
- Database Menu
sumaddr - Show summary address list
nsumadd - Show NSSA summary address list
routes - Show OSPF routes
Table 4-14 OSPF Information Menu options
Command Syntax and Usage
general
Displays general OSPF information. See page 74 for a sample output.
aindex <area index [0-2]>
Displays area information for a particular area index. If no parameter is supplied, it displays area
information for all the areas.
if <interface number [1-128]>
Displays interface information for a particular interface. If no parameter is supplied, it displays
information for all the interfaces. See page 74 for a sample output.
virtual
Displays information about all the configured virtual links.
nbr <nbr router-id [A.B.C.D]>
Displays the status of a neighbor with a particular router ID. If no router ID is supplied, it displays
the information about all the current neighbors.
dbase
Displays OSPF database menu. To view menu options, see page 75.
sumaddr <area index [0-2]>
Displays the list of summary ranges belonging to non-NSSA areas.
nsumadd <area index [0-2]>
Displays the list of summary ranges belonging to NSSA areas.
routes
Displays OSPF routing table. See page 76 for a sample output.
13N0340, March 2004
Chapter 4: The Information Menu 73
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
/info/l3/ospf/general
OSPF General Information
OSPF Version 2
Router ID: 10.10.10.1
Started at 1663 and the process uptime is 4626
Area Border Router: yes, AS Boundary Router: no
LS types supported are 6
External LSA count 0
External LSA checksum sum 0x0
Number of interfaces in this router is 2
Number of virtual links in this router is 1
16 new lsa received and 34 lsa originated from this router
Total number of entries in the LSDB 10
Database checksum sum 0x0
Total neighbors are 1, of which
2 are >=INIT state,
2 are >=EXCH state,
2 are =FULL state
Number of areas is 2, of which 3-transit 0-nssa
Area Id : 0.0.0.0
Authentication : none
Import ASExtern : yes
Number of times SPF ran : 8
Area Border Router count : 2
AS Boundary Router count : 0
LSA count : 5
LSA Checksum sum : 0x2237B
Summary : noSummary
/info/l3/ospf/if
OSPF Interface Information
Ip Address 10.10.12.1, Area 0.0.0.1, Admin Status UP
Router ID 10.10.10.1, State DR, Priority 1
Designated Router (ID) 10.10.10.1, Ip Address 10.10.12.1
Backup Designated Router (ID) 10.10.14.1, Ip Address 10.10.12.2
Timer intervals, Hello 10, Dead 40, Wait 1663, Retransmit 5,
Poll interval 0, Transit delay 1
Neighbor count is 1
If Events 4, Authentication type none
74 Chapter 4: The Information Menu
13N0340, March 2004
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
/info/l3/ospf/dbase
OSPF Database Information
[OSPF Database Menu]
advrtr - LS Database info for an Advertising Router
asbrsum - ASBR Summary LS Database info
dbsumm - LS Database summary
ext
- External LS Database info
nw
- Network LS Database info
nssa
- NSSA External LS Database info
rtr
- Router LS Database info
self
- Self Originated LS Database info
summ
- Network-Summary LS Database info
all
- All
Table 4-15 OSPF Database Information Menu (/info/l3/ospf/dbase)
Command Syntax and Usage
advrtr <router-id (A.B.C.D)>
Takes advertising router as a parameter. Displays all the Link State Advertisements (LSAs) in the
LS database that have the advertising router with the specified router ID, for example: 20.1.1.1.
asbrsum <adv-rtr (A.B.C.D)> | <link_state_id (A.B.C.D> | <self>
Displays ASBR summary LSAs. The usage of this command is as follows:
a) asbrsum adv-rtr 20.1.1.1 displays ASBR summary LSAs having the advertising
router 20.1.1.1.
b) asbrsum link_state_id 10.1.1.1 displays ASBR summary LSAs having the link
state ID 10.1.1.1.
c) asbrsum self displays the self advertised ASBR summary LSAs.
d) asbrsum with no parameters displays all the ASBR summary LSAs.
dbsumm
Displays the following information about the LS database in a table format:
a) the number of LSAs of each type in each area.
b) the total number of LSAs for each area.
c) the total number of LSAs for each LSA type for all areas combined.
d) the total number of LSAs for all LSA types for all areas combined.
No parameters are required.
ext <adv-rtr (A.B.C.D)>|<link_state_id (A.B.C.D>|<self>
Displays the AS-external (type 5) LSAs with detailed information of each field of the LSAs. The
usage of this command is the same as the usage of the command asbrsum.
13N0340, March 2004
Chapter 4: The Information Menu 75
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
Table 4-15 OSPF Database Information Menu (/info/l3/ospf/dbase)
Command Syntax and Usage
nw <adv-rtr (A.B.C.D)>|<link_state_id (A.B.C.D>|<self>
Displays the network (type 2) LSAs with detailed information of each field of the LSA.network LS
database. The usage of this command is the same as the usage of the command asbrsum.
nssa <adv-rtr (A.B.C.D)>|<link_state_id (A.B.C.D>|<self>
Displays the NSSA (type 7) LSAs with detailed information of each field of the LSAs. The usage
of this command is the same as the usage of the command asbrsum.
rtr <adv-rtr (A.B.C.D)>|<link_state_id (A.B.C.D>|<self>
Displays the router (type 1) LSAs with detailed information of each field of the LSAs. The usage
of this command is the same as the usage of the command asbrsum.
self
Displays all the self-advertised LSAs. No parameters are required.
summ <adv-rtr (A.B.C.D)>|<link_state_id (A.B.C.D>|<self>
Displays the network summary (type 3) LSAs with detailed information of each field of the LSAs.
The usage of this command is the same as the usage of the command asbrsum.
all
Displays all the LSAs.
/info/l3/ospf/routes
OSPF Information Route Codes
Codes: IA - OSPF inter area,
N1 - OSPF NSSA external type 1, N2 - OSPF NSSA external type 2
E1 - OSPF external type 1, E2 - OSPF external type 2
IA 10.10.0.0/16 via 200.1.1.2
IA 40.1.1.0/28 via 20.1.1.2
IA 80.1.1.0/24 via 200.1.1.2
IA 100.1.1.0/24 via 20.1.1.2
IA 140.1.1.0/27 via 20.1.1.2
IA 150.1.1.0/28 via 200.1.1.2
E2 172.18.1.1/32 via 30.1.1.2
E2 172.18.1.2/32 via 30.1.1.2
E2 172.18.1.3/32 via 30.1.1.2
E2 172.18.1.4/32 via 30.1.1.2
E2 172.18.1.5/32 via 30.1.1.2
E2 172.18.1.6/32 via 30.1.1.2
E2 172.18.1.7/32 via 30.1.1.2
E2 172.18.1.8/32 via 30.1.1.2
76 Chapter 4: The Information Menu
13N0340, March 2004
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
/info/l3/ip
IP Information
Interface information:
1: 47.80.23.243
255.255.254.0
47.80.23.255,
Default gateway information: metric strict
1: 47.80.22.1,
vlan any, up
Current IP forwarding settings: ON, dirbr disabled
Current local networks:
Current IP port settings:
All other ports have forwarding ON
Current network filter settings:
none
Current route map settings:
Current BGP settings:
ON, pref 100
Current BGP peer settings:
Current BGP aggr settings:
vlan 1, up
/info/l3/vrrp
VRRP Information
Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol (VRRP) support on GbE Switch Module provides redundancy between routers in a LAN. This is accomplished by configuring the same virtual router IP
address and ID number on each participating VRRP-capable routing device. One of the virtual
routers is then elected as the master, based on a number of priority criteria, and assumes control
of the shared virtual router IP address. If the master fails, one of the backup virtual routers will
assume routing authority and take control of the virtual router IP address.
VRRP
1:
2:
3:
information:
vrid 2, 205.178.18.210, if
vrid 1, 205.178.18.202, if
vrid 3, 205.178.18.204, if
1, renter, prio 100, master, server
1, renter, prio 100, backup
1, renter, prio 100, master, proxy
When virtual routers are configured, you can view the status of each virtual router using this
command. VRRP information includes:
Virtual router number
Virtual router ID and IP address
Interface number
13N0340, March 2004
Chapter 4: The Information Menu 77
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
Ownership status
owner identifies the preferred master virtual router. A virtual router is the owner
when the IP address of the virtual router and its IP interface are the same.
renter identifies virtual routers which are not owned by this device.
Priority value. During the election process, the virtual router with the highest priority
becomes master.
Activity status
master identifies the elected master virtual router.
backup identifies that the virtual router is in backup mode.
init identifies that the virtual router is waiting for a startup event. Once it receives a
startup event, it transitions to master if its priority is 255, (the IP address owner), or
transitions to backup if it is not the IP address owner.
Server status. The server state identifies virtual routers that support Layer 4 services.
These are known as virtual server routers: any virtual router whose IP address is the same
as any configured virtual server IP address.
Proxy status. The proxy state identifies virtual proxy routers, where the virtual router
shares the same IP address as a proxy IP address. The use of virtual proxy routers enables
redundant switches to share the same IP address, minimizing the number of unique IP
addresses that must be configured.
78 Chapter 4: The Information Menu
13N0340, March 2004
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
/info/slb
SLB Information
[Server Load Balancing Information Menu]
sess
- Session Table Information Menu
real
- Show real server information
virt
- Show virtual server information
filt
- Show filter information
port
- Show port information
idshash - Show IDS server selected by hash or minmisses metric
bind
- Show real server selected by hash or minmisses metric
cookie - Decode the HEX value to get the VIP and RIP
synatk - Show SYN attack detection information
dump
- Show all layer 4 information
Layer 4 information includes the following:
Table 4-16 Layer 4 Information Menu Options (/info/slb)
Command Syntax and Usage
sess
Displays the Session Table Information Menu. To view menu options, see page 80.
real <real server number (1-63)>
Displays Real server number, real IP address, MAC address, VLAN, physical switch port, layer
where health check is performed, and health check result.
virt <virtual server number (1-64)>
Displays Virtual Server State: Virtual server number, IP address, virtual MAC address
Virtual Port State: Virtual service or port, server port mapping, real server group, group backup
server.
filt <filter ID (1-1024)>|list|allow|deny|redir|nat
Displays the filter number, destination port, real server port, real server group, health check layer,
group backup server, URL for health checks, and real server group, IP address, backup server, and
status.
port <port alias or number>
Displays the physical port number, proxy IP address, filter status, a list of applied filters, and client
and/or server Layer 4 activity.
idshash <IP address 1> <IP address 2>
Displays the Intrusion Detection System server selected by hash or minmisses metric.
bind <IP address> <mask> <group number>
Displays the real server selected by hash or minmisses metric.
13N0340, March 2004
Chapter 4: The Information Menu 79
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
Table 4-16 Layer 4 Information Menu Options (/info/slb)
Command Syntax and Usage
cookie <16 bytes cookie value in hexadecimal format as 0XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX>
Decodes the hexadecimal value to get the virtual server IP address and real server IP address.
synatk
Displays SYN attack detection information. To identify whether or not the server is under SYN
attack, the number of new half open sessions is examined within a set period of time, for example,
every two seconds. This feature requires dbind to be enabled.
dump
Displays all Layer 4 information for the switch. For details, see page 85.
/info/slb/sess
Session Table Information
[Session Table Information Menu]
cip
- Show all session entries with source IP address
cport
- Show all session entries with source port
dip
- Show all session entries with destination IP address
dport
- Show all session entries with destination port
pip
- Show all session entries with proxy IP address
pport
- Show all session entries with proxy port
filter - Show all session entries with matching filter
flag
- Show all session entries with matching flag
port
- Show all session entries with ingress port
real
- Show all session entries with real IP address
sp
- Show all session entries on sp
dump
- Show all session entries
help
- Session entry description
Table 4-17 Session Information Menu Options (/info/slb/sess)
Command Syntax and Usage
cip <IP address>
Displays all session entries with client’s source IP address.
cport <real port>
Displays all session entries with source (client) port.
dip <IP address>
Displays all session entries with destination IP address.
80 Chapter 4: The Information Menu
13N0340, March 2004
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
Table 4-17 Session Information Menu Options (/info/slb/sess)
Command Syntax and Usage
dport <real port>
Displays all session entries with destination port.
pip <IP address>
Displays all session entries with proxy IP address.
pport <proxy port>
Displays all session entries with proxy port.
filter <filter ID (1-1024)>
Displays all session entries with matching filter.
flag <E|L|N|P|S|T|U|W>
Displays all session entries with matching flag.
port <port (1-20)>
Displays all session entries on the ingress port.
real <IP address>
Displays all session entries with real server IP address.
sp <port number (1-4)>
Displays all session entries on switch processor.
dump
Displays all session entries. Information similar to the following may appear in a session
entry dump:
3, 01: 1.1.1.1 4586, 2.2.2.1 http -> 1.1.1.2 3567 3.3.3.1 http age 6 f:10 EUSPT c
(1) (2) (3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7a)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
(11) (12)
(13)
Note: The fields, 1 to 13 associated with a session as identified in the above example, are described
in “Session dump information in Alteon OS” on page 83.
help
Displays the description of the session entry.
13N0340, March 2004
Chapter 4: The Information Menu 81
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
Samples of Session Dumps for Different Applications
L4 HTTP
3,01: 172.21.12.19 1040, 39.2.2.1 http -> 47.81.24.79 http age 4
L4-L7 WCR HTTP
2,16: 172.21.8.200 44687, 172.21.8.51 http -> 192.168.1.11 wcr age 4 f:12 E
3,01: 172.21.12.19 1040, 39.2.2.1 http -> 47.81.24.79 urlwcr age 6 f:123 E
RTSP
L4-L7 RTSP
3,01: 172.21.12.19 4586, 39.2.2.1 rtsp -> 47.81.144.13 rtsp age 10 EU
3,01: 172.21.12.19 6970, 39.2.2.1 21220 -> 47.81.144.13 21220 age 10 P
The first session is RTSP TCP control connection.
The second session is RTSP UDP data connection.
3,01: 172.21.12.19 6970, 39.2.2.1 rtsp -> 47.81.144.13 0 age 10 P
During client-server port negotiation, the destination port shows “rtsp” and server port
shows “0”
L7 WCR RTSP
3,01: 172.21.12.19 4586, 39.2.2.1 rtsp -> 47.81.144.13 urlwcr age 10 f:100 EU
3,01: 172.21.12.19 6970, 39.2.2.1 21220 -> 47.81.144.13 21220 age 10 P
Filtering LinkLB
2,07: 10.0.1.26 1706, 205.178.14.84 http -> 192.168.4.10 linklb age 8 f:10 E
FTP
1,00: 172.31.4.215 80, 172.31.4.200 0 172.31.3.11 age 8 EP c:1
1,09: 172.31.4.215 4098, 172.31.4.200 ftp ->172.31.3.20 ftp age 10 EU
1,09: 172.31.4.215 4102, 172.31.4.200 ftp-data ->172.31.3.20 ftp-data age 10 E
NAT
2,05: 172.21.8.16 2559, 10.0.1.26 http NAT age 2 f:24 E
Persistent session
3,00: 237.162.52.123 160.10.20.30 age 4 EPS C:3
The destination port, real server IP and server port are not shown for
persistent session.
82 Chapter 4: The Information Menu
13N0340, March 2004
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
Session dump information in Alteon OS
Field
Description
(1) SP number
This field indicates the Switch Port number that created the session.
(2) Ingress port
This field shows the physical port through which the client traffic
enters the switch.
(3) Source IP
address
This field contains the source IP address from the client’s IP
packet.
(4) Source port
This field identifies the source port from the client’s TCP/UDP
packet.
(5) Destination IP
address
This field identifies the destination IP address from the client’s
TCP/UDP packet.
(6) Destination
port
This field identifies the destination port from client’s TCP/UDP
packet.
(7a) Proxy IP
address
This field contains the Proxy IP address substituted by the switch.
This field contains the real server IP address of the corresponding
server that the switch selects to forward the client packet to, for
load balancing. If the switch does not find a live server, this field
contains the same as the destination IP address mentioned in field
(5).
This field also shows the real server IP address for filtering. No
address is shown if the filter action is Allow, Deny or NAT.
It will show “ALLOW”, “DENY” or “NAT” instead.
(7) Proxy Port
This field identifies the TCP/UDP source port substituted by the
switch.
(8) Real Server IP
Address
For load balancing, this field contains the IP address of the real server
that the switch selects to forward client packet to. If the switch does not
find live server, this field is the same as destination IP address(5).
For example: 3,01: 1.1.1.1 1040, 2.2.2.1 http -> 3.3.3.1 http age 10
3,01: 1.1.1.1 6970, 2.2.2.1 rtsp -> 2.2.2.1 21220 age 10 P
For filtering, this field also shows the real server IP address. No address is
shown if the filter action is Allow, Deny or NAT. It will show ALLOW,
DENY or NAT instead.
For example: 3,01: 1.1.1.1 1040, 2.2.2.1 http -> 3.3.3.1 http age 10 f:11
2,07: 1.1.1.1 1706, 2.2.2.1 http-> 192.168.4.10 linklb age 8 f:10 E
13N0340, March 2004
Chapter 4: The Information Menu 83
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
Field
Description
(9) Server port
This field is the same as the destination port (field 6) for load balancing except for the RTSP UDP session. For RTSP UDP session,
this server port is obtained from the client-server negotiation.
This field is the filtering application port for filtering. It is for
internal use only. This field can be “urlwcr”, “wcr”, “idslb”, “linkslb” or “nonat”.
(10) Age
This is the session timeout value. If no packet is received within
the value specified, the session is freed.
(11) Filter number
This field indicates the session created by filtering code as a
result of the IP header keys matching the filtering criteria.
(12) Flag
“E”: Indicates the session is in use and will be aged out if no
traffic is received within session timeout value.
“P”: Indicates the session is a persistent session and is not to be
aged out. Fields (6), (7) and (8) cannot not have persistent session.
“U”: Indicates the session is L7 delayed binding and the switch is
trying to open TCP connection to the real server.
“S”: Indicates the session is persistent session and the
application is special SSL or Cookie Pbind.
“T”: Indicates the session is TCP rate limiting per-client entry.
(13) Persistent session
user count
This counter indicates the number of client sessions created to
associate with this persistent session.
84 Chapter 4: The Information Menu
13N0340, March 2004
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
/info/slb/dump
Show All Layer 4 Information
Real
1:
2:
26:
27:
server state:
210.1.2.200, 00:01:02:c1:4b:48, vlan 1, port 1, health 3, up
210.1.2.1, 00:01:02:70:4d:4a, vlan 1, port 8, health 3, up
20.20.20.102, 00:03:47:07:a4:9e, vlan 1, port 6, health 3, up
20.20.20.101, 00:01:02:71:9c:a6, vlan 1, port 7, health 3, up
Virtual server state:
1: 20.20.20.200,
00:60:cf:47:5c:1e
virtual ports:
http: rport http, group 88, backup none, dbind
HTTP Application: urlslb
real servers:
26: 20.20.20.102, backup none, 2 ms, up
exclusionary string matching: disabled
1: any
2: urlone
27: 20.20.20.101, backup none, 1 ms, up
exclusionary string matching: disabled
3: urltwo
4: urlthree
Redirect filter state:
Action redir
dport http, rport 3128, vlan any
200: group 1, health 3, backup none
proxy enabled, radius snoop disabled
real servers:
1: 210.1.2.200, backup none, 3 ms, up
2: 210.1.2.1, backup none, 2 ms, up
Port
1:
2:
3:
4:
13N0340, March 2004
state:
filt disabled, filters: 80
idslb filt enabled, filters: 200
idslb filt enabled, filters: 200
filt disabled, filters: 50 200
Chapter 4: The Information Menu 85
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
/info/link
Link Status Information
Alias
Port
-------INT1
1
INT2
2
INT3
3
INT4
4
INT5
5
INT6
6
INT7
7
INT8
8
INT9
9
INT10 10
INT11 11
INT12 12
INT13 13
INT14 14
MGT1
15
MGT2
16
EXT1
17
EXT2
18
EXT3
19
EXT4
20
Speed
----1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
100
100
any
any
any
any
Duplex
-------full
full
full
full
full
full
full
full
full
full
full
full
full
full
full
full
any
any
any
any
Flow Ctrl
--TX-----RX-yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
Link
-----up
up
up
up
down
up
up
up
up
up
up
up
up
up
up
down
up
up
up
up
Use this command to display link status information about each port on an GbE Switch Module
slot, including:
Port alias
Port speed (10, 100, 10/100, or 1000)
Duplex mode (half, full, any, or auto)
Flow control for transmit and receive (no, yes, or auto)
Link status (up or down)
86 Chapter 4: The Information Menu
13N0340, March 2004
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
/info/port
Port Information
Alias
----INT1
INT2
INT3
INT4
INT5
INT6
INT7
INT8
INT9
INT10
INT11
INT12
INT13
INT14
MGT1
MGT2
EXT1
EXT2
EXT3
EXT4
Port
---1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Tag
--y
y
y
y
y
y
y
y
y
y
y
y
y
y
y
y
n
n
n
n
FAST RMON
---- ---n
d
n
d
n
d
n
d
n
d
n
d
n
d
n
d
n
d
n
d
n
d
n
d
n
d
n
d
n
d
n
d
n
d
n
d
n
d
n
d
PVID
---1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
4095
4095
1
1
1
1
NAME
-------------INT1
INT2
INT3
INT4
INT5
INT6
INT7
INT8
INT9
INT10
INT11
INT12
INT13
INT14
MGT1
MGT2
EXT1
EXT2
EXT3
EXT4
VLAN(s)
----------------1 4095
1 4095
1 4095
1 4095
1 4095
1 4095
1 4095
1 4095
1 4095
1 4095
1 4095
1 4095
1 4095
1 4095
4095
4095
1
1
1
1
Port information includes:
Port alias
Whether the port uses VLAN tagging or not (y or n)
Port VLAN ID (PVID)
Port name
VLAN membership
Whether RMON is enabled or disabled on the port
13N0340, March 2004
Chapter 4: The Information Menu 87
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
/info/dump
Information Dump
Use the dump command to dump all switch information available from the Information Menu
(10K or more, depending on your configuration). This data is useful for tuning and debugging
switch performance.
If you want to capture dump data to a file, set your communication software on your workstation to capture session data prior to issuing the dump commands.
88 Chapter 4: The Information Menu
13N0340, March 2004
CHAPTER 5
The Statistics Menu
You can view switch performance statistics in both the user and administrator command modes.
This chapter discusses how to use the command line interface to display switch statistics.
/stats
Statistics Menu
[Statistics Menu]
port
- Port Stats Menu
l2
- Layer 2 Stats Menu
l3
- Layer 3 Stats Menu
slb
- Server Load Balancing (L4-7) Stats Menu
mp
- MP-specific Stats Menu
sp
- SP-specific Stats Menu
pace
- Packet Acceleration Stats Menu
snmp
- Show SNMP stats
dump
- Dump all stats
89
13N0340, March 2004
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
Table 5-1 Statistics Menu Options (/stats)
Command Syntax and Usage
port <port alias or number (1-20)>
Displays the Port Statistics Menu for the specified port. Use this command to display traffic statistics on a port-by-port basis. Traffic statistics are included in SNMP Management Information Base
(MIB) objects. To view menu options, see page 91.
l2
Displays the Layer 2 Stats Menu. To view menu options, see page 102.
l3
Displays the Layer 3 Stats Menu. To view menu options, see page 104.
slb
Displays the Server Load Balancing (SLB) Menu. To view menu options, see page 122.
mp
Displays the Management Processor Statistics Menu. Use this command to view information on
how switch management processes and resources are currently being allocated. To view menu
options, see page 145.
sp <SP number (1-4)>
Displays Switch Processor specific menu. To view menu options, see page 148.
pace
Displays Packet Acceleration Stats Menu. To view menu options, see page 149.
snmp
Displays SNMP statistics. See page 150 for sample output.
dump
Dumps all switch statistics. Use this command to gather data for tuning and debugging switch performance. If you want to capture dump data to a file, set your communication software on your
workstation to capture session data prior to issuing the dump command. For details, see page 153.
90 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu
13N0340, March 2004
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
/stats/port <port alias or number>
Port Statistics Menu
This menu displays traffic statistics on a port-by-port basis. Traffic statistics include SNMP
Management Information Base (MIB) objects.
[Port Statistics Menu]
brg
- Show bridging ("dot1") stats
ether
- Show Ethernet ("dot3") stats
if
- Show interface ("if") stats
ip
- Show Internet Protocol ("IP") stats
link
- Show link stats
rmon
- Show RMON stats
clear
- Clear all port stats
Table 5-2 Port Statistics Menu Options (/stats/port)
Command Syntax and Usage
brg
Displays bridging (“dot1”) statistics for the port. See page 92 for sample output.
ether
Displays Ethernet (“dot1”) statistics for the port. See page 93 for sample output.
if
Displays interface statistics for the port. See page 96 for sample output.
ip
Displays IP statistics for the port. See page 98 for sample output.
link
Displays link statistics for the port. See page 99 for sample output.
rmon
Displays RMON statistics for the port. See page 99 for sample output.
clear
This command clears all the statistics on the port.
13N0340, March 2004
Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 91
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
/stats/port <port alias or number>/brg
Bridging Statistics
This menu option enables you to display the bridging statistics of the selected port.
Bridging statistics for port INT1:
dot1PortInFrames:
dot1PortOutFrames:
dot1PortInDiscards:
dot1TpLearnedEntryDiscards:
dot1BasePortDelayExceededDiscards:
dot1BasePortMtuExceededDiscards:
dot1StpPortForwardTransitions:
63242584
63277826
0
0
NA
NA
0
Table 5-3 Bridging Statistics of a Port (/stats/port/brg)
Statistics
Description
dot1PortInFrames
The number of frames that have been received by this port from its segment. A frame received on the interface corresponding to this port is only
counted by this object if and only if it is for a protocol being processed by
the local bridging function, including bridge management frames.
dot1PortOutFrames
The number of frames that have been transmitted by this port to its segment. Note that a frame transmitted on the interface corresponding to this
port is only counted by this object if and only if it is for a protocol being
processed by the local bridging function, including bridge management
frames.
dot1PortInDiscards
Count of valid frames received which were discarded (that is, filtered) by
the Forwarding Process.
dot1TpLearnedEntry
Discards
The total number of Forwarding Database entries, which have been or
would have been learnt, but have been discarded due to a lack of space to
store them in the Forwarding Database. If this counter is increasing, it
indicates that the Forwarding Database is regularly becoming full (a condition which has unpleasant performance effects on the subnetwork). If
this counter has a significant value but is not presently increasing, it indicates that the problem has been occurring but is not persistent.
dot1BasePortDelay
ExceededDiscards
The number of frames discarded by this port due to excessive transit
delay through the bridge. It is incriminated by both transparent and
source route bridges.
dot1BasePortMtu
ExceededDiscards
The number of frames discarded by this port due to an excessive size. It is
incremented by both transparent and source route bridges.
dot1StpPortForward
Transitions
The number of times this port has transitioned from the Learning state to
the Forwarding state.
92 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu
13N0340, March 2004
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
/stats/port <port alias or number>/ether
Ethernet Statistics
This menu option enables you to display the ethernet statistics of the selected port
Ethernet statistics for port INT1:
dot3StatsAlignmentErrors:
dot3StatsFCSErrors:
dot3StatsSingleCollisionFrames:
dot3StatsMultipleCollisionFrames:
dot3StatsSQETestErrors:
dot3StatsDeferredTransmissions:
dot3StatsLateCollisions:
dot3StatsExcessiveCollisions:
dot3StatsInternalMacTransmitErrors:
dot3StatsCarrierSenseErrors:
dot3StatsFrameTooLongs:
dot3StatsInternalMacReceiveErrors:
dot3CollFrequencies [1-15]:
0
0
0
0
NA
0
0
0
NA
0
0
0
NA
Table 5-4 Ethernet Statistics for Port (/stats/port/ether)
Statistics
Description
dot3StatsAlignment
Errors
A count of frames received on a particular interface that are not an integral number of octets in length and do not pass the Frame Check
Sequence (FCS) check.
The count represented by an instance of this object is incremented when
the alignmentError status is returned by the MAC service to the
Logical Link Control (LLC) (or other MAC user). Received frames for
which multiple error conditions obtained are, according to the conventions of IEEE 802.3 Layer Management, counted exclusively according
to the error status presented to the LLC.
dot3StatsFCSErrors
A count of frames received on a particular interface that are an integral
number of octets in length but do not pass the Frame Check Sequence
(FCS) check.
The count represented by an instance of this object is incremented when
the frameCheckError status is returned by the MAC service to the
LLC (or other MAC user). Received frames for which multiple error conditions obtained are, according to the conventions of IEEE 802.3 Layer
Management, counted exclusively according to the error status presented
to the LLC.
13N0340, March 2004
Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 93
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
Table 5-4 Ethernet Statistics for Port (/stats/port/ether)
Statistics
Description
dot3StatsSingleCollisionFrames
A count of successfully transmitted frames on a particular interface for
which transmission is inhibited by exactly one collision.
A frame that is counted by an instance of this object is also counted by the
corresponding instance of either the ifOutUcastPkts, ifOutMulticastPkts, or ifOutBroadcastPkts, and is not counted by the
corresponding instance of the dot3StatsMultipleCollisionFrame object.
dot3StatsMultipleCollisionFrames
A count of successfully transmitted frames on a particular interface for
which transmission is inhibited by more than one collision.
A frame that is counted by an instance of this object is also counted by the
corresponding instance of either the ifOutUcastPkts, ifOutMulticastPkts, or ifOutBroadcastPkts, and is not counted by the
corresponding instance of the dot3StatsSingleCollisionFrames object.
dot3StatsSQETestErrors
A count of times that the SQE TEST ERROR message is generated by the
PLS sub layer for a particular interface. The SQE TEST ERROR message
is defined in section 7.2.2.2.4 of ANSI/IEEE 802.3-1985 and its generation is described in section 7.2.4.6 of the same document.
dot3StatsDeferredTransmissions
A count of frames for which the first transmission attempt on a particular
interface is delayed because the medium is busy.
The count represented by an instance of this object does not include
frames involved in collisions.
dot3StatsLateCollisions
The number of times that a collision is detected on a particular interface
later than 512 bit-times into the transmission of a packet.
Five hundred and twelve bit-times corresponds to 51.2 microseconds on a
10 Mbit/s system. A (late) collision included in a count represented by an
instance of this object is also considered as a (generic) collision for purposes of other collision-related statistics.
dot3StatsExcessive
Collisions
A count of frames for which transmission on a particular interface fails
due to excessive collisions.
dot3StatsInternalMacTransmitErrors
A count of frames for which transmission on a particular interface fails
due to an internal MAC sub layer transmit error. A frame is only counted
by an instance of this object if it is not counted by the corresponding
instance of either the dot3StatsLateCollisions object, the
dot3StatsExcessiveCollisions object, or the dot3StatsCarrierSenseErrors object.
The precise meaning of the count represented by an instance of this object
is implementation-specific. In particular, an instance of this object may
represent a count of transmission errors on a particular interface that are
not otherwise counted.
94 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu
13N0340, March 2004
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
Table 5-4 Ethernet Statistics for Port (/stats/port/ether)
Statistics
Description
dot3StatsCarrierSenseErrors
The number of times that the carrier sense condition was lost or never
asserted when attempting to transmit a frame on a particular interface.
The count represented by an instance of this object is incremented at most
once per transmission attempt, even if the carrier sense condition fluctuates during a transmission attempt.
dot3StatsFrameTooLongs
A count of frames received on a particular interface that exceed the maximum permitted frame size.
The count represented by an instance of this object is incremented when
the frameTooLong status is returned by the MAC service to the LLC
(or other MAC user). Received frames for which multiple error conditions obtained are, according to the conventions of IEEE 802.3 Layer
Management, counted exclusively according to the error status presented
to the LLC.
dot3StatsInternalMacReceiveErrors
A count of frames for which reception on a particular interface fails due
to an internal MAC sub layer receive error. A frame is only counted by an
instance of this object if it is not counted by the corresponding instance of
either the dot3StatsFrameTooLongs object, the dot3StatsAlignmentErrors object, or the dot3StatsFCSErrors object.
The precise meaning of the count represented by an instance of this object
is implementation-specific. In particular, an instance of this object may
represent a count of received errors on a particular interface that are not
otherwise counted.
dot3CollFrequencies
A count of individual MAC frames for which the transmission
(successful or otherwise) on a particular interface occurs after the frame
has experienced exactly the number of collisions in the associated
dot3CollCount object. For example, a frame which is transmitted on
interface 77 after experiencing exactly 4 collisions would be indicated by
incrementing only dot3CollFrequencies. 77.4. No other instance
of dot3CollFrequencies would be incremented in this example.
13N0340, March 2004
Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 95
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
/stats/port <port alias or number>/if
Interface Statistics
This menu option enables you to display the interface statistics of the selected port.
Interface statistics for port EXT1:
ifHCIn Counters
Octets:
51697080313
UcastPkts:
65356399
BroadcastPkts:
0
MulticastPkts:
0
Discards:
0
Errors:
0
ifHCOut Counters
51721056808
65385714
6516
0
0
21187
Table 5-5 Interface Statistics for Port (/stats/port/if)
Statistics
Description
ifInOctets
The total number of octets received on the interface, including framing
characters.
ifInUcastPkts
The number of packets, delivered by this sub-layer to a higher sub- layer,
which were not addressed to a multicast or broadcast address at this sublayer.
ifInBroadcastPkts
The number of packets, delivered by this sub-layer to a higher sub- layer,
which were addressed to a broadcast address at this sub-layer.
ifInMulticastPkts
The total number of packets that higher-level protocols requested to be
transmitted, and which were addressed to a multicast address at this sublayer, including those that were discarded or not sent. For a MAC layer
protocol, this includes both Group and Functional addresses.
ifInDiscards
The number of inbound packets which were chosen to be discarded even
though no errors had been detected to prevent their being delivered to a
higher-layer protocol. One possible reason for discarding such a packet
could be to free up buffer space.
ifInErrors
For packet-oriented interfaces, the number of inbound packets that contained errors preventing them from being delivered to a higher-layer protocol. For character-oriented or fixed-length interfaces, the number of
inbound transmission units that contained errors preventing them from
being deliverable to a higher-layer protocol.
96 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu
13N0340, March 2004
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
Table 5-5 Interface Statistics for Port (/stats/port/if)
Statistics
Description
ifInUnknownProtos
For packet-oriented interfaces, the number of packets received via the
interface which were discarded because of an unknown or unsupported
protocol. For character-oriented or fixed-length interfaces which support
protocol multiplexing, the number of transmission units received via the
interface which were discarded because of an unknown or unsupported
protocol. For any interface which does not support protocol multiplexing,
this counter will always be 0.
ifOutOctets
The total number of octets transmitted out of the interface, including
framing characters.
ifOutUcastPkts
The total number of packets that higher-level protocols requested to be
transmitted, and which were not addressed to a multicast or broadcast
address at this sub-layer, including those that were discarded or not sent.
ifOutBroadcastPkts
The total number of packets that higher-level protocols requested to be
transmitted, and which were addressed to a broadcast address at this sublayer, including those that were discarded or not sent. This object is a 64bit version of ifOutBroadcastPkts.
ifOutMulticastPkts
The total number of packets that higher-level protocols requested to be
transmitted, and which were addressed to a multicast address at this sublayer, including those that were discarded or not sent. For a MAC layer
protocol, this includes both Group and Functional addresses. This object
is a 64-bit version of ifOutMulticastPkts.
ifOutDiscards
The number of outbound packets which were chosen to be discarded even
though no errors had been detected to prevent their being transmitted.
One possible reason for discarding such a packet could be to free up
buffer space.
ifOutErrors
For packet-oriented interfaces, the number of outbound packets that
could not be transmitted because of errors. For character-oriented or
fixed-length interfaces, the number of outbound transmission units that
could not be transmitted because of errors.
13N0340, March 2004
Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 97
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
/stats/port <port alias or number>/ip
Interface Protocol Statistics
This menu option enables you to display the interface statistics of the selected port.
IP statistics for port INT1:
ipInReceives:
0
ipInAddrErrors:
0
ipInUnknownProtos:
0
ipInDelivers:
0
ipTtlExceeds:
0
ipLANDattacks:
0
ipForwDatagrams:
ipInDiscards:
0
0
Table 5-6 Interface Protocol Statistics (/stats/port/ip)
Statistics
Description
ipInReceives
The total number of input datagrams received from interfaces, including
those received in error.
ipInAddrErrors
The number of input datagrams discarded because the IP address in their
IP header's destination field was not a valid address to be received at this
entity (the switch). This count includes invalid addresses (for example,
0.0.0.0) and addresses of unsupported Classes (for example, Class E). For
entities which are not IP Gateways and therefore do not forward datagrams, this counter includes datagrams discarded because the destination
address was not a local address.
ipForwDatagrams
The number of input datagrams for which this entity (the switch) was not
their final IP destination, as a result of which an attempt was made to find
a route to forward them to that final destination. In entities which do not
act as IP Gateways, this counter will include only those packets which
were Source-Routed via this entity (the switch), and the Source- Route
option processing was successful.
ipInUnknownProtos
The number of locally-addressed datagrams received successfully but
discarded because of an unknown or unsupported protocol.
ipInDiscards
The number of input IP datagrams for which no problems were encountered to prevent their continued processing, but which were discarded (for
example, for lack of buffer space). Note that this counter does not include
any datagrams discarded while awaiting re-assembly.
ipInDelivers
The total number of input datagrams successfully delivered to IP userprotocols (including ICMP).
ipTtlExceeds
The number of IP datagram for which an ICMP TTL exceeded message was sent.
98 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu
13N0340, March 2004
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
/stats/port <port alias or number>/link
Link Statistics
This menu enables you to display the link statistics of the selected port.
Link statistics for port INT1:
linkStateChange:
1
Table 5-7 Link Statistics (/stats/port/link)
Statistics
Description
linkStateChange
The total number of link state changes.
/stats/port <port alias or number>/rmon
RMON Statistics
This menu option enables you to display the remote monitor statistics of the selected port.
RMON statistics for port EXT1:
etherStatsDropEvents:
etherStatsOctets:
etherStatsPkts:
etherStatsBroadcastPkts:
etherStatsMulticastPkts:
etherStatsCRCAlignErrors:
etherStatsUndersizePkts:
etherStatsOversizePkts:
etherStatsFragments:
etherStatsJabbers:
etherStatsCollisions:
etherStatsPkts64Octets:
etherStatsPkts65to127Octets:
etherStatsPkts128to255Octets:
etherStatsPkts256to511Octets:
etherStatsPkts64Octets:
etherStatsPkts1024to1518Octets:
13N0340, March 2004
0
3727038769
69869242
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
102426
6050515
12293234
24586063
49171870
47539775
Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 99
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
Table 5-8 Remote Monitor Statistics (/stats/port/rmon)
Statistics
Description
etherStatsDrop
Events
The total number of events in which packets were dropped by the probe
due to lack of resources. Note that this number is not necessarily the number of packets dropped; it is just the number of times this condition has
been detected.
etherStatsOctets
The total number of octets of data (including those in bad packets)
received on the network (excluding framing bits but including FCS
octets).
This object can be used as a reasonable estimate of utilization (which is
the percent utilization of the ethernet segment). If greater precision is
desired, the etherStatsPkts and etherStatsOctets objects
should be sampled before and after a common interval. The differences in
the sampled values are Pkts and Octets, respectively, and the number
of seconds in the interval is Interval. These values are used to calculate the utilization as follows:
× ( 9.6 + 6.4 ) + ( Octets × 0.8 -)
Utilization = Pkts
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Interval × 10, 000
The result of this equation is the percent value of utilization.
etherStatsPkts
The total number of packets (including bad packets, broadcast packets,
and multicast packets) received.
etherStatsBroadcastPkts
The total number of good packets received that were directed to the
broadcast address. Note that this does not include multicast packets.
etherStatsMulticastPkts
The total number of good packets received that were directed to a multicast address. Note that this number does not include packets directed to
the broadcast address.
etherStatsCRCAlign
Errors
The total number of packets received that had a length (excluding framing bits, but including Frame Check Sequence (FCS) octets) of between
64 and 1518 octets, inclusive, but had either a bad Frame Check
Sequence (FCS) with an integral number of octets (FCS Error) or a bad
FCS with a non-integral number of octets (Alignment Error).
etherStatsUndersizePkts
The total number of packets received that were less than 64 octets long
(excluding framing bits, but including FCS octets) and were otherwise
well formed.
etherStatsOversizePkts
The total number of packets received that were longer than 1518 octets
(excluding framing bits, but including FCS octets) and were otherwise
well formed.
100 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu
13N0340, March 2004
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
Table 5-8 Remote Monitor Statistics (/stats/port/rmon)
Statistics
Description
etherStatsFragments
The total number of packets received that were less than 64 octets in
length (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets) and had either a
bad Frame Check Sequence (FCS) with an integral number of octets
(FCS Error) or a bad FCS with a non-integral number of octets (Alignment Error).
Note that it is entirely normal for etherStatsFragments to increment. This is because it counts both runts (which are normal occurrences
due to collisions) and noise hits. (A runt is a packet that is less than 64
bytes.)
etherStatsJabbers
The total number of packets received that were longer than 1518 octets
(excluding framing bits, but including FCS octets), and had either a bad
Frame Check Sequence (FCS) with an integral number of octets (FCS
Error) or a bad FCS with a non-integral number of octets (Alignment
Error).
Note that this definition of jabber is different than the definition in IEEE802.3 section 8.2.1.5 (10Base-5) and section 10.3.1.4 (10Base-2). These
documents define jabber as the condition where any packet exceeds 20
ms. The allowed range to detect jabber is between 20 milliseconds and
150 milliseconds.
etherStatsCollisions
The best estimate of the total number of collisions on this Ethernet segment.
The value returned will depend on the location of the RMON probe. Section 8.2.1.3 (10Base-5) and section 10.3.1.3 (10Base-2) of IEEE standard
802.3 states that a station must detect a collision, in the receive mode, if
three or more stations are transmitting simultaneously. A repeater port
must detect a collision when two or more stations are transmitting simultaneously. Thus a probe placed on a repeater port could record more collisions than a probe connected to a station on the same segment would.
Probe location plays a much smaller role when considering 10Base-T.
14.2.1.4 (10Base-T) of IEEE standard 802.3 defines a collision as the
simultaneous presence of signals on the DO and RD circuits (transmitting
and receiving at the same time). A 10Base-T station can only detect collisions when it is transmitting. Thus probes placed on a station and a
repeater, should report the same number of collisions.
Note also that an RMON probe inside a repeater should ideally report collisions between the repeater and one or more other hosts (transmit collisions as defined by IEEE 802.3k) plus receiver collisions observed on
any coax segments to which the repeater is connected.
etherStatsPkts64Octets
The total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were
64 octets in length (excluding framing bits but including Frame Check
Sequence (FCS) octets).
13N0340, March 2004
Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 101
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
Table 5-8 Remote Monitor Statistics (/stats/port/rmon)
Statistics
Description
etherStatsPkts65to127Octets
The total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were
between 65 and 127 octets in length (excluding framing bits but including
FCS octets).
etherStatsPkts128to255Octets
The total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were
between 128 and 255 octets in length (excluding framing bits but including Frame Check Sequence (FCS) octets).
etherStatsPkts256to511Octets
The total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were
between 256 and 511 octets in length (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets).
etherStatsPkts512to1023Octets
The total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were
between 512 and 1023 octets in length (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets).
etherStatsPkts1024to1518Octets
The total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were
between 1024 and 1518 octets in length (excluding framing bits but
including FCS octets).
/stats/l2
Layer 2 Statistics Menu
[Layer 2 Statistics Menu]
fdb
- Show FDB stats
lacp
- Show LACP stats
Table 5-9 Statistics Menu Options (/stats/l2)
Command Syntax and Usage
fdb
Displays FDB statistics. See page 103 for sample output.
lacp <port alias or number (17-20)>
Displays Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) statistics. See page 104 for sample output.
102 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu
13N0340, March 2004
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
/stats/l2/fdb
FDB Statistics
FDB statistics:
creates:
current:
lookups:
finds:
find_or_c's:
30503
83
511889
21801
36140
deletes:
hiwat:
lookup fails:
find fails:
overflows:
30420
855
1126
0
0
This menu option enables you to display statistics regarding the use of the forwarding database, including the number of new entries, finds, and unsuccessful searches.
FDB statistics are described in the following table:
Table 5-10 Forwarding Database Statistics (/stats/fdb)
Statistic
Description
creates
Number of entries created in the Forwarding Database.
current
Current number of entries in the Forwarding Database.
lookups
Number of entry lookups in the Forwarding Database.
finds
Number of successful searches in the Forwarding Database.
find_or_c’s
Number of entries found or created in the Forwarding Database.
deletes
Number of entries deleted from the Forwarding Database.
hiwat
Highest number of entries recorded at any given time in the Forwarding
Database.
lookup fails
Number of unsuccessful searches made in the Forwarding Database.
find fails
Number of search failures in the Forwarding Database.
overflows
Number of entries overflowing the Forwarding Database.
13N0340, March 2004
Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 103
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
/stats/l2/lacp <port alias or number>
LACP Statistics
Port EXT1:
-------------------------------------Valid LACPDUs received:
- 870
Valid Marker PDUs received:
- 0
Valid Marker Rsp PDUs received: - 0
Unknown version/TLV type:
- 0
Illegal subtype received:
- 0
LACPDUs transmitted:
- 6031
Marker PDUs transmitted:
- 0
Marker Rsp PDUs transmitted:
- 0
/stats/l3
Layer 3 Statistics Menu
[Layer 3 Statistics Menu]
ospf
- OSPF Statistics Menu
ip
- Show IP stats
route
- Show route stats
arp
- Show ARP stats
vrrp
- Show VRRP stats
dns
- Show DNS stats
icmp
- Show ICMP stats
if
- Show IP interface ("if") stats
tcp
- Show TCP stats
udp
- Show UDP stats
ifclear - Clear IP interface ("if") stats
ipclear - Clear IP stats
dump
- Dump layer 3 stats
104 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu
13N0340, March 2004
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
Table 5-11 Statistics Menu Options (/stats/l3)
Command Syntax and Usage
ospf
Displays OSPF statistics Menu. See page 106 for sample output.
ip
Displays IP statistics. See page 111 for sample output.
route
Displays route statistics. See page 113 for sample output.
arp
Displays Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) statistics. See page 114 for sample output.
vrrp
When virtual routers are configured, you can display the following protocol statistics for VRRP:
Advertisements received (vrrpInAdvers)
Advertisements transmitted (vrrpOutAdvers)
Advertisements received, but ignored (vrrpBadAdvers)
See page 115 for sample output.
dns
Displays Domain Name Server (DNS) statistics. See page 116 for sample output.
icmp
Displays ICMP statistics. See page 116 for sample output.
if <interface number (1-128)>
Displays IP interface statistics. See page 118 for sample output.
tcp
Displays TCP statistics. See page 120 for sample output.
udp
Displays UDP statistics. See page 121 for sample output.
ifclear
Clears IP interface statistics. Use this command with caution as it will delete all the IP interface
statistics.
ipclear
Clears IP statistics. Use this command with caution as it will delete all the IP statistics.
dump
Dumps all Layer 3 statistics. Use this command to gather data for tuning and debugging switch
performance. If you want to capture dump data to a file, set your communication software on your
workstation to capture session data prior to issuing the dump command.
13N0340, March 2004
Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 105
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
/stats/l3/ospf
OSPF Statistics Menu
[OSPF stats Menu]
general - Show global stats
aindex - Show area(s) stats
if
- Show interface(s) stats
Table 5-12 OSPF Statistics Menu (/stats/l3/ospf)
Command Syntax and Usage
general
Displays global statistics. See page 107 for sample output.
aindex
Displays area statistics.
if
Displays interface statistics.
106 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu
13N0340, March 2004
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
/stats/l3/ospf/general
OSPF Global Statistics
The OSPF General Statistics contain the sum total of all OSPF packets received on all OSPF
areas and interfaces.
OSPF stats
---------Rx/Tx Stats:
Pkts
hello
database
ls requests
ls acks
ls updates
Nbr change stats:
hello
start
n2way
adjoint ok
negotiation done
exchange done
bad requests
bad sequence
loading done
n1way
rst_ad
down
Timers kickoff
hello
retransmit
lsa lock
lsa ack
dbage
summary
ase export
13N0340, March 2004
Rx
-------0
23
4
3
7
9
2
0
2
2
2
2
0
0
2
0
0
1
Tx
-------0
518
12
1
7
7
Intf change Stats:
hello
down
loop
unloop
wait timer
backup
nbr change
4
2
0
0
2
0
5
514
1028
0
0
0
0
0
Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 107
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
Table 5-13 OSPF General Statistics (stats/l3/ospf/general)
Statistics
Description
Rx/Tx Stats:
Rx Pkts
The sum total of all OSPF packets received on all OSPF areas and interfaces.
Tx Pkts
The sum total of all OSPF packets transmitted on all OSPF areas and
interfaces.
Rx Hello
The sum total of all Hello packets received on all OSPF areas and interfaces.
Tx Hello
The sum total of all Hello packets transmitted on all OSPF areas and
interfaces.
Rx Database
The sum total of all Database Description packets received on all OSPF
areas and interfaces.
Tx Database
The sum total of all Database Description packets transmitted on all
OSPF areas and interfaces.
Rx ls Requests
The sum total of all Link State Request packets received on all OSPF
areas and interfaces.
Tx ls Requests
The sum total of all Link State Request packets transmitted on all OSPF
areas and interfaces.
Rx ls Acks
The sum total of all Link State Acknowledgement packets received on all
OSPF areas and interfaces.
Tx ls Acks
The sum total of all Link State Acknowledgement packets transmitted on
all OSPF areas and interfaces.
Rx ls Updates
The sum total of all Link State Update packets received on all OSPF areas
and interfaces.
Tx ls Updates
The sum total of all Link State Update packets transmitted on all OSPF
areas and interfaces.
108 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu
13N0340, March 2004
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
Table 5-13 OSPF General Statistics (stats/l3/ospf/general) (Continued)
Statistics
Description
Nbr Change Stats:
hello
The sum total of all Hello packets received from neighbors on all OSPF
areas and interfaces.
Start
The sum total number of neighbors in this state (that is, an indication that
Hello packets should now be sent to the neighbor at intervals of HelloInterval seconds.) across all OSPF areas and interfaces.
n2way
The sum total number of bidirectional communication establishment
between this router and other neighboring routers.
adjoint ok
The sum total number of decisions to be made (again) as to whether an
adjacency should be established/maintained with the neighbor across all
OSPF areas and interfaces.
negotiation done
The sum total number of neighbors in this state wherein the Master/slave
relationship has been negotiated, and sequence numbers have been
exchanged, across all OSPF areas and interfaces.
exchange done
The sum total number of neighbors in this state (that is, in an adjacency's
final state) having transmitted a full sequence of Database Description
packets, across all OSPF areas and interfaces.
bad requests
The sum total number of Link State Requests which have been received
for a link state advertisement not contained in the database across all
interfaces and OSPF areas.
bad sequence
The sum total number of Database Description packets which have been
received that either:
a) Has an unexpected DD sequence number
b) Unexpectedly has the init bit set
c) Has an options field differing from the last Options field
received in a Database Description packet.
Any of these conditions indicate that some error has occurred during
adjacency establishment for all OSPF areas and interfaces.
loading done
The sum total number of link state updates received for all out-of-date
portions of the database across all OSPF areas and interfaces.
n1way
The sum total number of Hello packets received from neighbors, in which
this router is not mentioned across all OSPF interfaces and areas.
rst_ad
The sum total number of times the Neighbor adjacency has been reset
across all OPSF areas and interfaces.
down
The total number of Neighboring routers down (that is, in the initial
state of a neighbor conversation.) across all OSPF areas and interfaces.
13N0340, March 2004
Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 109
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
Table 5-13 OSPF General Statistics (stats/l3/ospf/general) (Continued)
Statistics
Description
Intf Change Stats:
hello
The sum total number of Hello packets sent on all interfaces and areas.
down
The sum total number of interfaces down in all OSPF areas.
loop
The sum total of interfaces no longer connected to the attached network
across all OSPF areas and interfaces.
unloop
The sum total number of interfaces, connected to the attached network in
all OSPF areas.
wait timer
The sum total number of times the Wait Timer has been fired, indicating
the end of the waiting period that is required before electing a (Backup)
Designated Router across all OSPF areas and interfaces.
backup
The sum total number of Backup Designated Routers on the attached network for all OSPF areas and interfaces.
nbr change
The sum total number of changes in the set of bidirectional neighbors
associated with any interface across all OSPF areas.
Timers Kickoff:
hello
The sum total number of times the Hello timer has been fired (which triggers the send of a Hello packet) across all OPSF areas and interfaces.
retransmit
The sum total number of times the Retransmit timer has been fired across
all OPSF areas and interfaces.
lsa lock
The sum total number of times the Link State Advertisement (LSA) lock
timer has been fired across all OSPF areas and interfaces.
lsa ack
The sum total number of times the LSA Ack timer has been fired across
all OSPF areas and interfaces.
dbage
The total number of times the data base age (Dbage) has been fired.
summary
The total number of times the Summary timer has been fired.
ase export
The total number of times the Autonomous System Export (ASE) timer
has been fired.
110 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu
13N0340, March 2004
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
/stats/l3/ip
IP Statistics
IP statistics:
ipInReceives:
ipInAddrErrors:
ipInUnknownProtos:
ipInDelivers:
ipOutDiscards:
ipReasmReqds:
ipReasmFails:
ipFragFails:
ipRoutingDiscards:
ipReasmTimeout:
3115873
35447
500504
2334166
4
0
0
0
0
5
ipInHdrErrors:
ipForwDatagrams:
ipInDiscards:
ipOutRequests:
ipOutNoRoutes:
ipReasmOKs:
ipFragOKs:
ipFragCreates:
ipDefaultTTL:
1
0
0
1010542
4
0
0
0
255
Table 5-14 IP Statistics (stats/l3/ip)
Statistics
Description
ipInReceives
The total number of input datagrams received from interfaces, including
those received in error.
ipInHdrErrors
The number of input datagrams discarded due to errors in their IP headers, including bad checksums, version number mismatch, other format
errors, time-to-live exceeded, errors discovered in processing their IP
options, and so forth.
ipInAddrErrors
The number of input datagrams discarded because the IP address in their
IP header's destination field was not a valid address to be received at this
entity (the switch). This count includes invalid addresses (for example,
0.0.0.0) and addresses of unsupported Classes (for example, Class E). For
entities which are not IP Gateways and therefore do not forward datagrams, this counter includes datagrams discarded because the destination
address was not a local address.
ipForwDatagrams
The number of input datagrams for which this entity (the switch) was not
their final IP destination, as a result of which an attempt was made to find
a route to forward them to that final destination. In entities which do not
act as IP Gateways, this counter will include only those packets, which
were Source-Routed via this entity (the switch), and the Source- Route
option processing was successful.
ipInUnknownProtos
The number of locally addressed datagrams received successfully but discarded because of an unknown or unsupported protocol.
13N0340, March 2004
Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 111
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
Table 5-14 IP Statistics (stats/l3/ip)
Statistics
Description
ipInDiscards
The number of input IP datagrams for which no problems were encountered to prevent their continued processing, but which were discarded (for
example, for lack of buffer space). Note that this counter does not include
any datagrams discarded while awaiting re-assembly.
ipInDelivers
The total number of input datagrams successfully delivered to IP userprotocols (including ICMP).
ipOutRequests
The total number of IP datagrams which local IP user-protocols (including ICMP) supplied to IP in requests for transmission. Note that this
counter does not include any datagrams counted in
ipForwDatagrams.
ipOutDiscards
The number of output IP datagrams for which no problem was
encountered to prevent their transmission to their destination, but which
were discarded (for example, for lack of buffer space). Note that this
counter would include datagrams counted in ipForwDatagrams if any
such packets met this (discretionary) discard criterion.
ipOutNoRoutes
The number of IP datagrams discarded because no route could be found
to transmit them to their destination. Note that this counter includes any
packets counted in ipForwDatagrams, which meet this no-route criterion. Note that this includes any datagrams which a host cannot route
because all of its default gateways are down.
ipReasmReqds
The number of IP fragments received which needed to be reassembled at
this entity (the switch).
ipReasmOKs
The number of IP datagrams successfully re- assembled.
ipReasmFails
The number of failures detected by the IP re- assembly algorithm (for
whatever reason: timed out, errors, and so forth). Note that this is not necessarily a count of discarded IP fragments since some algorithms (notably
the algorithm in RFC 815) can lose track of the number of fragments by
combining them as they are received.
ipFragOKs
The number of IP datagrams that have been successfully fragmented at
this entity (the switch).
ipFragFails
The number of IP datagrams that have been discarded because they
needed to be fragmented at this entity (the switch) but could not be, for
example, because their Don't Fragment flag was set.
ipFragCreates
The number of IP datagram fragments that have been generated as a
result of fragmentation at this entity (the switch).
112 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu
13N0340, March 2004
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
Table 5-14 IP Statistics (stats/l3/ip)
Statistics
Description
ipRoutingDiscards
The number of routing entries, which were chosen to be discarded even
though they are valid. One possible reason for discarding such an entry
could be to free-up buffer space for other routing entries.
ipDefaultTTL
The default value inserted into the Time-To-Live (TTL) field of the
IP header of datagrams originated at this entity (the switch), whenever a
TTL value is not supplied by the transport layer protocol.
ipReasmTimeout
The maximum number of seconds, which received fragments are held
while they are awaiting reassembly at this entity (the switch).
/stats/l3/route
Route Statistics
Route statistics:
ipRoutesCur:
ipRoutesMax:
7
1024
ipRoutesHighWater:
7
RIP statistics:
ripInPkts:
ripBadPkts:
0
0
ripOutPkts:
ripRoutesAgedOut:
0
0
BGP statistics:
bgpInPkts:
bgpBadPkts:
bgpRoutesAdded:
bgpRoutesCur:
bgpRoutesIgnored:
0
0
0
0
0
bgpOutPkts:
bgpSessFailures:
bgpRoutesRemoved:
bgpRoutesFailed:
bgpRoutesFiltered:
0
0
0
0
0
Table 5-15 Route Statistics (/stats/l3/route)
Statistics
Description
ipRoutesCur
The total number of outstanding routes in the route table.
ipRoutesHighWater
The highest number of routes ever recorded in the route table.
ipRoutesMax
The maximum number of routes that are supported.
RIP statistics:
ripInPkts
13N0340, March 2004
The total number of good RIP advertisement packets received.
Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 113
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
Table 5-15 Route Statistics (/stats/l3/route)
Statistics
Description
ripOutPkts
The total number of RIP advertisement packets sent.
ripBadPkts
The total number of RIP advertisement packets received that were
dropped.
ripRoutesAgedOut
The total number of routes learned via RIP that has aged out.
BGP statistics:
bgpInPkts
The total number of BGP packets received.
bgpOutPkts
The total number of BGP packets sent.
bgpBadPkts
The total number of BGP packets dropped.
bgpSessFailures
The total number of failed sessions.
bgpRoutesAdded
The total number of routes that were added to the routing table.
bgpRoutesRemoved
The total number of routes that were removed from the routing table.
bgpRoutesCur
The total number of current BGP routes.
bgpRoutesFailed
The total number of BGP routes that failed to add in the routing table.
bgpRoutesIgnored
The total number of routes ignored because the peer was not connected locally or multihop was not configured.
bgpRoutesFiltered
The total number of routes dropped by the filter.
/stats/l3/arp
ARP statistics
This menu option enables you to display Address Resolution Protocol statistics.
ARP statistics:
arpEntriesCur:
arpEntriesMax:
3
4096
arpEntriesHighWater:
4
Table 5-16 ARP Statistics (/stats/l3/arp)
Statistics
Description
arpEntriesCur
The total number of outstanding ARP entries in the ARP table.
114 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu
13N0340, March 2004
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
Table 5-16 ARP Statistics (/stats/l3/arp)
Statistics
Description
arpEntriesHighWater
The highest number of ARP entries ever recorded in the ARP table.
arpEntriesMax
The maximum number of ARP entries that are supported.
/stats/l3/vrrp
VRRP Statistics
Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol (VRRP) support on the GbE Switch Module provides
redundancy between routers in a LAN. This is accomplished by configuring the same virtual
router IP address and ID number on each participating VRRP-capable routing device. One of
the virtual routers is then elected as the master, based on a number of priority criteria, and
assumes control of the shared virtual router IP address. If the master fails, one of the backup
virtual routers will assume routing authority and take control of the virtual router IP address.
When virtual routers are configured, you can display the following protocol statistics for VRRP:
Advertisements received (vrrpInAdvers)
Advertisements transmitted (vrrpOutAdvers)
Advertisements received, but ignored (vrrpBadAdvers)
The statistics for the VRRP LAN are displayed:
VRRP statistics:
vrrpInAdvers:
vrrpOutAdvers:
0
0
vrrpBadAdvers:
0
Table 5-17 VRRP Statistics (/stats/l3/vrrp)
Statistics
Description
vrrpInAdvers
The total number of VRRP advertisements that have been received.
vrrpBadAdvers
The total number of VRRP advertisements received that were dropped.
vrrpOutAdvers
The total number of VRRP advertisements that have been sent.
13N0340, March 2004
Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 115
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
/stats/l3/dns
DNS Statistics
This menu option enables you to display Domain Name System statistics.
DNS statistics:
dnsInRequests:
dnsBadRequests:
0
0
dnsOutRequests:
0
Table 5-18 DNS Statistics (/stats/dns)
Statistics
Description
dnsInRequests
The total number of DNS request packets that have been received.
dnsOutRequests
The total number of DNS response packets that have been transmitted.
dnsBadRequests
The total number of DNS request packets received that were dropped.
/stats/l3/icmp
ICMP Statistics
ICMP statistics:
icmpInMsgs:
icmpInDestUnreachs:
icmpInParmProbs:
icmpInRedirects:
icmpInEchoReps:
icmpInTimestampReps:
icmpInAddrMaskReps:
icmpOutErrors:
icmpOutTimeExcds:
icmpOutSrcQuenchs:
icmpOutEchos:
icmpOutTimestamps:
icmpOutAddrMasks:
245802
41
0
0
244350
0
0
0
0
0
253777
0
0
icmpInErrors:
icmpInTimeExcds:
icmpInSrcQuenchs:
icmpInEchos:
icmpInTimestamps:
icmpInAddrMasks:
icmpOutMsgs:
icmpOutDestUnreachs:
icmpOutParmProbs:
icmpOutRedirects:
icmpOutEchoReps:
icmpOutTimestampReps:
icmpOutAddrMaskReps:
1393
0
0
18
0
0
253810
15
0
0
18
0
0
Table 5-19 ICMP Statistics (/stats/l3/icmp)
Statistics
Description
icmpInMsgs
The total number of ICMP messages which the entity (the switch)
received. Note that this counter includes all those counted by
icmpInErrors.
116 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu
13N0340, March 2004
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
Table 5-19 ICMP Statistics (/stats/l3/icmp)
Statistics
Description
icmpInErrors
The number of ICMP messages which the entity (the switch)
received but determined as having ICMP-specific errors (bad ICMP
checksums, bad length, and so forth).
icmpInDestUnreachs
The number of ICMP Destination Unreachable messages received.
icmpInTimeExcds
The number of ICMP Time Exceeded messages received.
icmpInParmProbs
The number of ICMP Parameter Problem messages received.
icmpInSrcQuenchs
The number of ICMP Source Quench (buffer almost full, stop sending data) messages received.
icmpInRedirects
The number of ICMP Redirect messages received.
icmpInEchos
The number of ICMP Echo (request) messages received.
icmpInEchoReps
The number of ICMP Echo Reply messages received.
icmpInTimestamps
The number of ICMP Timestamp (request) messages received.
icmpInTimestampReps
The number of ICMP Timestamp Reply messages received.
icmpInAddrMasks
The number of ICMP Address Mask Request messages received.
icmpInAddrMaskReps
The number of ICMP Address Mask Reply messages received.
icmpOutMsgs
The total number of ICMP messages which this entity (the switch)
attempted to send. Note that this counter includes all those counted
by icmpOutErrors.
icmpOutErrors
The number of ICMP messages which this entity (the switch) did not
send due to problems discovered within ICMP such as a lack of
buffer. This value should not include errors discovered outside the
ICMP layer such as the inability of IP to route the resultant datagram. In some implementations there may be no types of errors that
contribute to this counter's value.
icmpOutDestUnreachs
The number of ICMP Destination Unreachable messages sent.
icmpOutTimeExcds
The number of ICMP Time Exceeded messages sent.
icmpOutParmProbs
The number of ICMP Parameter Problem messages sent.
icmpOutSrcQuenchs
The number of ICMP Source Quench (buffer almost full, stop sending data) messages sent.
icmpOutRedirects
The number of ICMP Redirect messages sent. For a host, this object
will always be zero, since hosts do not send redirects.
13N0340, March 2004
Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 117
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
Table 5-19 ICMP Statistics (/stats/l3/icmp)
Statistics
Description
icmpOutEchos
The number of ICMP Echo (request) messages sent.
icmpOutEchoReps
The number of ICMP Echo Reply messages sent.
icmpOutTimestamps
The number of ICMP Timestamp (request) messages sent.
icmpOutTimestampReps
The number of ICMP Timestamp Reply messages sent.
icmpOutAddrMasks
The number of ICMP Address Mask Request messages sent.
icmpOutAddrMaskReps
The number of ICMP Address Mask Reply messages sent.
/stats/l3/if <interface number>
Interface Statistics
IP interface 1 statistics:
ifInOctets:
48948386
ifInNUCastPkts:
167895
ifInErrors:
0
ifOutOctets:
27100789
ifOutNUcastPkts:
218652
ifOutErrors:
0
ifInUcastPkts:
ifInDiscards:
ifInUnknownProtos:
ifOutUcastPkts:
ifOutDiscards:
ifStateChanges
220553
0
0
441938
0
1
Table 5-20 Interface Statistics (/stats/l3/if)
Statistics
Description
ifInOctets
The total number of octets received on the interface, including framing
characters.
ifInUcastPkts
The number of packets, delivered by this sub-layer to a higher (sublayer), which were not addressed to a multicast or broadcast address at
this sub-layer.
ifInNUCastPkts
The number of packets, delivered by this sub-layer to a higher (sublayer), which were addressed to a multicast or broadcast address at this
sub-layer. This object is deprecated in favor of ifInMulticastPkts
and ifInBroadcastPkts.
ifInDiscards
The number of inbound packets that were chosen to be discarded even
though no errors had been detected to prevent their being delivered to a
higher-layer protocol. One possible reason for discarding such a packet
could be to free up buffer space.
118 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu
13N0340, March 2004
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
Table 5-20 Interface Statistics (/stats/l3/if)
Statistics
Description
ifInErrors
For packet-oriented interfaces, the number of inbound packets that contained errors preventing them from being delivered to a higher-layer protocol. For character-oriented or fixed-length interfaces, the number of
inbound transmission units that contained errors preventing them from
being deliverable to a higher-layer protocol.
ifInUnknownProtos
For packet-oriented interfaces, the number of packets received via the
interface which were discarded because of an unknown or unsupported
protocol. For character-oriented or fixed-length interfaces which support
protocol multiplexing the number of transmission units received via the
interface which were discarded because of an unknown or unsupported
protocol. For any interface which does not support protocol multiplexing,
this counter will always
be 0.
ifOutOctets
The total number of octets transmitted out of the interface, including
framing characters.
ifOutUcastPkts
The total number of packets that higher-level protocols requested to be
transmitted, and which were not addressed to a multicast or broadcast
address at this sub-layer, including those that were discarded or not sent.
ifOutNUcastPkts
The total number of packets that higher-level protocols requested to be
transmitted, and which were addressed to a multicast or broadcast address
at this sub-layer, including those that were discarded or not sent.
This object is deprecated in favor of ifOutMulticastPkts and
ifOutBroadcastPkts.
ifOutDiscards
The number of outbound packets, which were chosen to be discarded
even though no errors had been detected to prevent their being transmitted. One possible reason for discarding such a packet could be to free up
buffer space.
ifOutErrors
For packet-oriented interfaces, the number of outbound packets that
could not be transmitted because of errors. For character-oriented or
fixed-length interfaces, the number of outbound transmission units that
could not be transmitted because of errors.
ifStateChanges
The number of times an interface has transitioned from either down to up
or from up to down.
13N0340, March 2004
Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 119
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
/stats/l3/tcp
TCP Statistics
TCP statistics:
tcpRtoAlgorithm:
tcpRtoMax:
tcpActiveOpens:
tcpAttemptFails:
tcpInSegs:
tcpRetransSegs:
tcpCurBuff:
tcpOutRsts:
4
240000
252214
528
756401
0
0
417
tcpRtoMin:
tcpMaxConn:
tcpPassiveOpens:
tcpEstabResets:
tcpOutSegs:
tcpInErrs:
tcpCurConn:
0
512
7
4
756655
0
3
Table 5-21 TCP Statistics (/stats/l3/tcp)
Statistics
Description
tcpRtoAlgorithm
The algorithm used to determine the timeout value used for retransmitting unacknowledged octets.
tcpRtoMin
The minimum value permitted by a TCP implementation for the retransmission timeout, measured in milliseconds. More refined semantics
for objects of this type depend upon the algorithm used to determine the
retransmission timeout. In particular, when the timeout algorithm is
rsre(3), an object of this type has the semantics of the LBOUND quantity
described in RFC 793.
tcpRtoMax
The maximum value permitted by a TCP implementation for the retransmission timeout, measured in milliseconds. More refined semantics
for objects of this type depend upon the algorithm used to determine the
retransmission timeout. In particular, when the timeout algorithm is
rsre(3), an object of this type has the semantics of the UBOUND quantity
described in RFC 793.
tcpMaxConn
The limit on the total number of TCP connections the entity (the switch)
can support. In entities where the maximum number of connections is
dynamic, this object should contain the value -1.
tcpActiveOpens
The number of times TCP connections have made a direct transition to
the SYN-SENT state from the CLOSED state.
tcpPassiveOpens
The number of times TCP connections have made a direct transition to
the SYN-RCVD state from the LISTEN state.
tcpAttemptFails
The number of times TCP connections have made a direct transition to
the CLOSED state from either the SYN-SENT state or the SYN-RCVD
state, plus the number of times TCP connections have made a direct transition to the LISTEN state from the SYN-RCVD state.
120 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu
13N0340, March 2004
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
Table 5-21 TCP Statistics (/stats/l3/tcp)
Statistics
Description
tcpEstabResets
The number of times TCP connections have made a direct transition to
the CLOSED state from either the ESTABLISHED state or the CLOSEWAIT state.
tcpInSegs
The total number of segments received, including those received in error.
This count includes segments received on currently established connections.
tcpOutSegs
The total number of segments sent, including those on current connections but excluding those containing only retransmitted octets.
tcpRetransSegs
The total number of segments retransmitted - that is, the number of TCP
segments transmitted containing one or more previously transmitted octets.
tcpInErrs
The total number of segments received in error (for example, bad TCP
checksums).
tcpCurBuff
The total number of outstanding memory allocations from heap by TCP
protocol stack.
tcpCurConn
The total number of outstanding TCP sessions that are currently opened.
tcpOutRsts
The number of TCP segments sent containing the RST flag.
/stats/l3/udp
UDP Statistics
UDP statistics:
udpInDatagrams:
udpInErrors:
54
0
udpOutDatagrams:
udpNoPorts:
43
1578077
Table 5-22 UDP Statistics (/stats/l3/udp)
Statistics
Description
udpInDatagrams
The total number of UDP datagrams delivered to the switch.
udpOutDatagrams
The total number of UDP datagrams sent from this entity (the switch).
udpInErrors
The number of received UDP datagrams that could not be delivered for
reasons other than the lack of an application at the destination port.
udpNoPorts
The total number of received UDP datagrams for which there was no
application at the destination port.
13N0340, March 2004
Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 121
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
/stats/slb
Load Balancing Statistics Menu
[Server Load Balancing Statistics Menu]
sp
- SLB Switch SP Stats Menu
real
- Show real server stats
group
- Show real server group stats
virt
- Show virtual server stats
filt
- Show filter stats
layer7 - Show Layer 7 stats
ssl
- Show SSL SLB stats
ftp
- Show FTP SLB parsing and NAT stats
rtsp
- Show RTSP SLB stats
dns
- Show DNS SLB stats
wap
- Show WAP SLB stats
tcp
- Show TCP rate limiting stats
maint
- Show maintenance stats
clear
- Clear non-operational Server Load Balancing stats
aux
- Show auxiliary session table stats
dump
- Dump all SLB statistics
Table 5-23 SLB Statistics Menu Options (/stats/slb)
Command Syntax and Usage
sp <SP number (1-4)>
Displays the server load balancing statistics menu. To view menu options, see page 124.
real <real server number (1-63)>
Displays the following real server statistics:
Number of times the real server has failed its health checks
Number of sessions currently open on the real server
Total sessions the real server was assigned
Highest number of simultaneous sessions recorded for each real server
Real server transmit/receive octets
See page 125 for sample output.
group <real server group number (1-64)>
Displays the following real server group statistics:
Current and total sessions for each real server in the real server group.
Current and total sessions for all real servers associated with the real server group.
Highest number of simultaneous sessions recorded for each real server.
Real server transmit/receive octets. For per-service octet counters, see page 127.
See page 128 for sample output.
122 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu
13N0340, March 2004
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
Table 5-23 SLB Statistics Menu Options (/stats/slb)
Command Syntax and Usage
virt <virtual server number (1-64)>
Displays the following virtual server statistics:
Current and total sessions for each real server associated with the virtual server.
Current and total sessions for all real servers associated with the virtual server.
Highest number of simultaneous sessions recorded for each real server.
Real server transmit/receive octets. For per-service octet counters, see page 127.
See page 129 for sample output.
filt <filter ID (1-1024)>
Displays the total number of times any filter has been used. See page 129 for sample output.
layer7
Displays Layer 7 statistics. See page 130 for sample output.
ssl
Displays SSL server load balancing statistics. See page 134 for sample output.
ftp
Displays FTP SLB parsing and NAT statistics. See page 135 for sample output.
rtsp
Displays RTSP SLB statistics. See page 138 for sample output.
dns
Displays DNS SLB statistics. See page 138 for sample output.
wap
Displays WAP SLB statistics. See page 140 for sample output.
tcp
Displays statistics for TCP rate limiting. See page 142 for sample output.
maint
Displays SLB maintenance statistics. See page 142 for sample output.
clear [y|n]
Clears all non-operating SLB statistics on the GbE Switch Module, resetting them to zero. This
command does not reset the switch and does not affect the following counters:
Counters required for Layer 4 and Layer 7 operation (such as current real server sessions).
All related SNMP counters.
To view the statistics reset by this command, refer to Table 5-41 on page 144.
aux
Displays auxiliary session table statistics.
13N0340, March 2004
Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 123
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
Table 5-23 SLB Statistics Menu Options (/stats/slb)
Command Syntax and Usage
dump
Dumps all switch SLB statistics. Use this command to gather data for tuning and debugging switch
performance. To save dump data to a file, set your communication software on your workstation to
capture session data prior to issuing the dump command.
/stats/slb/sp
Server Load Balancing SP statistics Menu
[Server Load Balancing SP Statistics Menu]
real
- Show real server stats
group
- Show real server group stats
virt
- Show virtual server stats
filt
- Show filter stats
maint
- Show maintenance stats
aux
- Show auxiliary session table stats
clear
- Clear SP stats
Table 5-24 SP Statistics Menu options (/stats/slb/sp)
Command Syntax and Usage
real <real server number (1-63)>
Displays real server statistics of the switch port. See page 125 for a sample output.
group <real server group number (1-64)>
Displays real server group statistics of the switch port. See page 125 for a sample output.
virt <virtual server number (1-64)>
Displays statistics of the virtual server. See page 125 for a sample output.
filt <filter ID (1-1024)>
Displays statistics of the filter. See page 126 for a sample output.
maint
Displays the SP maintenance statistics. See page 126 for a sample output.
aux
Displays the statistics of the auxiliary session table.
clear
Deletes all the SP statistics.
124 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu
13N0340, March 2004
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
/stats/slb/sp/real <real server number>
SP Real Server Statistics
Port 1 Real server 1 stats:
Current sessions:
Total sessions:
Octets:
3
3
24
/stats/slb/sp <sp number>/group <real
group server number>
SP Real Group Server Statistics
Real server group 1 stats:
Current
Total Highest
Real IP address
Sessions
Sessions Sessions
---- --------------- -------- ---------- -------1 200.100.10.14
20
60
9
2 200.100.10.15
20
77
12
---- --------------- -------- ---------- -------40
137
21
Octets
--------------480000
616000
--------------1096000
/stats/slb/sp <sp number>/virt <virtual
server number>
SP Virtual Server Statistics
Real server group 1 stats:
Current
Total Highest
Real IP address
Sessions
Sessions Sessions
---- --------------- -------- ---------- -------1 200.100.10.14
20
60
9
2 200.100.10.15
20
77
12
---- --------------- -------- ---------- -------200.100.10.100
40
137
21
13N0340, March 2004
Octets
--------------480000
616000
--------------1096000
Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 125
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
/stats/slb/sp <sp number>/filt <filter
number>
SP Filter Statistics
Poet 1 Filter 30 stats:
Total Firings:
2
/stats/slb/sp <sp number>/maint
SP Maintenance Statistics
SP 1 SLB Maintenance stats:
Maximum sessions:
Current sessions:
4 second average:
64 second average:
Terminated sessions:
Allocation failures:
Non TCP/IP frames:
TCP fragments:
UDP datagrams:
Incorrect VIPs:
Incorrect Vports:
No available real server:
Filtered (denied) frames:
LAND attacks:
Total IP fragment sessions:
IP fragment sessions:
IP fragment discards:
IP fragment table full:
126 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu
523264
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
13N0340, March 2004
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
/stats/slb/real <real server number>
Real Server SLB Statistics
Real server 1 stats:
Health check failures:
Current sessions:
Total sessions:
Highest sessions:
Octets
0
129
65478
4343
523824000
NOTE – Octets are provided per server, not per service, unless configured as described in “Per
Service Octet Counters” on page 127.
Table 5-25 Real Server SLB Statistics (/stats/slb/real)
Statistics
Description
Current sessions
The total number of outstanding sessions that are established to the particular real server.
Total sessions
The total number of sessions that have been established to the particular
real server.
Highest sessions
The highest number of sessions ever recorded for the particular real
server.
Octets
The total number of octets sent by the particular real server.
Per Service Octet Counters
For each load-balanced real server, the octet counters represent the combined number of transmit and receive bytes (octets). These counters are then added to report the total octets for each
virtual server.
The octet counters are provided per server–not per service. If you need octet counters on a perservice basis, you can accomplish this through the following configuration:
1.
Configure a separate IP address for each service on each server being load balanced.
For instance, you can configure IP address 10.1.1.20 for HTTP services, and 10.1.1.21 for FTP
services on the same physical server.
13N0340, March 2004
Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 127
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
2.
On the GbE Switch Module, configure a real server with a real IP address for each service above.
Continuing the example above, two real servers would be configured for the physical server
(representing each real service). If there were five physical servers providing the two services
(HTTP and FTP), 10 real servers would have to be configured: five for the HTTP services on
each physical server, and five for the FTP services on each physical server.
3.
On the GbE Switch Module, configure one real server group for each type of service, and
group each appropriate real server IP address into the group that handles the specific
service.
Thus, in keeping with our example, two groups would be configured: one for handling HTTP
and one for handling FTP.
4.
Configure a virtual server and add the appropriate services to that virtual server.
/stats/slb/group <real server group number>
Real Server Group Statistics
Real server group 1 stats:
Current
Total Highest
Real IP address
Sessions
Sessions Sessions
---- --------------- -------- ---------- -------1 200.100.10.14
20
60
9
2 200.100.10.15
20
77
12
---- --------------- -------- ---------- -------40
137
21
Octets
--------------480000
616000
--------------1096000
Real server group statistics include the following:
Current and total sessions for each real server in the real server group.
Current and total sessions for all real servers associated with the real server group.
Highest number of simultaneous sessions recorded for each real server.
Real server transmit/receive octets. For per-service octet counters, see the procedure on
“Per Service Octet Counters” on page 127.
128 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu
13N0340, March 2004
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
/stats/slb/virt <virtual server number>
Virtual Server SLB Statistics
Virtual server 1 stats:
Current
Total Highest
Real IP address
Sessions
Sessions Sessions
---- --------------- -------- ---------- -------1 200.100.10.14
20
60
9
2 200.100.10.15
20
77
12
---- --------------- -------- ---------- -------200.100.10.20
40
309
21
Octets
--------------480000
616000
--------------1096000
NOTE – The virtual server IP address is shown on the last line, below the real server IP addresses.
Virtual server statistics include the following:
Current and total sessions for each real server associated with the virtual server.
Current and total sessions for all real servers associated with the virtual server.
Highest number of simultaneous sessions recorded for each real server.
Real server transmit/receive octets. For per-service octet counters, see “Per Service Octet
Counters” on page 127.
/stats/slb/filt <filter number>
Filter SLB Statistics
Filter 1 stats:
Total firings:
1011
You can obtain the total number of times any filter has been used.
13N0340, March 2004
Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 129
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
/stats/slb/layer7
SLB Layer7 Statistics Menu
[Layer 7 Statistics Menu]
redir
- Show URL Redirection stats
str
- Show SLB String stats
maint
- Show Layer 7 Maintenance stats
Table 5-26 SLB Layer 7 Statistics Menu Options (/stats/slb/layer7)
Command Syntax & Usage
redir
Displays URL Redirection statistics. See page 130 for a sample output.
str
Displays SLB string statistics. See page 131 for a sample output.
maint
Displays Layer 7 maintenance statistics. See page 132 for a sample output.
/stats/slb/layer7/redir
Layer7 Redirection Statistics
Total
Total
Total
Total
Total
Total
Total
URL based web cache redirection stats:
cache server hits:
origin server hits:
straight to origin server hits:
none-GETs hits:
'Cookie: ' hits:
no-cache hits:
0
0
0
0
0
0
Table 5-27 Layer 7 Redirection Statistics (/stats/slb/layer7/redir)
Statistics
Description
Total cache server hits The total number of HTTP requests redirected to the cache server.
Total origin server hits The total number of HTTP requests forwarded to the origin server.
Total straight to ori- The total number of HTTP requests forwarded from straight to the
gin server hits
origin server.
Total none-GETs hits
The total number of none GET requests forwarded to the origin server.
Total 'Cookie:' hits
The total number of cookie requests forwarded to the origin server.
130 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu
13N0340, March 2004
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
Table 5-27 Layer 7 Redirection Statistics (/stats/slb/layer7/redir)
Statistics
Description
Total no-cache hits
The total number of requests containing no-cache header forwarded
to the origin server.
/stats/slb/layer7/str
Layer 7 SLB String Statistics
SLB String stats:
ID SLB String
1 any
2 www.[abcdefghijklm]*.com
3 www.[nopqrstuvwxyz]*.com
4 www.junk.com
5 www.abc.com
6 www.[abcdefjhijklm]*.org
7 www.[nopqrstuvwxyz]*.org
Hits
1527115
0
0
0
0
0
0
Table 5-28 Layer 7 SLB String Statistics (/stats/slb/layer7/str)
Statistics
Description
ID SLB String
The user-defined strings being used in URL matching.
Hits
The total number of instances that are load-balanced due to matching of
the particular URL ID.
13N0340, March 2004
Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 131
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
/stats/slb/layer7/maint
Layer 7 SLB Maintenance Statistics
Clients reset by switch on server side:
0
Connection Splicing to support HTTP/1.1:
0
Half open connections:
0
Switch retries:
0
Random early drops:
0
Requests exceeded 4500 bytes:
0
Invalid 3-way handshakes:
0
Current SP[1] memory units:
327
Lowest:
Current SP[2] memory units:
327
Lowest:
Current SP[3] memory units:
327
Lowest:
Current SP[4] memory units:
327
Lowest:
Current SP memory units:
1308
Current SEQ buffer entries:
0
Highest:
Current Data buffer use:
0
Highest:
Current SP buffer entries:
0
Highest:
Total Nonzero SEQ Alloc:
0
Total SEQ Buffer Allocs:
0
Total SEQ Frees:
Total Data Buffer Allocs:
0
Total Data Frees:
Alloc Fails - Seq buffers:
0
Alloc Fails - Ubufs:
Max sessions per bucket:
0
Max frames per session:
Max bytes buffered (sess):
0
327
327
327
327
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Table 5-29 SLB Layer 7 Maintenance Statistics (/stats/slb/layer7/maint)
Statistics
Description
Clients reset by
switch on server side
The number of reset frames sent to the server by the switch during
server connection termination.
Connection Splicing to
support HTTP/1.1
The total number of connection swapping between different real
servers in supporting multiple HTTP/1.1 client requests.0
Half open connections
The total numbers of outstanding TCP connections that are half
opened. It is incremented when the switch responds to TCP SYN
packet and decremented upon receiving TCP SYN ACK packet from
the requester.
Switch retries
The total number of switch retries to connect to the real server.
Random early drops
The total number of SYN frames dropped when the buffer is low.
Requests exceeded 4500
bytes
The total number of GET requests that exceeded 4500 bytes.
Invalid 3-way handshakes
The total number of dropped frames because of invalid 3-way hand
shakes.
132 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu
13N0340, March 2004
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
Table 5-29 SLB Layer 7 Maintenance Statistics (/stats/slb/layer7/maint)
Statistics
Description
Current SP memory
units
The current available SP memory units.
Current SEQ buffer
entries
The number of outstanding sequence buffers used.
Highest SEQ buffer
entries
The highest number of sequence buffers ever used.
Current Data buffer
use
The number of outstanding data buffers used.
Highest Data buffer
use
The highest number of data buffers ever used.
Total Nonzero SEQ
Alloc
The total number of sequence buffer allocated.2
Total SEQ Buffer
Allocs
The total number of sequence buffer allocations.
Total SEQ Frees
The total number of sequence buffer is freed.
Total Data Buffer
Allocs
The total number of buffers allocated to store client request.2
Total Data Frees
The total of number buffers freed.
Alloc Fails - Seq
buffers
The number of times sequence buffer allocation failed.
Alloc Fails - Ubufs
The number of times the URL data buffer allocation failed.
Max sessions per
bucket
The maximum number of items (sessions) allowed in the session
table hash bucket chain.
Max frames per session The maximum number of frames to be buffered per session.
Max bytes buffered
(sess)
13N0340, March 2004
The maximum number of bytes to be buffered per session.
Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 133
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
/stats/slb/ssl
SLB Secure Socket Layer Statistics
SSL SLB maintenance stats:
SessionId allocation fails:
0
Current
Total Highest
Sessions
Sessions Sessions
------------------------- -------- ---------- -------Unique SessionIds
0
0
0
SSL connections
0
0
0
Persistent Port Sessions
0
0
0
Table 5-30 SLB Secure Socket Layer Statistics (/stats/slb/ssl)
Statistics
Description
SSL SLB maintenance
stats
Debug stats for SSL SessionId based persistence.
SessionId allocation
fails
The number of times allocation of a session table entry failed when
attempting to store a SessionId in the table.
The table shows the Current Sessions, the total sessions seen on the switch since last reset and the high
water mark of current sessions for the following:
Unique SessionIds
Many SSL sessions can use the same SessionId, these should all
bind to the same server. This number shows the number of unique
SSL sessions seen on the switch.
SSL connections
The number of different TCP connections using SSL service.
Persistent Port
Sessions
The number of SessionIds, to allow for persistence across different client ports.
134 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu
13N0340, March 2004
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
/stats/slb/ftp
File Transfer Protocol SLB and Filter Statistics Menu
[FTP SLB parsing and
active - Show
parsing - Show
maint
- Show
dump
- Dump
Filter Statistics Menu]
active FTP NAT filter stats
FTP SLB parsing server stats
FTP maintenance stats
all FTP SLB/NAT stats
Table 5-31 FTP SLB Parsing and Filter Statistics Menu Options (/stats/slb/ftp)
Command Syntax and Usage
active
Shows active FTP SLB parsing and filter statistics. See page 135 for sample output.
parsing
Shows parsing statistics. See page 136 for sample output.
maint
Shows maintenance statistics. See page 136 for sample output.
dump
Shows all FTP SLB/NAT statistics. See page 137.
/stats/slb/ftp/active
Active FTP SLB Parsing and Filter Statistics
Total Active FTP NAT stats(PORT):
Total FTP:
Total New Active FTP Index:
Active FTP NAT ACK/SEQ diff:
0
0
0
Table 5-32 Active FTP Slb Parsing and Filter statistics (/stats/slb/ftp/active)
Statistics
Description
Total Active FTP NAT
stats (PORT)
The number of times the switch receives the port command from
the client.
Total FTP
The number of times the switch receives both active and passive
FTP connections.
Total New Active FTP
Index
The number of times the switch creates a new index due to port
command from the client.
Active FTP NAT ACK/SEQ
diff
The difference in the numbers of ACK and SEQ that the Switch
needs for packet adjustment.
13N0340, March 2004
Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 135
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
/stats/slb/ftp/parsing
Passive FTP SLB Parsing Statistics
Total FTP SLB Parsing Stats(PASV):
Total FTP:
Total New FTP SLB parsing Index:
FTP SLB parsing ACK/SEQ diff:
0
0
0
Table 5-33 Passive FTP SLB Parsing Statistics (/stats/slb/ftp/parsing)
Statistics
Description
Total FTP
The number of times the switch receives both active and passive
FTP connections.
Total New FTP SLB
parsing Index
The number of times the switch creates a new index in response to
the pasv command from the client.
FTP SLB parsing ACK/
SEQ diff
The difference in the numbers of ACK and SEQ that the switch
needs FTP SLB parsing.
/stats/slb/ftp/maint
FTP SLB Maintenance Statistics
FTP mode switch error:
0
Table 5-34 FTP SLB Maintenance Statistics (/stats/slb/ftp/maint)
Statistics
Description
FTP mode switch error
The number of times the switch is not able to switch modes from
active to passive and vice versa.
136 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu
13N0340, March 2004
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
/stats/slb/ftp/dump
FTP SLB Statistics Dump
Total FTP:
Total FTP NAT Filtered:
Total new active FTP NAT Index:
Total new FTP SLB parsing Index:
FTP Active FTP NAT ACK/SEQ diff:
FTP SLB parsing ACK/SEQ diff:
FTP mode switch error:
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Table 5-35 FTP SLB Statistics Dump (/stats/slb/ftp/dump)
Statistics
Description
Total FTP
The total number of FTP sessions that occurred.
Total FTP NAT Filtered The total number of FTP NAT filter sessions that occurred.
Total new active FTP
NAT Index
The total number of new data sessions created for FTP NAT filter in
active mode.
Total new FTP SLB
parsing Index
The number of times the switch creates a new index in response to
the pasv command from the client.
FTP Active FTP NAT
ACK/SEQ diff
The total number of times the adjustment between ACK and SEQ
occured on the filter.
FTP SLB parsing ACK/
SEQ diff
The difference in the numbers of ACK and SEQ that the switch
needs for FTP SLB parsing.
FTP mode switch error
The number of times the switch could not switch mode from active
to passive and vice versa.
13N0340, March 2004
Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 137
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
/stats/slb/rtsp
RTSP SLB Statistics
Control
UDP
Connection Buffer
Alloc
SP Connection Streams
Redirect
Denied
Allocs
Failures
-- ---------- ---------- ---------- ---------- ---------- ---------1
0
0
0
0
0
0
2
0
0
0
0
0
0
3
0
0
0
0
0
0
4
0
0
0
0
0
0
-- ---------- ---------- ---------- ---------- ---------- -------0
0
0
0
0
0
Table 5-36 RTSP SLB Statistics (/stats/slb/rtsp)
Statistics
Description
ControlConnection
The total number of TCP connections for RTSP control connection.
UDP Streams
The total number of UDP connections for data channels. The number
depends upon the type of media player being used.
Redirect
The total number of times the connection got redirected.
ConnectionDenied
The total number of times the connections got denied due to shortage of
resources or the real server being down.
BufferAllocs
The total number of buffer allocations used.
AllocFailures
The total number of times the buffer allocation failed.
/stats/slb/dns
DNS SLB Statistics
Total
Total
Total
Total
Total
Total
Total
number
number
number
number
number
number
number
of
of
of
of
of
of
of
138 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu
TCP DNS queries:
UDP DNS queries:
invalid DNS queries:
multiple DNS queries:
domain name parse errors:
failed real server name matches:
DNS parsing internal errors:
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
13N0340, March 2004
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
Table 5-37 DNS SLB Statistics (/stats/slb/dns)
Statistics
Description
Total number of TCP
DNS queries
The total number of DNS queries that received through TCP
connections.
Total number of UDP
DNS queries
The total number of DNS queries received through UDP requests.
Total number of
invalid DNS queries
The total number of malformed DNS queries received.
Total number of
multiple DNS queries
The total number of DNS queries that contain more than one domain
name to be resolved. Currently only one domain name resolution per
request is supported.
Total number of domain
name parse errors
The total number of DNS queries that have short or invalid domain
names to be resolved.
Total number of failed
real server name
matches
The total number of times the user failed to find a real server which
has the same l7 strings that match the domain name to be resolved.
Total number of DNS
parsing internal
errors
The total number of out of memory and other unexpected errors the
user gets while processing the DNS query.
13N0340, March 2004
Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 139
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
/stats/slb/wap
WAP SLB Statistics
WAP Maintenance stats:
current sessions:
0
allocation failures:
0
incorrect VIPs:
0
incorrect Vports:
0
no available real server:
0
requests to wrong SP:
0
-----------------------------------------------------------------TPCP External Notification stats:
add session reqs:
0
del session reqs:
0
req fails- q full:
0
req fails- q full:
0
req fails- SP dead:
0
req fails- SP dead:
0
entries in use:
0
entries in use:
0
max entries in use:
0
max entries in use:
0
-----------------------------------------------------------------RADIUS Snooping stats:
acct reqs:
0
acct wrap reqs:
0
acct start reqs:
0
acct update reqs:
0
acct stop reqs:
0
acct bad reqs:
0
add session reqs:
0
del session reqs:
0
req fails- q full:
0
req fails- SP dead:
0
req fails- DMA:
0
max entries in use:
0
Table 5-38 WAP SLB Statistics (/stats/slb/wap)
Statistics
Description
WAP Maintenance stats:
current sessions
The number of session bindings currently in use.
allocation failures
Indicates instances where the switch ran out of available bindings for a
port.
incorrect VIPs
Indicates the number of times the switch received a Layer 4 request for
a virtual server which was not configured.
incorrect Vports
This dropped frames counter indicates that the virtual server has received
frames for TCP/UDP services that have not been configured. Normally
this indicates a mis-configuration on the virtual server or the client.
no available real
server
This dropped frames counter indicates that all real servers are either out
of service or at their maxcon limit.
requests to wrong SP The number of session add/delete requests sent to the wrong SP.
140 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu
13N0340, March 2004
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
Table 5-38 WAP SLB Statistics (/stats/slb/wap)
Statistics
Description
TPCP External Notification stats:
add session reqs
The number of WAP session add requests via TPCP.
del session reqs
The number of WAP session delete requests via TPCP.
req fails- q full
The number of add-request failures due to request queue being full.
req fails- SP dead
The number of add-request failures due to dead target SP.
entries in use
The number of queue entries in use.
max entries in use
The maximum number of queue entries in use at one time for session
delete requests via TPCP.
RADIUS Snooping stats:
acct reqs
The number of RADIUS Accounting frames received.
acct wrap reqs
The number of wrapped RADIUS Accounting frames
received.
acct start reqs
The number of RADIUS Accounting Start frames received.
acct update reqs
The number of RADIUS Accounting Update frames.
acct stop reqs
The number of RADIUS Accounting Stop frames received.
acct bad reqs
The number of bad RADIUS Accounting frames received.
add session reqs
The number of WAP session add requests via RADIUS snooping.
del session reqs
The number of WAP session delete requests via RADIUS snooping.
req fails- q full
The number of add/delete requests failed due to request queue being
full.
req fails- SP dead
The number of add/delete request failures due to dead target SP.
req fails- DMA
The number of add/delete requests failed due to DMA write failure.
max entries in use
The maximum number of queue entries in use at a time for session add/
delete requests via RADIUS snooping.
13N0340, March 2004
Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 141
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
/stats/slb/tcp
SLB TCP Rate Limiting Statistics
TCP rate limiting stats:
Total hold downs triggered:
Current per-client state entries:
0
0
Table 5-39 SLB TCP Rate Limiting Statistics (/stats/slb/tcp)
Statistics
Description
Total hold downs
triggered
The total number of hold downs that occurred since the last stats clear.
Current per-client
state entries
The current number of per client state entries in the session table.
/stats/slb/maint
SLB Maintenance Statistics
SLB Maintenance stats:
Maximum sessions:
Current sessions:
4 second average:
64 second average:
Terminated sessions:
Allocation failures:
TCP fragments:
UDP datagrams:
Non TCP/IP frames:
Incorrect VIPs:
Incorrect Vports:
No available real server:
Backup server activations:
Overflow server activations:
Filtered (denied) frames:
LAND attacks:
Total IP fragment sessions:
Current IP fragment sessions
IP fragment discards:
IP fragment table full:
142 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu
2093056
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
13N0340, March 2004
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
SLB Maintenance statistics are described in the following table.
Table 5-40 Server Load Balancing Maintenance Statistics (/stats/slb/maint)
Statistic
Description
Maximum sessions
The maximum number of simultaneous sessions supported.
Current Sessions
Number of session bindings currently in use (the last 4 and 64 seconds).
Terminated Sessions Number of sessions removed from the session table because the server
assigned to them failed and graceful server failure was not enabled.
Allocation Failures Indicates instances where the Switch ran out of available sessions for a port.
TCP Fragments
Indicates the number of TCP fragments encountered by the switch. Layer 4
processing might not handle TCP fragments, depending on configuration.
UDP Datagrams
Indicates that the virtual server IP address and MAC are receiving UDP
frames when UDP balancing is not turned on.
Non TCP/IP Frames
Indicates the number of non-IP based frames received by the virtual server.
Incorrect VIPs
Indicates the number of times the switch received a Layer 4 request for a
virtual server which was not configured.
Incorrect Vports
This dropped frames counter indicates that the virtual server has received
frames for TCP/UDP services that have not been configured. Normally this
indicates a mis-configuration on the virtual server or the client, but it may
be an indication of a potential security probing application like SATAN.
No Server Available This dropped frames counter indicates that all real servers are either out
of service or at their maxcon limit.
Backup Server
Activations
This indicates the number of times a real server failure has occurred and
caused a backup server to be brought online.
Overflow Server
Activations
This indicates the number of times a real server has reached the maxcon
limit and caused an overflow server to be brought online.
Filtered (Denied)
Frames
This indicates the number of frames that were dropped because they
matched an active filter with the deny action set.
LAND attacks
This counter increases whenever a packet has the same source and destination IP addresses and ports.
Total IP fragment
sessions
This represents the total number of fragment sessions the switch has processed so far.
Current IP fragment
sessions
This represents the current number of fragment sessions.
IP fragment discards
The number of fragmented packets that are discarded due to lack of
resources.
IP fragment table
full
This counter indicates how many times session table is full.
13N0340, March 2004
Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 143
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
/stats/slb/clear
Clearing the SLB Statistics
The following statistics are reset to zero when the clear command is given and confirmed:
Table 5-41 SLB Statistics Reset (/stats/slb/clear)
Statistics
Description
Real server stats:
Health check failures
Total sessions
Highest sessions
Octets
Real server group
stats:
Total sessions
Highest sessions
Octets
Virtual server
stats
Total sessions
Highest sessions
Octets
Filter stats
Total firings
SLB switch port
stats, per port
Real server stats: Octets, Total sessions
Real server group: Octets, Total sessions
Virtual server: Octets, Total sessions
Total firings: Octets
Global SLB stats
Per real server:
DNS handoffs
HTTP redirects
Per server group:
DNS handoffs
HTTP redirects
URL SLB and Redirection stats
Redir:
Total cache server hits
Total origin server hits
Total none-GETs hits
Total 'Cookie: ' hits
Total no-cache hits
LB:
ID SLB String hits
SSL SLB stats
Total Sessions
Highest Sessions
144 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu
13N0340, March 2004
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
Table 5-41 SLB Statistics Reset (/stats/slb/clear)
Statistics
Description
FTP SLB parsing and
NAT stats
Total FTP
Total FTP NAT Filtered
Total new active FTP NAT Index
Total new FTP SLB parsing Index
FTP Active FTP NAT ACK/SEQ diff
FTP SLB parsing ACK/SEQ diff
Real server stats
Health check failures
Total sessions
Highest sessions
Octets
Real server group
stats
Total sessions
Highest sessions
Octets
Virtual server
stats
Total sessions
Highest sessions
Octets
/stats/mp
Management Processor Statistics
[MP-specific Statistics Menu]
pkt
- Show Packet stats
tcb
- Show All TCP control blocks in use
ucb
- Show All UDP control blocks in use
sfd
- Show All Socket FD in use
cpu
- Show CPU utilization
Table 5-42 Management Processor Statistics Menu Options (/stats/mp)
Command Syntax and Usage
pkt
Displays packet statistics, to check for leads and load. To view a sample output and a description of
the stats, see page 146.
tcb
Displays all TCP control blocks that are in use. To view a sample output and a description of the
stats, see page 147.
13N0340, March 2004
Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 145
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
Table 5-42 Management Processor Statistics Menu Options (/stats/mp)
Command Syntax and Usage
ucb
Displays all UDP control blocks that are in use. To view a sample output, see page 147.
sfd
Displays all Socket File Descriptors that are in use. To view a sample output, see page 148.
cpu
Displays CPU utilization for periods of up to 1, 4, and 64 seconds. To view a sample output and a
description of the stats, see page 148.
/stats/mp/pkt
MP Packet Statistics
Packet counts:
allocs:
1166996
mediums:
0
smalls:
0
failures:
0
frees:
mediums hi-watermark:
smalls hi-watermark:
1166996
7
7
Table 5-43 Packet Statistics (/stats/mp/pkt)
Statistics
Description
allocs
Total number of packet allocations from the packet buffer pool by the
TCP/IP protocol stack.
frees
Total number of times the packet buffers are freed (released) to the packet
buffer pool by the TCP/IP protocol stack.
mediums
Total number of packet allocations with size between 128 to 1536 bytes
from the packet buffer pool by the TCP/IP protocol stack.
smalls
Total number of packet allocations with size less than 128 bytes from the
packet buffer pool by the TCP/IP protocol stack.
failures
Total number of packet allocation failures from the packet buffer pool by
the TCP/IP protocol stack.
frees
Total number of packets freed from the packet buffer pool by the TCP/IP
protocol stack.
mediums hi-watermark
The highest number of packet allocation with size between 128 to 1536
bytes from the packet buffer pool by the TCP/IP protocol stack.
146 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu
13N0340, March 2004
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
Table 5-43 Packet Statistics (/stats/mp/pkt)
Statistics
Description
smalls hi-watermark The highest number of packet allocation with size less than 128 bytes
from the packet buffer pool by the TCP/IP protocol stack.
/stats/mp/tcb
TCP Statistics
All TCP allocated control blocks:
10ad41e8: 0.0.0.0
0 <=> 0.0.0.0
10ad5790: 47.81.27.5
1171 <=> 47.80.23.243
80
23
listen
established
Table 5-44 MP Specified TCP Statistics (/stats/mp/tcb)
Statistics
Description
10ad41e8/10ad5790
Memory
0.0.0.0/47.81.27.5
Destination IP address
0/1171
Destination port
0.0.0.0/47.80.23.243
Source IP
80/23
Source port
listen/established
State
/stats/mp/ucb
UCB Statistics
All UDP allocated control blocks:
161: listen
13N0340, March 2004
Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 147
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
/stats/mp/sfd
MP-Specific SFD Statistics
All Socket FD allocated:
max_fdi=2
fdi=0 fd=15 pfdi=-1
10c27fd8: 0.0.0.0
0<=>47.133.108.161 80 listen TCP server
fdi=1 fd=16 pfdi=-1
10b9564c: 0.0.0.0
0<=>47.133.108.161 23 listen TCP server
fdi=2 fd=17 pfdi=1
10c27c78: 47.129.153.150 5341<=>47.133.108.161 23 accept TCP server
/stats/mp/cpu
CPU Statistics
This menu option enables you to display the CPU utilization statistics.
CPU utilization:
cpuUtil1Second:
cpuUtil4Seconds:
cpuUtil64Seconds:
53%
54%
54%
Table 5-45 CPU Statistics (stats/mp/cpu)
Statistics
Description
cpuUtil1Second
The utilization of MP CPU over 1 second. It shows the percentage.
cpuUtil4Seconds
The utilization of MP CPU over 4 seconds. It shows the percentage.
cpuUtil64Seconds
The utilization of MP CPU over 64 seconds. It shows the percentage.
/stats/sp <SP Number>
SP Specific Statistics Menu
[SP-specific Statistics Menu]
maint
- Show maintenance stats
clear
- Clear maintenance stats
cpu
- Show CPU utilization
148 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu
13N0340, March 2004
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
Table 5-46 SP Specific Statistics (/stats/sp)
Statistics
Description
maint
Indicates the total number of all the letter statistics received or sent
from this SP.
clear
Deletes all the maintenance statistics.
cpu
Displays what percentage of the CPU has been utilized.
/stats/pace
Packet Acceleration Statistics Menu
[Packet Acceleration Statistics Menu]
error
- PACE Error Stats
info
- PACE Informational Stats
maint
- PACE Maintenance Stats
fp
- PACE HFP Stats
clear
- Clear non-operational PACE stats
dump
- Dump all PACE statistics
Table 5-47 Packet Acceleration Statistics (/stats/pace)
Statistics
Description
error
Display error statistics on the PACE processor.
info
Display general information about PACE performance.
maint
Display session data about the utilzation of PACE resources.
fp
Display hardware counts for data passed through the frame processor.
clear
Clear non-operational PACE statistics.
dump
Dump all PACE statistics.
13N0340, March 2004
Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 149
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
/stats/snmp
SNMP Statistics
SNMP statistics:
snmpInPkts:
snmpInBadC'tyNames:
snmpInASNParseErrs:
snmpOutPkts:
snmpInTooBigs:
snmpInBadValues:
snmpInGenErrs:
snmpInTotalSetVars:
snmpInGetNexts:
snmpInGetResponses:
snmpOutTooBigs:
snmpOutBadValues:
snmpOutGenErrs:
snmpOutGetNexts:
snmpOutGetResponses:
54
0
0
54
0
0
0
0
52
0
0
0
0
0
54
snmpInBadVersions:
snmpInBadC'tyUses:
snmpEnableAuthTraps:
snmpInBadTypes:
snmpInNoSuchNames:
snmpInReadOnlys:
snmpInTotalReqVars:
snmpInGetRequests:
snmpInSetRequests:
snmpInTraps:
snmpOutNoSuchNames:
snmpOutReadOnlys:
snmpOutGetRequests:
snmpOutSetRequests:
snmpOutTraps:
0
0
0
0
0
0
105
2
0
0
2
0
0
0
0
Table 5-48 SNMP Statistics (/stats/snmp)
Statistics
Description
snmpInPkts
The total number of Messages delivered to the SNMP entity from the
transport service.
snmpInBadVersions
The total number of SNMP Messages, which were delivered to the
SNMP protocol entity and were for an unsupported SNMP version.
snmpInBadC'tyNames
The total number of SNMP Messages delivered to the SNMP entity which
used an SNMP community name not known to the said entity (the switch).
snmpInBadC'tyUses
The total number of SNMP Messages delivered to the SNMP protocol
entity which represented an SNMP operation which was not allowed by
the SNMP community named in the Message.
snmpInASNParseErrs
The total number of ASN.1 or BER errors encountered by the SNMP protocol entity when decoding SNMP Messages received.
Note: OSI's method of specifying abstract objects is called ASN.1
(Abstract Syntax Notation One, defined in X.208), and one set of rules
for representing such objects as strings of ones and zeros is called the
BER (Basic Encoding Rules, defined in X.209). ASN.1 is a flexible notation that allows one to define a variety of data types, from simple types
such as integers and bit strings to structured types such as sets and
sequences. BER describes how to represent or encode values of each
ASN.1 type as a string of eight-bit octets.
150 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu
13N0340, March 2004
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
Table 5-48 SNMP Statistics (/stats/snmp)
Statistics
Description
snmpEnableAuth
Traps
An object to enable or disable the authentication traps generated by this
entity (the switch).
snmpOutPkts
The total number of SNMP Messages which were passed from the SNMP
protocol entity to the transport service.
snmpInBadTypes
The total number of SNMP Messages which failed ASN parsing.
snmpInTooBigs
The total number of SNMP Protocol Data Units (PDUs) which were
delivered to the SNMP protocol entity and for which the value of the
error-status field is too big.
snmpInNoSuchNames
The total number of SNMP Protocol Data Units (PDUs) which were
delivered to the SNMP protocol entity and for which the value of the
error-status field is noSuchName.
snmpInBadValues
The total number of SNMP Protocol Data Units (PDUs) which were
delivered to the SNMP protocol entity and for which the value of the
error-status field is badValue.
snmpInReadOnlys
The total number of valid SNMP Protocol Data Units (PDUs), which
were delivered to the SNMP protocol entity and for which the value of
the error-status field is `read-Only'. It should be noted that it is a protocol
error to generate an SNMP PDU, which contains the value `read-Only' in
the error-status field. As such, this object is provided as a means of
detecting incorrect implementations of the SNMP.
snmpInGenErrs
The total number of SNMP Protocol Data Units (PDUs), which were
delivered to the SNMP protocol entity and for which the value of the
error-status field is genErr.
snmpInTotalReqVars
The total number of MIB objects which have been retrieved successfully
by the SNMP protocol entity as a result of receiving valid SNMP GetRequest and Get-Next Protocol Data Units (PDUs).
snmpInTotalSetVars
The total number of MIB objects, which have been altered successfully
by the SNMP protocol entity as a result of receiving valid SNMP SetRequest Protocol Data Units (PDUs).
snmpInGetRequests
The total number of SNMP Get-Request Protocol Data Units (PDUs),
which have been accepted and processed by the SNMP protocol entity.
snmpInGetNexts
The total number of SNMP Get-Next Protocol Data Units (PDUs), which
have been accepted and processed by the SNMP protocol entity.
snmpInSetRequests
The total number of SNMP Set-Request Protocol Data Units (PDUs),
which have been accepted and processed by the SNMP protocol entity.
13N0340, March 2004
Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 151
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
Table 5-48 SNMP Statistics (/stats/snmp)
Statistics
Description
snmpInGetResponses
The total number of SNMP Get-Response Protocol Data Units (PDUs),
which have been accepted and processed by the SNMP protocol entity.
snmpInTraps
The total number of SNMP Trap Protocol Data Units (PDUs), which have
been accepted and processed by the SNMP protocol entity.
snmpOutTooBigs
The total number of SNMP Protocol Data Units (PDUs), which were generated by the SNMP protocol entity and for which the value of the errorstatus field is too big.
snmpOutNoSuchNames
The total number of SNMP Protocol Data Units (PDUs), which were generated by the SNMP protocol entity and for which the value of the errorstatus is noSuchName.
snmpOutBadValues
The total number of SNMP Protocol Data Units (PDUs), which were generated by the SNMP protocol entity and for which the value of the errorstatus field is badValue.
snmpOutReadOnlys
Not in use.
snmpOutGenErrs
The total number of SNMP Protocol Data Units (PDUs), which were generated by the SNMP protocol entity and for which the value of the errorstatus field is genErr.
snmpOutGetRequests
The total number of SNMP Get-Request Protocol Data Units (PDUs),
which have been generated by the SNMP protocol entity.
snmpOutGetNexts
The total number of SNMP Get-Next Protocol Data Units (PDUs), which
have been generated by the SNMP protocol entity.
snmpOutSetRequests
The total number of SNMP Set-Request Protocol Data Units (PDUs),
which have been generated by the SNMP protocol entity.
snmpOutGet
Responses
The total number of SNMP Get-Response Protocol Data Units (PDUs),
which have been generated by the SNMP protocol entity.
snmpOutTraps
The total number of SNMP Trap Protocol Data Units (PDUs), which have
been generated by the SNMP protocol entity.
152 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu
13N0340, March 2004
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
/stats/dump
Statistics Dump
Use the dump command to dump all switch statistics available from the Statistics Menu (40K or more,
depending on your configuration). This data can be used to tune or debug switch performance.
If you want to capture dump data to a file, set your communication software on your workstation to capture session data prior to issuing the dump commands.
13N0340, March 2004
Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 153
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
154 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu
13N0340, March 2004
CHAPTER 6
The Configuration Menu
This chapter discusses how to use the Command Line Interface (CLI) for making, viewing, and
saving switch configuration changes. Many of the commands, although not new, display more
or different information than in the previous version. Important differences are called out in the
text.
To make finding information easier, the menu options under the Server Load Balancing Menu
(/cfg/slb) are in Chapter 7.
/cfg
Configuration Menu
[Configuration Menu]
sys
- System-wide Parameter Menu
port
- Port Menu
pmirr
- Port Mirroring Menu
l2
- Layer 2 Menu
l3
- Layer 3 Menu
slb
- Server Load Balancing (Layer 4-7) Menu
setup
- Step by step configuration set up
dump
- Dump current configuration to script file
ptcfg
- Backup current configuration to tftp server
gtcfg
- Restore current configuration from tftp server
Table 6-1 Configuration Menu Options (/cfg)
Command Syntax and Usage
sys
Displays the System Configuration Menu. To view menu options, see page 159.
port <port alias or number (1-20)>
Displays the Port Configuration Menu. To view menu options, see page 170.
155
13N0340, March 2004
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
Table 6-1 Configuration Menu Options (/cfg)
Command Syntax and Usage
pmirr
Displays the Mirroring Configuration Menu. To view menu options, see page 173.
l2
Displays the Layer 2 Configuration Menu. To view menu options, see page 175.
l3
Displays the Layer 3 Configuration Menu. To view menu options, see page 188.
slb
Displays the Server Load Balancing Configuration Menu. To view menu options, see Chapter 7,
“The SLB Configuration Menu”.
setup
Step-by-step configuration set-up of the switch. For details, see page 233.
dump
Dumps current configuration to a script file. For details, see page 233.
ptcfg <host name or IP address of TFTP server> <filename on host>
Backs up current configuration to TFTP server. For details, see page 234.
gtcfg <host name or IP address of TFTP server> <filename on host>
Restores current configuration from TFTP server. For details, see page 234.
Viewing, Applying, and Saving Changes
As you use the configuration menus to set switch parameters, the changes you make do not
take effect immediately. All changes are considered “pending” until you explicitly apply them.
Also, any changes are lost the next time the switch boots unless the changes are explicitly
saved.
NOTE – Some operations can override the settings in the Configuration menu. Therefore, settings you view in the Configuration menu (for example, port status) might differ from run-time
information that you view in the Information menu or on the management module. The Information menu displays current run-time information of switch parameters.
156 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
13N0340, March 2004
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
While configuration changes are in the pending state, you can do the following:
View the pending changes
Apply the pending changes
Save the changes to flash memory
Viewing Pending Changes
You can view all pending configuration changes by entering diff at the menu prompt.
NOTE – The diff command is a global command. Therefore, you can enter diff at any
prompt in the CLI.
Applying Pending Changes
To make your configuration changes active, you must apply them. To apply configuration
changes, enter apply at any prompt in the CLI.
# apply
NOTE – The apply command is a global command. Therefore, you can enter apply at any
prompt in the administrative interface.
NOTE – All configuration changes take effect immediately when applied, except for starting
Spanning Tree Group. To turn STG on or off, you must apply the changes, save them (see
below), and then reset the switch (see “Resetting the Switch” on page 292).
Saving the Configuration
In addition to applying the configuration changes, you can save them to flash memory on the
GbE Switch Module.
NOTE – If you do not save the changes, they will be lost the next time the system is rebooted.
To save the new configuration, enter the following command at any CLI prompt:
# save
13N0340, March 2004
Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 157
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
When you save configuration changes, the changes are saved to the active configuration block.
The configuration being replaced by the save is first copied to the backup configuration block.
If you do not want the previous configuration block copied to the backup configuration block,
enter the following instead:
# save n
You can decide which configuration you want to run the next time you reset the switch. Your
options include:
The active configuration block
The backup configuration block
Factory default configuration
You can view all pending configuration changes that have been applied but not saved to flash
memory using the diff flash command. It is a global command that can be executed from
any menu.
For instructions on selecting the configuration to run at the next system reset, see “Selecting a
Configuration Block” on page 291.
158 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
13N0340, March 2004
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
/cfg/sys
System Configuration
[System Menu]
syslog
sshd
radius
ntp
ssnmp
access
date
time
idle
notice
bannr
smtp
hprompt
bootp
cur
-
Syslog Menu
SSH Server Menu
RADIUS Authentication Menu
NTP Server Menu
System SNMP Menu
System Access Menu
Set system date
Set system time
Set timeout for idle CLI sessions
Set login notice
Set login banner
Set SMTP host
Enable/disable display hostname (sysName) in CLI prompt
Enable/disable use of BOOTP
Display current system-wide parameters
This menu provides configuration of switch management parameters such as user and administrator privilege mode passwords, Web-based management settings, and management access
lists.
Table 6-2 System Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys)
Command Syntax and Usage
syslog
Displays the Syslog Menu. To view menu options, see page 160.
sshd
Displays the SSH Server Menu. To view menu options, see page 161.
radius
Displays the RADIUS Authentication Menu. To view menu options, see page 163.
ntp
Displays the Network Time Protocol (NTP) Server Menu. To view menu options, see page 164.
ssnmp
Displays the System SNMP Menu. To view menu options, see page 165.
access
Displays the System Access Menu. To view menu options, see page 167.
13N0340, March 2004
Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 159
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
Table 6-2 System Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys)
Command Syntax and Usage
date
Prompts the user for the system date. The date reverts to its default value when the switch is reset.
time
Configures the system time using a 24-hour clock format. The time reverts to its default value
when the switch is reset.
idle <idle timeout in minutes Telnet>
Sets the idle timeout for CLI sessions, from 1 to 60 minutes. The default is 5 minutes.
notice <max 1024 char multi-line login notice> <'-' to end>
Displays login notice immediately before the “Enter password:” prompt. This notice can contain
up to 1024 characters and new lines.
bannr <string, maximum 80 characters>
Configures a login banner of up to 80 characters. When a user or administrator logs into the switch,
the login banner is displayed. It is also displayed as part of the output from the /info/sys command.
smtp <SMTP host name or IP address>
Sets the Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) host, which is used for sending bandwidth management history information.
hprompt disable|enable
Enables or disables displaying of the host name (system administrator’s name) in the Command
Line Interface (CLI).
bootp disable|enable
Enables or disables the use of BOOTP. If you enable BOOTP, the switch will query its BOOTP
server for all of the switch IP parameters. This command is disabled by default.
cur
Displays the current system parameters.
/cfg/sys/syslog
System Host Log Configuration
[Syslog Menu]
host
host2
sever
sever2
console
log
cur
-
Set IP address of first syslog host
Set IP address of second syslog host
Set the severity of first syslog host
Set the severity of second syslog host
Enable/disable console output of syslog messages
Enable/disable syslogging of features
Display current syslog settings
160 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
13N0340, March 2004
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
Table 6-3 System Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/syslog)
Command Syntax and Usage
host <new syslog host IP address (such as, 192.4.17.223)>
Sets the IP address of the first syslog host.
host2 <new syslog host IP address (such as, 192.4.17.223)>
Sets the IP address of the second syslog host.
sever <syslog host local severity (0–7)>
This option sets the severity level of the first syslog host displayed. The default is 7, which means
log all the seven severity levels.
sever2 <syslog host local severity (0–7)>
This option sets the severity level of the second syslog host displayed. The default is 7, which
means, log all the seven severity levels.
console disable|enable
Enables or disables delivering syslog messages to the console. When necessary, disabling console ensures the switch is not affected by syslog messages. It is enabled by default.
log <feature|all> <enable|disable>
Displays a list of features for which syslog messages can be generated. You can choose to enable/
disable specific features (such as vlans, gslb, filter), or enable/disable syslog on all available
features.
cur
Displays the current syslog settings.
/cfg/sys/sshd
SSH Server Configuration Menu
[SSHD Menu]
intrval
scpadm
hkeygen
skeygen
sshport
ena
dis
on
off
cur
-
Set Interval for generating the RSA server key
Set SCP-only admin password
Generate the RSA host key
Generate the RSA server key
Set SSH server port number
Enable the SCP apply and save
Disable the SCP apply and save
Turn SSH server ON
Turn SSH server OFF
Display current SSH server configuration
For the GbE Switch Module, this menu enables Secure Shell access from any SSH client. SSH
scripts can be viewed by using the /cfg/dump command (see page 233).
13N0340, March 2004
Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 161
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
NOTE – Except for cur, the commands of this menu are only accessible through the management module interface.
Table 6-4 System Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/sshd)
Command Syntax and Usage
intrval <0 - 24>
Set the interval for auto-generation of the RSA server key.
scpadm
Set the administration password for SCP access.
hkeygen
Generate the RSA host key.
skeygen
Generate the RSA server key.
sshport <TCP port number>
Sets the SSH server port number.
ena
Enables the SCP apply and save.
dis
Disables the SCP apply and save.
on
Enables the SSH server.
off
Disables the SSH server.
cur
Displays the current SSH server configuration.
162 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
13N0340, March 2004
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
/cfg/sys/radius
RADIUS Server Configuration
[RADIUS Server Menu]
prisrv - Set primary RADIUS server address
secsrv - Set secondary RADIUS server address
secret - Set RADIUS secret
port
- Set RADIUS port
retries - Set RADIUS server retries
timeout - Set RADIUS server timeout
telnet - Enable or disable RADIUS backdoor for telnet
on
- Turn RADIUS authentication ON
off
- Turn RADIUS authentication OFF
cur
- Display current RADIUS configuration
Table 6-5 System Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/radius)
Command Syntax and Usage
prisrv <IP address>
Sets the primary RADIUS server address.
secsrv <IP address>
Sets the secondary RADIUS server address.
secret <1-32 character secret>
This is the shared secret between the switch and the RADIUS server(s).
port <RADIUS port configure, default 1645>
Enter the number of the UDP port to be configured, between 1500 - 3000. The default is 1645.
retries <RADIUS server retries (1-3)>
Sets the number of failed authentication requests before switching to a different RADIUS server.
The default is 3 requests.
timeout <RADIUS server timeout seconds (1-10)>
Sets the amount of time, in seconds, before a RADIUS server authentication attempt is considered
to have failed. The default is 3 seconds.
telnet disable|enable
Enables or disables the RADIUS backdoor for telnet. telnet also applies to SSH/SCP
connections.
To obtain the Radius backdoor password for your GbESM, contact your IBM Service and
Support line.
on
Enables the RADIUS server.
off
Disables the RADIUS server.
13N0340, March 2004
Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 163
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
Table 6-5 System Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/radius)
Command Syntax and Usage
cur
Displays the current RADIUS server parameters.
/cfg/sys/ntp
NTP Server Configuration
[NTP Server Menu]
server - Set primary NTP server address
intrval - Set NTP server resync interval
tzone
- Set NTP timezone offset from GMT
dlight - Enable or disable NTP daylight savings time
on
- Turn NTP service ON
off
- Turn NTP service OFF
cur
- Display current NTP configuration
This menu enables you to synchronize the switch clock to a Network Time Protocol (NTP)
server. By default, this option is disabled.
Table 6-6 System Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/ntp)
Command Syntax and Usage
server <NTP Server IP address>
Prompts for the IP addresses of the primary NTP server to which you want to synchronize the
switch clock.
intrval <resync interval in minutes>
Specifies the interval, that is, how often, in minutes (1-2880), to re-synchronize the switch clock
with the NTP server.
tzone <timezone offset, in HH:MM>
Prompts for the NTP time zone offset, in hours and minutes, of the switch you are synchronizing
from Greenwich Mean Time (GMT).
dlight disable|enable
Disables or enables daylight savings time in the system clock. When enabled, the switch will add
an extra hour to the system clock so that it is consistent with the local clock. By default, this option
is disabled.
on
Enables the NTP synchronization service.
164 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
13N0340, March 2004
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
Table 6-6 System Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/ntp)
Command Syntax and Usage
off
Disables the NTP synchronization service.
cur
Displays the current NTP service settings.
cfg/sys/ssnmp
System SNMP Menu
[System SNMP Menu]
name
- Set SNMP "sysName"
locn
- Set SNMP "sysLocation"
cont
- Set SNMP "sysContact"
rcomm
- Set SNMP read community string
wcomm
- Set SNMP write community string
trap1
- Set first SNMP trap host address
trap2
- Set second SNMP trap host address
t1comm
- Set community string for first trap host
t2comm
- Set community string for second trap host
timeout - Set timeout for the SNMP state machine
auth
- Enable/disable SNMP "sysAuthenTrap"
linkt
- Enable/disable SNMP link up/down trap
cur
- Display current system SNMP configuration
The Alteon OS software supports SNMP-based network management. If you are running an
SNMP network management station on your network, you can manage the switch using the
following standard SNMP MIBs:
MIB II (RFC 1213)
Ethernet MIB (RFC 1643)
Bridge MIB (RFC 1493)
13N0340, March 2004
Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 165
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
SNMP parameters that can be modified include:
System name
System location
System contact
Use of the SNMP system authentication trap function
Read community string
Write community string
Trap hosts
Trap community strings
Table 6-7 System SNMP Menu Options (/cfg/sys/ssnmp)
Command Syntax and Usage
name <new string, maximum 64 characters>
Configures the name for the system. The name can have a maximum of 64 characters.
locn <new string, maximum 64 characters>
Configures the name of the system location. The location can have a maximum of 64 characters.
cont <new string, maximum 64 characters>
Configures the name of the system contact. The contact can have a maximum of 64 characters.
rcomm <new SNMP read community string, maximum 32 characters>
Configures the SNMP read community string. The read community string controls SNMP “get”
access to the switch. It can have a maximum of 32 characters. The default read community string is
public.
wcomm <new SNMP write community string, maximum 32 characters>
Configures the SNMP write community string. The write community string controls SNMP “set”
and “get” access to the switch. It can have a maximum of 32 characters. The default write community string is private.
trap1 <new SNMP trap host IP address (such as, 192.4.17.101)>
Configures the IP address of the first SNMP trap host using dotted decimal notation. The SNMP
trap host is the device that receives SNMP trap messages from the switch.
trap2 <new SNMP trap host IP address (such as, 192.4.17.101)>
Configures the IP address of the second SNMP trap host using dotted decimal notation.
t1comm <new trap host community string, maximum 32 characters>
Configures the community string for the first trap host. The default community string for the first
trap host is public.
t2comm <new trap host community string, maximum 32 characters>
Configures the community string for the second trap host. The default community string for the
second trap host is public.
166 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
13N0340, March 2004
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
Table 6-7 System SNMP Menu Options (/cfg/sys/ssnmp)
Command Syntax and Usage
timeout
Set the timeout value for the SNMP state machine.
auth disable|enable
Enables or disables the use of the system authentication trap facility. The default setting is disabled.
linkt <port> [disable|enable]
Enables or disables the sending of SNMP link up and link down traps. The default setting is
enabled.
cur
Displays the current SNMP configuration.
cfg/sys/access
System Access Menu
[System Access Menu]
user
- User Access Control Menu (passwords)
http
- Enable/disable HTTP (Web) access
wport
- Set HTTP (Web) server port number
mnet
- Set management network
mmask
- Set management netmask
snmp
- Set SNMP access control
tnet
- Enable/disable Telnet access
tnport
- Set Telnet server port number
cur
- Display current system access configuration
Table 6-8 System Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/access)
Command Syntax and Usage
user
Displays the User Access Control Menu. To view menu options, see page 168.
http disable|enable
Enables or disables HTTP (Web) access to the Browser-Based Interface. It is enabled by default.
wport <TCP port number (1-65535)>
Sets the switch port used for serving switch Web content. The default is HTTP port 80. If Global
Server Load Balancing is to be used, set this to a different port (such as 8080).
13N0340, March 2004
Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 167
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
Table 6-8 System Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/access)
Command Syntax and Usage
mnet <IP subnet (such as 192.4.17.0)>
Sets the base source IP address that allows access to switch management through Telnet, SNMP,
RIP, or the Alteon OS Browser-Based Interface. A range of IP addresses is produced when used
with mmask (below). Specify an IP address in dotted-decimal notation.
mmask <IP subnet mask (such as 255.255.0.0)>
This IP address mask is used with mnet to set a range of source IP addresses allowed access to
switch management functions. Specify the mask in dotted-decimal notation.
snmp disable|read-only|read-write
Disables or provides read-only/write-read SNMP access.
tnet
Enables or disables telnet access.This command is enabled by default. You will see this command
only if you are connected to the switch through the management module.
tnport <TCP port number>
Sets an optional telnet server port number for cases where the server listens for telnet sessions on a
non-standard port.
cur
Displays the current system access parameters.
/cfg/sys/access/user
User Access Control Configuration
[User Access Control Menu]
usrpw
- Set user password (user)
sopw
- Set SLB operator password (slboper)
l4opw
- Set L4 operator password (l4oper)
opw
- Set operator password (oper)
sapw
- Set Slb administrator password (slbadmin)
l4apw
- Set L4 administrator password (l4admin)
admpw
- Set administrator password (admin)
cur
- Display current user statistics
168 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
13N0340, March 2004
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
NOTE – Passwords can be a maximum of 15 characters.
Table 6-9 User Access Control Menu Options (/cfg/sys/user)
Command Syntax and Usage
usrpw
Sets the user (user) password. The user has no direct responsibility for switch management. He or
she can view switch status information and statistics, but cannot make any configuration changes.
sopw
Sets the SLB operator (slboper) password. The SLB operator manages Web servers and other
Internet services and their loads. He or she can view all switch information and statistics and can
enable/disable servers using the Server Load Balancing configuration menus.
Access includes “user” functions.
l4opw
Sets the Layer 4 operator (l4oper)password. The Layer 4 operator manages traffic on the lines
leading to the shared Internet services. He or she can view all switch information and statistics.
Access includes “slboper” functions.
opw
Sets the operator (oper)password. The operator password can have a maximum of 15 characters.
The operator manages all functions of the switch. He or she can view all switch information and
statistics and can reset ports or the entire switch.
Access includes “l4oper” functions.
sapw
Sets the SLB administrator (slbadmin) password. Administrator who configures and manages
Web servers and other Internet services and their loads. He or she can view all switch information
and statistics, but can configure changes only on the Server Load Balancing menus. Note that the
Filter Menu options are not accessible to the SLB administrator.
Access includes “l4oper” functions.
l4apw
Sets the Layer 4 administrator (l4admin) password. The Layer 4 administrator configures and
manages traffic on the lines leading to the shared Internet services. He or she can view all switch
information and statistics and can configure parameters on the Server Load Balancing menus, with
the exception of not being able to configure filters.
Access includes “slbadmin” functions.
13N0340, March 2004
Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 169
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
Table 6-9 User Access Control Menu Options (/cfg/sys/user)
Command Syntax and Usage
admpw
Sets the administrator (admin) password. The super user administrator has complete access to all
menus, information, and configuration commands on the GbE Switch Module, including the ability to change both the user and administrator passwords.
Access includes “oper” and “l4admin” functions.
cur
Displays the current user status.
/cfg/port <port alias or number>
Port Configuration
[Port INT1 Menu]
gig
- Gig Phy Menu
pvid
- Set default port VLAN id
name
- Set port name
rmon
- Enable/Disable RMON for port
tag
- Enable/disable VLAN tagging for port
iponly - Enable/disable allowing only IP related frames
fastfwd - Enable/disable Port Fast Forwarding mode
ena
- Enable port
dis
- Disable port
cur
- Display current port configuration
The Port Menu enables you to configure settings for individual switch ports (INT1-INT14,
EXT-EXT4). This command is enabled by default.
Table 6-10 Port Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/port)
Command Syntax and Usage
gig
If a port is configured to support Gigabit Ethernet, this option displays the Gigabit Ethernet Physical Link Menu. To view menu options, see page 172.
pvid <VLAN number, 1-4095>
Sets the default VLAN number which will be used to forward frames which are not VLAN tagged.
The default number is 1 for non-management ports.
170 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
13N0340, March 2004
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
Table 6-10 Port Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/port)
Command Syntax and Usage
name <64 character string>|none
Sets a name for the port. The assigned port name appears next to the port number on some information and statistics screens. The default is set to None.
rmon disable|enable
Disables or enables RMON for this port. It is disabled by default.
tag disable|enable
Disables or enables VLAN tagging for this port. It is disabled by default.
iponly disable|enable
Disables or enables allowing only IP-related frames. It is disabled by default.
fastfwd disable|enable
Disables or enables Port Fast Forwarding, which permits a port that participates in Spanning
Tree to bypass the Listening and Learning states and enter directly into the Forwarding state.
While in the Forwarding state, the port listens to the BPDUs to learn if there is a loop and, if
dictated by normal STG behavior (following priorities, etc), the port transitions into the Blocking
state. This feature permits the GbE Switch Module to interoperate well within Rapid Spanning
Tree networks.
ena
Enables the port.
dis
Disables the port. (To temporarily disable a port without changing its configuration attributes, refer
to “Temporarily Disabling a Port” on page 173.)
cur
Displays current port parameters.
13N0340, March 2004
Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 171
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
/cfg/port <port alias or number> gig
Port Link Configuration
[Gigabit Link
speed
mode
fctl
auto
cur
Menu]
- Set link speed
- Set full or half duplex mode
- Set flow control
- Set auto negotiation
- Display current gig link configuration
Use these menu options to set port parameters for the port link.
NOTE – Since the speed and mode parameters cannot be set for Gigabit Ethernet ports, these
options do not appear on the Gigabit Link Menu.
Link menu options are described in Table 6-11 and appear on the gig port configuration menu
for the GbE Switch Module. Using this configuration menu, you can set port parameters such as
speed, flow control, and negotiation mode for the port link.
Table 6-11 Port Link Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/port <alias or number> gig)
Command Syntax and Usage
speed 10|100|any
Sets the link speed. Not all options are valid on all ports. The choices include:
“Any,” for automatic detection (default)
10 Mbps
100 Mbps
mode full|half|any
Sets the operating mode. The choices include:
“Any,” for auto negotiation (default)
Full-duplex
Half-duplex
fctl rx|tx|both|none
Sets the flow control. The choices include:
Receive flow control
Transmit flow control
Both receive and transmit flow control (default)
No flow control
auto on|off
Enables or disables auto negotiation for the port.
172 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
13N0340, March 2004
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
Table 6-11 Port Link Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/port <alias or number> gig)
Command Syntax and Usage
cur
Displays current port parameters.
Temporarily Disabling a Port
To temporarily disable a port without changing its stored configuration attributes, enter the following command at any prompt:
Main# /oper/port <port alias or number>/dis
Because this configuration sets a temporary state for the port, you do not need to use apply or
save. The port state will revert to its original configuration when the GbE Switch Module is
reset. See the “Operations Menu” on page 281 for other operations-level commands.
/cfg/pmirr
Port Mirroring Menu
[Port Mirroring
mirror monport cur
-
Menu]
Enable/Disable Mirroring
Monitoring Port based PM Menu
Display All Mirrored and Monitoring Ports
Port mirroring is disabled by default. For more information about port mirroring on the
GbE Switch Module, see “Appendix A: Troubleshooting” in the Alteon OS Application Guide.
NOTE – Traffic on VLAN 4095 is not mirrored to the external ports.
13N0340, March 2004
Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 173
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
The Port Mirroring Menu is used to configure, enable, and disable the monitored port. When
enabled, network packets being sent and/or received on a target port are duplicated and sent to
a monitor port. By attaching a network analyzer to the monitor port, you can collect detailed
information about your network performance and usage.
Table 6-12 Port Mirroring menu options (/cfg/pmirr)
Command Syntax and Usage
mirror disable|enable
Enables or disables port mirroring
monport <port alias or number (1-20)>
Displays port-mirroring menu. To view menu options, see page 174.
cur
Displays current settings of the mirrored and monitoring ports.
/cfg/pmirr/monport
Port-Mirroring Menu
[Port EXT1 Menu]
add
- Add "Mirrored" port
rem
- Rem "Mirrored" port
cur
- Display current Port-based Port Mirroring configuration
Table 6-13 Port-Based Port-Mirroring Menu Options (/cfg//pmirr/monport)
Command Syntax and Usage
add <mirrored port (port to mirror from)> <direction (in, out, or both)>
Adds the port to be mirrored. This command also allows you to enter the direction of the traffic. It
is necessary to specify the direction because:
If the source port of the frame matches the mirrored port and the mirrored direction is ingress or
both (ingress and egress), the frame is sent to the mirrored port.
If the destination port of the frame matches the mirrored port and the mirrored direction is egress or
both, the frame is sent to the monitoring port.
rem <mirrored port (port to mirror from)>
Removes the mirrored port.
cur
Displays the current settings of the monitoring port.
174 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
13N0340, March 2004
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
/cfg/l2
Layer 2 Menu
[Layer 2 Menu]
stg
trunk
thash
lacp
vlan
cur
-
Spanning Tree Menu
Trunk Group Menu
IP Trunk Hash Menu
Link Aggregation Control Protocol Menu
VLAN Menu
Display current layer 2 parameters
Table 6-14 Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l2)
Command Syntax and Usage
stg <group number [1-16]>
Displays the Spanning Tree Configuration Menu. To view menu options, see page 176.
trunk <trunk group number (1-2)>
Displays the Trunk Group Configuration Menu. To view menu options, see page 180.
thash
Displays the IP Trunk Hash Menu. To view menu options, see page 181.
lacp
Displays the Link Aggregation Control Protocol Menu. To view menu options, see page 184.
vlan <VLAN number (1-4095)>
Displays the VLAN Configuration Menu. To view menu options, see page 186.
cur
Displays current Layer 2 parameters.
13N0340, March 2004
Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 175
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
/cfg/l2/stg
Spanning Tree Configuration
[Spanning Tree Group 1 Menu]
brg
- Bridge parameter menu
port
- Port parameter menu
add
- Add VLAN(s) to Spanning Tree Group
remove - Remove VLAN(s) from Spanning Tree Group
clear
- Remove all VLANs from Spanning Tree Group
on
- Globally turn Spanning Tree ON
off
- Globally turn Spanning Tree OFF
default - Default Spanning Tree and Member parameters
cur
- Display current bridge parameters
Alteon OS supports the IEEE 802.1d Spanning Tree Protocol (STP). STG is used to prevent
loops in the network topology. There are 16 spanning tree groups that can be configured on the
switch (STG 16 is reserved for management). This command is turned on by default.
NOTE – When VRRP is used for active/active redundancy, STG must be enabled.
Table 6-15 Spanning Tree Configuration Menu (/cfg/l2/stg)
Command Syntax and Usage
brg
Displays the Bridge Spanning Tree Menu. To view menu options, see page 177.
port <port alias or number (1-20)>
Displays the Spanning Tree Port Menu. To view menu options, see page 179.
add <VLAN number (1-4095)>
Associates a VLAN with a spanning tree and requires an external VLAN ID as a parameter.
remove <VLAN number (1-4095)>
Breaks the association between a VLAN and a spanning tree and requires an external VLAN ID as
a parameter.
clear
Removes all VLANs from a spanning tree.
on
Globally enables Spanning Tree Protocol.
off
Globally disables Spanning Tree Protocol.
176 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
13N0340, March 2004
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
Table 6-15 Spanning Tree Configuration Menu (/cfg/l2/stg)
Command Syntax and Usage
default
Restores a spanning tree instance to its default configuration.
cur
Displays current Spanning Tree Protocol parameters.
/cfg/l2/stg/brg
Bridge Spanning Tree Configuration
[Bridge Spanning Tree Menu]
prior
- Set bridge Priority [0-65535]
hello
- Set bridge Hello Time [1-10 secs]
mxage
- Set bridge Max Age (6-40 secs)
fwd
- Set bridge Forward Delay (4-30 secs)
aging
- Set bridge Aging Time (1-65535 secs, 0 to disable)
cur
- Display current bridge parameters
Spanning Tree bridge parameters affect the global STG operation of the switch. STG bridge
parameters include:
Bridge priority
Bridge hello time
Bridge maximum age
Forwarding delay
Bridge aging time
13N0340, March 2004
Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 177
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
Table 6-16 Bridge Spanning Tree Menu Options (/cfg/l2/stg/brg)
Command Syntax and Usage
prior <new bridge priority (0-65535)>
Configures the bridge priority. The bridge priority parameter controls which bridge on the network
is the STG root bridge. To make this switch the root bridge, configure the bridge priority lower
than all other switches and bridges on your network. The lower the value, the higher the bridge priority. The range is 0 to 65535, and the default is 32768.
hello <new bridge hello time (1-10 secs)>
Configures the bridge hello time.The hello time specifies how often the root bridge transmits a
configuration bridge protocol data unit (BPDU). Any bridge that is not the root bridge uses the root
bridge hello value. The range is 1 to 10 seconds, and the default is 2 seconds.
mxage <new bridge max age (6-40 secs)>
Configures the bridge maximum age. The maximum age parameter specifies the maximum time
the bridge waits without receiving a configuration bridge protocol data unit before it re configures
the STG network. The range is 6 to 40 seconds, and the default is 20 seconds.
fwd <new bridge Forward Delay (4-30 secs)>
Configures the bridge forward delay parameter. The forward delay parameter specifies the amount
of time that a bridge port has to wait before it changes from the listening state to the learning state
and from the learning state to the forwarding state. The range is 4 to 30 seconds, and the default is
15 seconds.
aging <new bridge Aging Time (1-65535 secs, 0 to disable)>
Configures the forwarding database aging time. The aging time specifies the amount of time the
bridge waits without receiving a packet from a station before removing the station from the forwarding database. The range is 1 to 65535 seconds, and the default is 300 seconds. To disable
aging, set this parameter to 0.
current
Displays the current bridge STG parameters.
When configuring STG bridge parameters, the following formulas must be used:
2*(fwd-1) > mxage
2*(hello+1) < mxage
178 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
13N0340, March 2004
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
/cfg/l2/stg <STP Group Index>/port <port
alias or number>
Spanning Tree Port Configuration
[Spanning Tree Port EXT1 Menu]
prior
- Set port Priority (0-255)
cost
- Set port Path Cost (1-65535, 0 for default)
on
- Turn port's Spanning Tree ON
off
- Turn port's Spanning Tree OFF
cur
- Display current port Spanning Tree parameters
Spanning Tree port parameters are used to modify STG operation on an individual port basis.
STG port parameters include:
Port priority
Port path cost
The port option of STG is turned on by default.
Table 6-17 Spanning Tree Port Menu (/cfg/l2/stg/port)
Command Syntax and Usage
prior <new port Priority (0-255)>
Configures the port priority. The port priority helps determine which bridge port becomes the designated port. In a network topology that has multiple bridge ports connected to a single segment,
the port with the lowest port priority becomes the designated port for the segment. The range is 0
to 255, and the default is 128.
cost <new port Path Cost (1-65535, 0 for default)>
Configures the port path cost. The port path cost is used to help determine the designated port for a
segment. Generally speaking, the faster the port, the lower the path cost. The range is 1 to 65535.
The default is 10 for 100Mbps ports, and 1 for Gigabit ports. A value of 0 indicates that the default
cost will be computed for an auto negotiated link speed.
on
Enables STG on the port.
off
Disables STG on the port.
cur
Displays the current STG port parameters.
13N0340, March 2004
Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 179
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
/cfg/l2/trunk <trunk group number>
Trunk Configuration
[Trunk group 1 Menu]
add
- Add port to trunk group
rem
- Remove port from trunk group
failovr - Enable/disable failover support
ena
- Enable trunk group
dis
- Disable trunk group
del
- Delete trunk group
cur
- Display current Trunk Group configuration
Trunk groups can provide super-bandwidth connections between GbE Switch Modules or other
trunk capable devices. A trunk is a group of ports that act together, combining their bandwidth
to create a single, larger port. Up to 2 trunk groups can be configured on the GbE Switch Module, with the following restrictions:
Any physical switch port can belong to no more than one trunk group.
Up to four ports/trunks can belong to the same trunk group.
Best performance is achieved when all ports in a trunk are configured for the same speed.
Trunking from non-Alteon devices must comply with Cisco® EtherChannel® technology.
By default, the trunk group is empty and disabled.
Table 6-18 Trunk Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l2/trunk)
Command Syntax and Usage
add <port alias or number (EXT1-EXT4)>
Adds a physical port to the current trunk group.
rem <port alias or number (EXT1-EXT4)>
Removes a physical port from the current trunk group.
failovr
Sets trunk group failover to enabled or disabled.
ena
Enables the current trunk group.
dis
Turns the current trunk group off.
del
Removes the current trunk group configuration.
cur
Displays current trunk group parameters.
180 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
13N0340, March 2004
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
/cfg/l2/thash
IP Trunk Hash menu
[IP Trunk Hash Menu]
l2
- L2 IP Trunk Hash Settings Menu
l3
- L3 IP Trunk Hash Settings Menu
cur
- Display current IP trunk hash configuration
Use the following commands to configure IP trunk hash settings for the GbESM.
Table 6-19 IP Trunk Hash commands (/cfg/l2/thash)
Command Syntax and Usage
l2
Displays the layer 2 Trunk Hash Settings menu. To view menu options, see page 181.
l3
Displays the layer 3 Trunk Hash Settings menu. To view menu options, see page 182.
cur
Display current trunk hash configuration.
/cfg/l2/thash/l2
Layer 2 IP Trunk Hash menu
[l2 IP Trunk Hash Settings Menu]
smac
- Enable/disable smac hash
dmac
- Enable/disable dmac hash
sip
- Enable/disable sip hash
dip
- Enable/disable dip hash
cur
- Display current trunk hash setting
Trunk hash parameters are set globally for the GbE Switch Module. You can enable one or two
parameters, to configure any of the following valid combinations:
SMAC (source MAC only)
DMAC (destination MAC only)
SIP (source IP only)
DIP (destination IP only)
SIP + DIP (source IP and destination IP)
13N0340, March 2004
Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 181
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
SMAC + DMAC (source MAC and destination MAC)
SMAC + SIP (source MAC and source IP)
SMAC + DIP (source MAC and destination IP)
Use the following commands to configure layer 2 IP trunk hash parameters for the GbESM.
Table 6-20 Layer 2 IP Trunk Hash commands (/cfg/l2/thash/l2)
Command Syntax and Usage
smac enable|disable
Enable or disable trunk hashing on the source MAC.
dmac enable|disable
Enable or disable trunk hashing on the destination MAC.
sip enable|disable
Enable or disable trunk hashing on the source IP.
dip enable|disable
Enable or disable trunk hashing on the destination IP.
cur
Display current layer 2 trunk hash setting.
/cfg/l2/thash/l3
Layer 3 IP Trunk Hash menu
[l2 IP Trunk Hash Settings Menu]
smac
- Enable/disable smac hash
dmac
- Enable/disable dmac hash
sip
- Enable/disable sip hash
dip
- Enable/disable dip hash
cur
- Display current trunk hash setting
182 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
13N0340, March 2004
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
Use the following commands to configure layer 3 IP trunk hash settings for the GbESM.
Table 6-21 Layer 3 IP Trunk Hash commands (/cfg/l2/thash/l3)
Command Syntax and Usage
smac enable|disable
Enable or disable trunk hashing on the source MAC.
dmac enable|disable
Enable or disable trunk hashing on the destination MAC.
sip enable|disable
Enable or disable trunk hashing on the source IP.
dip enable|disable
Enable or disable trunk hashing on the destination IP.
cur
Display current layer 3 trunk hash setting.
13N0340, March 2004
Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 183
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
/cfg/l2/lacp
Link Aggregation Control Protocol menu
[LACP Menu]
sysprio
timeout
port
cur
- Set LACP system priority
- Set LACP system timeout scale for timing out partner
info
- LACP port Menu
- Display current LACP configuration
Use the following commands to configure Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) for the
GbESM.
Table 6-22 Link Aggregation Control Protocol (/cfg/l2/lacp)
Command Syntax and Usage
sysprio <1-65535>
Defines the priority value for the GbESM. Lower numbers provide higher priority. The default
value is 32768.
timeout short|long
Defines the timeout period before invalidating LACP data from a remote partner. Choose short
(3 seconds) or long (90 seconds). The default value is long.
Note: Nortel Networks recommends that you use a timeout value of long, to reduce LACPDU
processing. If your GbESM’s CPU utilization rate remains at 100% for periods of 90 seconds or
more, consider using static trunks instead of LACP.
port <port alias or number (1-20)>
Displays the LACP Port menu. To view menu options, see page 184.
cur
Display current LACP configuration.
/cfg/l2/lacp/port <port alias or number>
LACP Port menu
[LACP Port EXT1
mode
prio
adminkey cur
-
Menu]
Set LACP mode
Set LACP port priority
Set LACP port admin key
Display current LACP port configuration
184 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
13N0340, March 2004
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
Use the following commands to configure Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) for the
selected port.
Table 6-23 Link Aggregation Control Protocol (/cfg/l2/lacp/port)
Command Syntax and Usage
mode off|active|passive
Set the LACP mode for this port, as follows:
off
Turn LACP off for this port. You can use this port to manually configure a static trunk. The
default value is off.
active
Turn LACP on and set this port to active. Active ports initiate LACPDUs.
passive
Turn LACP on and set this port to passive. Passive ports do not initiate LACPDUs, but respond
to LACPDUs from active ports.
prio <1-65535>
Sets the priority value for the selected port. Lower numbers provide higher priority. Default is 128.
adminkey <1-255>
Set the admin key for this port. Only ports with the same admin key and oper key (operational
state) can form a LACP trunk group.
cur
Displays the current LACP configuration for this port.
13N0340, March 2004
Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 185
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
/cfg/l2/vlan <VLAN number>
VLAN Configuration
[VLAN 1 Menu]
name
stg
cont
add
rem
def
jumbo
ena
dis
del
cur
-
Set VLAN name
Assign VLAN to a Spanning Tree Group
Set BW contract
Add port to VLAN
Remove port from VLAN
Define VLAN as list of ports
Enable/disable Jumbo Frame support
Enable VLAN
Disable VLAN
Delete VLAN
Display current VLAN configuration
The commands in this menu configure VLAN attributes, change the status of the VLAN,
delete the VLAN, and change the port membership of the VLAN. For more information on
configuring VLANs, see “Setup Part 3: VLANs” on page 31.
By default, the VLAN menu option is disabled except VLAN 1, which is enabled all the time.
Ports INT1-INT14 and ports EXT1-EXT4 are in VLAN 1 by default.
Table 6-24 VLAN Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l2/vlan)
Command Syntax and Usage
name
Assigns a name to the VLAN or changes the existing name. The default VLAN name is the first
one.
stg <Spanning Tree Group index [1-16]>
Assigns a VLAN to a Spanning Tree Group.
add <port alias or number (1-20)>
Adds port(s) or trunk group(s) to the VLAN membership.
rem <port alias or number (1-20)>
Removes port(s) or trunk group(s) from this VLAN.
def <list of port numbers>
Defines which ports are members of this VLAN. Every port must be a member of at least one
VLAN. By default, port INT1-INT14 and EXT1-EXT4 are in VLAN 1.
jumbo
Define support for jumbo frames (enable/disable).
186 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
13N0340, March 2004
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
Table 6-24 VLAN Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l2/vlan)
Command Syntax and Usage
ena
Enables this VLAN.
dis
Disables this VLAN without removing it from the configuration.
del
Deletes this VLAN.
cur
Displays the current VLAN configuration.
NOTE – All ports must belong to at least one VLAN. Any port which is removed from a
VLAN and which is not a member of any other VLAN is automatically added to default
VLAN #1. You cannot remove a port from VLAN #1 if the port has no membership in any
other VLAN.
Also, you cannot add a port to more than one VLAN unless the port has VLAN tagging turned
on (see the tag command on page 170).
13N0340, March 2004
Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 187
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
/cfg/l3
Layer 3 Menu
[Layer 3 Menu]
if
gw
route
frwd
nwf
rmap
rip1
ospf
bgp
port
dns
bootp
vrrp
rtrid
metrc
cur
-
Interface Menu
Default Gateway Menu
Static Route Menu
Forwarding Menu
Network Filters Menu
Route Map Menu
Routing Information Protocol Menu
Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) Menu
Border Gateway Protocol Menu
IP Port Menu
Domain Name System Menu
Bootstrap Protocol Relay Menu
Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol Menu
Set router ID
Set default gateway metric
Display current IP configuration
Table 6-25 Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3)
Command Syntax and Usage
if <interface number (1-128)>
Displays the IP Interface Menu. To view menu options, see page 189.
gw <default gateway number (1-132)>
Displays the IP Default Gateway Menu. To view menu options, see page 191.
route
Displays the IP Static Route Menu. To view menu options, see page 192.
frwd
Displays the IP Forwarding Menu. To view menu options, see page 193.
nwf <Network filter number [1-256]>
Displays the Network Filter Configuration Menu. To view menu options see page 195.
rmap <route map number [1-32]>
Displays the Route Map Menu. To view menu options see page 196.
rip1
Displays the Routing Interface Protocol version 1 Menu. To view menu options, see page 200.
ospf
Displays the OSPF Menu. To view menu options, see page 202.
188 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
13N0340, March 2004
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
Table 6-25 Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3)
Command Syntax and Usage
bgp
Displays the Border Gateway Protocol Menu. To view menu options, see page 211.
port <port alias or number (1-20)>
Displays the IP Port Menu. To view menu options, see page 217.
dns
Displays the IP Domain Name System Menu. To view menu options, see page 218.
bootp
Displays the Bootstrap Protocol Menu. To view menu options, see page 219.
vrrp
Displays the Virtual Router Redundancy Configuration Menu. To view menu options, see
page 220.
rtrid <<IP address (such as, 192.4.17.101)>
Sets the router ID.
metrc strict|roundrobin
Sets the default gateway metric for strict or roundrobin. The default gateway metric is
strict. For more information on gateway metrics, see page 232.
cur
Displays the current IP configuration.
/cfg/l3/if <interface number>
IP Interface Configuration
[IP Interface
addr
mask
vlan
relay
frwd
ena
dis
del
cur
1
-
Menu]
Set IP address
Set subnet mask
Set VLAN number
Enable or disable BOOTP relay
Enable/disable IP forwarding
Enable interface
Disable interface
Delete interface
Display current interface configuration
The GbE Switch Module can be configured with up to 128 IP interfaces. Each IP interface represents the GbE Switch Module on an IP subnet on your network. The Interface option is disabled
by default.
13N0340, March 2004
Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 189
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
NOTE – To maintain connection between the management module and the GbE Switch Module, use the management module interface to change the IP address of the switch.
Table 6-26 IP Interface Menu Options (/cfg/l3/if)
Command Syntax and Usage
addr <IP address (such as 192.4.17.101)>
Configures the IP address of the switch interface using dotted decimal notation.
mask <IP subnet mask (such as 255.255.255.0)>
Configures the IP subnet address mask for the interface using dotted decimal notation.
vlan <VLAN number (1-4095)>
Configures the VLAN number for this interface. Each interface can belong to one VLAN, though
any VLAN can have multiple IP interfaces in it.
relay disable|enable
Enables or disables the BOOTP relay on this interface. It is enabled by default.
fwrd
Enables or disables IP forwarding.
ena
Enables this IP interface.
dis
Disables this IP interface.
del
Removes this IP interface.
cur
Displays the current interface settings.
190 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
13N0340, March 2004
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
/cfg/l3/gw <gateway number>
Default Gateway Configuration
[Default gateway 1 Menu]
addr
- Set IP address
intr
- Set interval between ping attempts
retry
- Set number of failed attempts to declare gateway DOWN
arp
- Enable/disable ARP only health checks
vlan
- Set VLAN number
ena
- Enable default gateway
dis
- Disable default gateway
del
- Delete default gateway
cur
- Display current default gateway configuration
NOTE – The switch can be configured with up to 132 gateways. Gateways one to four are
reserved for default gateway load balancing. Gateway 132 is reserved for the management
VLAN.
This option is disabled by default.
Table 6-27 Default Gateway Options (/cfg/l3/gw)
Command Syntax and Usage
addr <default gateway address (such as, 192.4.17.44)>
Configures the IP address of the default IP gateway using dotted decimal notation.
intr <0-60 seconds>
The switch pings the default gateway to verify that it’s up. The intr option sets the time between
health checks. The range is from 1 to 120 seconds. The default is 2 seconds.
retry <number of attempts (1-120)>
Sets the number of failed health check attempts required before declaring this default gateway
inoperative. The range is from 1 to 120 attempts. The default is 8 attempts.
arp disable|enable
Enables or disables Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) health checks. This command is disabled
by default.
vlan <VLAN number (1-4095)>
Sets the VLAN to be assigned to this default IP gateway.
ena
Enables the gateway for use.
13N0340, March 2004
Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 191
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
Table 6-27 Default Gateway Options (/cfg/l3/gw)
Command Syntax and Usage
dis
Disables the gateway.
del
Deletes the gateway from the configuration.
cur
Displays the current gateway settings.
Default Gateway Metrics
For information about configuring which gateway is selected when multiple default gateways
are enabled, see page 192.
/cfg/l3/route
IP Static Route Configuration
[IP Static Route Menu]
add
- Add static route
rem
- Remove static route
cur
- Display current static routes
Up to 128 static routes can be configured.
Table 6-28 IP Static Route Configuration Menu Options (cfg/l3/route)
Command Syntax and Usage
add <destination> <mask> <gateway> <interface number>
Adds a static route. You will be prompted to enter a destination IP address, destination subnet
mask, and gateway address. Enter all addresses using dotted decimal notation.
rem <destination> <mask>
Removes a static route. The destination address of the route to remove must be specified using dotted decimal notation.
cur
Displays the current IP static routes.
192 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
13N0340, March 2004
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
/cfg/l3/frwd
IP Forwarding Configuration
[IP Forwarding Menu]
local
- Local network definition for route caching menu
dirbr
- Enable or disable forwarding directed broadcasts
on
- Globally turn IP Forwarding ON
off
- Globally turn IP Forwarding OFF
cur
- Display current IP Forwarding configuration
Table 6-29 IP Forwarding Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3/frwd)
Command Syntax and Usage
local
Displays the menu used to define local network for route caching. Up to five local networks (lnets)
can be configured. To view menu options, see page 193.
dirbr disable|enable
Enables or disables forwarding directed broadcasts. This command is disabled by default.
on
Enables IP forwarding (routing) on the GbE Switch Module.
off
Disables IP forwarding (routing) on the GbE Switch Module. Forwarding is turned off by default.
cur
Displays the current IP forwarding settings.
/cfg/l3/frwd/local
Local Network Route Caching Definition
[IP Local Networks Menu]
add
- Add local network definition
rem
- Remove local network definition
cur
- Display current local network definitions
13N0340, March 2004
Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 193
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
Table 2 IP Local Networks Menu Options (/cfg/l3/frwd/local)
Command Syntax and Usage
add <Local Network Address> <Local Network Mask>
Adds a definition for a local network. For details, see “Defining IP Address Ranges for the Local
Route Cache” below.
rem <Local Network Address> <Local Network Mask>
Removes a definition for a local network.
cur
Displays the current local network definitions.
This menu is used for adding local networks by setting the local network address and netmask
for the route cache, and to remove local networks.
Defining IP Address Ranges for the Local Route Cache
The Local Route Cache lets you use switch resources more efficiently, by reducing the size of
the ARP table on the GbE Switch Module. The /cfg/l3/frwd/local/add parameters
define a range of addresses that will be cached on the GbE Switch Module. The local network
address is used to define the base IP address in the range which will be cached, and the local
network mask is the mask which is applied to produce the range. To determine if a route should
be added to the memory cache, the destination address is masked (bitwise AND) with the local
network mask and checked against the local network address.
By default, the local network address and mask are both set to 0.0.0.0. This produces a range
that includes all Internet addresses for route caching: 0.0.0.0 through 255.255.255.255.
Addresses to be cached are subnets that are directly connected and for which there is an interface configured on the GbE Switch Module. To limit the route cache to your local hosts, you
could configure the parameters as shown in the examples in the following table.
Table 6-30 Local Routing Cache Address Ranges
Local Host Address Range
Address
Mask
0.0.0.0 - 127.255.255.255
0.0.0.0
128.0.0.0
128.0.0.0 - 255.255.255.255
128.0.0.0
128.0.0.0
205.32.0.0 - 205.32.255.255
205.32.0.0
255.255.0.0
194 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
13N0340, March 2004
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
NOTE – All addresses that fall outside the defined range are forwarded to the default gateway.
The default gateways must be within range.
/cfg/l3/nwf
Network Filter Configuration
[IP Network Filter 1 Menu]
addr
- IP Address
mask
- IP Subnet mask
enable - Enable Network Filter
disable - Disable Network Filter
delete - Delete Network Filter
current - Display current Network Filter configuration
Table 6-31 IP Network Filter Menu Options (/cfg/l3/nwf)
Command Syntax and Usage
addr <IP address, such as 192.4.17.44>
Sets the starting IP address for this filter. The default address is 0.0.0.0.
mask <subnet mask, such as 255.255.255.0>
Sets the IP subnet mask that is used with /cfg/l3/nwf/addr to define the range of IP
addresses that will be accepted by the peer when the filter is enabled. The default value is 0.0.0.0.
For Border Gateway Protocol (BGP), assign the network filter to a route map, then assign the route
map to the peer.
enable
Enables the Network Filter configuration.
disable
Disables the Network Filter configuration.
delete
Deletes the Network Filter configuration.
current
Displays the current the Network Filter configuration.
13N0340, March 2004
Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 195
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
/cfg/l3/rmap <route map number>
Routing Map Configuration
NOTE – The map number (1-32) represents the routing map you wish to configure.
[IP Route Map
alist
aspath
ap
lp
metric
type
prec
weight
enable
disable
delete
current
1
-
Menu]
Access List number
AS Filter Menu
Set as-path prepend of the matched route
Set local-preference of the matched route
Set metric of the matched route
Set OSPF metric-type of the matched route
Set the precedence of this route map
Set weight of the matched route
Enable route map
Disable route map
Delete route map
Display current route map configuration
Routing maps control and modify routing information.
Table 6-32 Routing Map Menu Options (/cfg/l3/rmap)
Command Syntax and Usage
alist <number 1-8>
Displays the Access List menu. For more information, see page 198.
aspath <number 1-8>
Displays the Autonomous System (AS) Filter menu. For more information, see page 199.
ap <AS number> [<AS number>] [<AS number>]|none
Sets the AS path preference of the matched route. One to three path preferences can be configured.
lp <(0-4294967294)>|none
Sets the local preference of the matched route, which affects both inbound and outbound directions. The path with the higher preference is preferred.
metric <(0-4294967294)>|none
Sets the metric of the matched route.
196 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
13N0340, March 2004
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
Table 6-32 Routing Map Menu Options (/cfg/l3/rmap) (Continued)
Command Syntax and Usage
type <value (1|2)>|none
Assigns the type of OSPF metric. The default is type 1.
Type 1—External routes are calculated using both internal and external metrics.
Type 2—External routes are calculated using only the external metrics. Type 2 routes have
more cost than Type 2.
none—Removes the OSPF metric.
prec <value (1-256)>
Sets the precedence of the route map. The smaller the value, the higher the precedence. Default
value is 10.
weight <value (0-65534)>|none
Sets the weight of the route map.
enable
Enables the route map.
disable
Disables the route map.
delete
Deletes the route map.
current
Displays the current route configuration.
13N0340, March 2004
Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 197
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
/cfg/l3/rmap <route map number/alist
<access list number>
IP Access List Configuration Menu
NOTE – The route map number (1-32) and the access list number (1-8) represent the IP access
list you wish to configure.
[IP Access List
nwf
metric action enable disable delete current -
1 Menu]
Network Filter number
Metric
Set Network Filter action
Enable Access List
Disable Access List
Delete Access List
Display current Access List configuration
Table 6-33 IP Access List Menu Options (/cfg/l3/rmap/alist)
Command Syntax and Usage
nwf <network filter number (1-256)>
Sets the network filter number. See “/cfg/l3/nwf” on page 195 for details.
metric <(1-4294967294)>|none
Sets the metric value in the AS-External (ASE) LSA.
action permit|deny
Permits or denies action for the access list.
enable
Enables the access list.
disable
Disables the access list.
delete
Deletes the access list.
current
Displays the current Access List configuration.
198 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
13N0340, March 2004
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
/cfg/l3/rmap <route map number> aspath
<autonomous system path>
Autonomous System Filter Path
NOTE – The rmap number (1-32) and the path number (1-8) represent the AS path you wish to
configure.
[AS Filter 1 Menu]
as
- AS number
action - Set AS Filter action
enable - Enable AS Filter
disable - Disable AS Filter
delete - Delete AS Filter
current - Display current AS Filter configuration
Table 6-34 AS Filter Menu Options (/cfg/l3/rmap/aspath)
Command Syntax and Usage
as <<AS number (1-65535)>
Sets the Autonomous System filter’s path number.
action <permit|deny (p|d)>
Permits or denies Autonomous System filter action.
enable
Enables the Autonomous System filter.
disable
Disables the Autonomous System filter.
delete
Deletes the Autonomous System filter.
current
Displays the current Autonomous System filter configuration.
13N0340, March 2004
Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 199
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
/cfg/l3/rip1
Routing Information Protocol Configuration
[Routing Information Protocol Menu]
updat
- Set update period in seconds
spply
- Enable/disable supplying route updates
lsten
- Enable/disable listening to route updates
deflt
- Enable/disable listening to default routes
statc
- Enable/disable supplying static routes
poisn
- Enable/disable poisoned reverse
vip
- Enable/disable vip advertisement
on
- Globally turn RIP ON
off
- Globally turn RIP OFF
cur
- Display current RIP configuration
The RIP1 Menu is used for configuring Routing Information Protocol, version 1 (RIP1)
parameters. This option is turned off by default.
NOTE – Do not configure RIP1 parameters if your routing equipment uses RIP version 2.
Table 6-35 Routing Information Protocol Menu (/cfg/l3/rip1)
Command Syntax and Usage
updat <update period (1-120 seconds)>
Sets the RIP update period in seconds. It is set at 30 seconds by default.
spply disable|enable
This command is disabled by default. When enabled, the switch supplies routes to other routers.
lsten disable|enable
This command is disabled by default. When enabled, the switch learns routes from other routers.
deflt disable|enable
When enabled, the switch accepts RIP default routes from other routers, but gives them lower priority than configured default gateways. When disabled, the switch rejects RIP default routes. This
command is disabled by default.
statc disable|enable
This command is disabled by default. When enabled, the switch supplies static routes.
poisn disable|enable
This command is disabled by default. When enabled, the switch uses split horizon with poisoned
reverse. When disabled, the switch uses only split horizon.
200 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
13N0340, March 2004
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
Table 6-35 Routing Information Protocol Menu (/cfg/l3/rip1)
Command Syntax and Usage
vip disable|enable
Enables or disables the advertisement of virtual IP addresses as Host Routes. If a VIP route exists
in a routing table, it will always be advertised except when it is included in another network route
that is already being advertised.
Note: If all real servers behind a VIP go down, the route gets removed from the routing table, and
will not be advertised. If we disable all the real servers using operation command, the VIP route
does not get eliminated from the routing table, and the switch will continue to advertise the route.
on
Globally turns RIP ON.
off
Globally turns RIP OFF.
cur
Displays the current RIP configuration.
13N0340, March 2004
Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 201
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
/cfg/l3/ospf
Open Shortest Path First Configuration
[Open Shortest Path First Menu]
aindex - OSPF Area (index) menu
range
- OSPF Summary Range menu
if
- OSPF Interface menu
virt
- OSPF Virtual Links menu
host
- OSPF Host Entry menu
redist - OSPF Route Redistribute menu
lsdb
- Set the LSDB limit
default - Originate default route information
md5key - OSPF MD5 Key menu
on
- Globally turn OSPF ON
off
- Globally turn OSPF OFF
current - Display current OSPF configuration
Table 6-36 OSPF Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3/ospf)
Command Syntax and Usage
aindex <area index (0-2)>
Displays the area index menu. This area index does not represent the actual OSPF area number.
See page 203 to view menu options.
range <range number (1-16)>
Displays summary routes menu for up to 16 IP addresses. See page 205 to view menu options.
if <interface number (1-128)>
Displays the OSPF interface configuration menu. See page 206 to view menu options.
virt <virtual link (1-3)>
Displays the Virtual Links menu used to configure OSPF for a Virtual Link. See page 207 to view
menu options.
host <host entry number (1-128)>
Displays the menu for configuring OSPF for the host routes. Up to 128 host routes can be configured. Host routes are used for advertising network device IP addresses to external networks to perform server load balancing within OSPF. It also makes Area Border Route (ABR) load sharing and
ABR failover possible. See page 209 to view menu options.
redist <fixed|static|rip|ebgp|ibgp>
Displays Route Distribution Menu See page 210 to view menu options.
lsdb <LSDB limit (0-2000, 0 for no limit)>
Sets the link state database limit.
202 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
13N0340, March 2004
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
Table 6-36 OSPF Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3/ospf)
Command Syntax and Usage
default <metric [1-16777215]> <metric-type 1|2>|none
Sets one default route among multiple choices in an area. Use none for no default.
md5key <key ID [1-255>
Assigns a string to MD5 authentication key. See
on
Enables OSPF on the GbE Switch Module.
off
Disables OSPF on the GbE Switch Module.
current
Displays the current OSPF configuration settings.
/cfg/l3/ospf/aindex
Area Index Configuration Menu
[OSPF Area (index) 1 Menu]
areaid - Set area ID
type
- Set area type
metric - Set stub area metric
auth
- Set authentication type
spf
- Set time interval between two SPF calculations
enable - Enable area
disable - Disable area
delete - Delete area
current - Display current OSPF area configuration
13N0340, March 2004
Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 203
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
Table 6-37 Area Index Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3/ospf/aindex)
Command Syntax and Usage
areaid <IP address (such as, 192.4.17.101)>
Defines the IP address of the OSPF area number.
type transit|stub|nssa
Defines the type of area. For example, when a virtual link has to be established with the backbone,
the area type must be defined as transit.
Transit area: allows area summary information to be exchanged between routing devices. Any
area that is not a stub area or NSSA is considered to be transit area.
Stub area: is an area where external routing information is not distributed. Typically, a stub area is
connected to only one other area.
NSSA: Not-So-Stubby Area (NSSA) is similar to stub area with additional capabilities. For example, routes originating from within the NSSA can be propagated to adjacent transit and backbone
areas. External routes from outside the Autonomous System (AS) can be advertised within the
NSSA but are not distributed into other areas.
metric <metric value [1-65535]>
Configures a stub area to send a numeric metric value. All routes received via that stub area carry
the configured metric to potentially influencing routing decisions.
Metric value assigns the priority for choosing the switch for default route. Metric type determines
the method for influencing routing decisions for external routes.
auth none|password|md5
None: No authentication required.
Password: Authenticates simple passwords so that only trusted routing devices can participate.
MD5: This parameter is used when MD5 cryptographic authentication is required.
spf <interval [0-255]>
Sets time interval between two successive SPF (shortest path first) calculations of the shortest path
tree using the Dijkstra’s algorithm.
enable
Enables the OSPF area.
disable
Disables the OSPF area.
delete
Deletes the OSPF area.
current
Displays the current OSPF configuration.
204 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
13N0340, March 2004
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
/cfg/l3/ospf/range
OSPF Summary Range Configuration Menu
[OSPF Summary
addr
mask
aindex
hide
enable
disable
delete
current
Range 1 Menu]
- Set IP address
- Set IP mask
- Set area index
- Enable/disable hide range
- Enable range
- Disable range
- Delete range
- Display current OSPF summary range configuration
Table 6-38 OSPF Summary Range Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3/ospf/range)
Command Syntax and Usage
addr <IP Address (such as, 192.4.17.101)>
Displays the base IP address for the range.
mask <IP address (such as, 192.4.17.101>
Displays the IP address mask for the range.
aindex <area index [0-2]>
Displays the area index used by the GbE Switch Module.
hide disable|enable
Hides the OSPF summary range.
enable
Enables the OSPF summary range.
disable
Disables the OSPF summary range.
delete
Deletes the OSPF summary range.
current
Displays the current OSPF summary range.
13N0340, March 2004
Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 205
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
/cfg/l3/ospf/if
OSPF Interface Configuration Menu
[OSPF Interface
aindex prio
cost
hello
dead
trans
retra
key
mdkey
enable disable delete current -
1 Menu]
Set area index
Set interface router priority
Set interface cost
Set hello interval in seconds
Set dead interval in seconds
Set transit delay in seconds
Set retransmit interval in seconds
Set authentication key
Set MD5 key ID
Enable interface
Disable interface
Delete interface
Display current OSPF interface configuration
Table 6-39 OSPF Interface Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3/ospf/if)
Command Syntax and Usage
aindex <area index [0-2]>
Displays the OSPF area index.
prio <priority value (0-127)>
Displays the assigned priority value to the GbE Switch Module’s OSPF interfaces.
(A priority value of 127 is the highest and 1 is the lowest. A priority value of 0 specifies that the
interface cannot be used as Designated Router (DR) or Backup Designated Router (BDR).)
cost <cost value (1-65535)>
Displays cost set for the selected path—preferred or backup. Usually the cost is inversely proportional to the bandwidth of the interface. Low cost indicates high bandwidth.
hello <value [1-65535]>
Displays the interval in seconds between the hello packets for the intefaces.
dead <value [1-65535]>
Displays the health parameters of a hello packet, which is set for an interval of seconds before
declaring a silent router to be down.
trans <value [0-3600]>
Displays the transit delay in seconds.
retra <value [0-3600]>
Displays the retransmit interval in seconds.
206 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
13N0340, March 2004
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
Table 6-39 OSPF Interface Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3/ospf/if)
Command Syntax and Usage
key <key> | none
Sets the authentication key to clear the password.
mdkey <key ID [1-255]>|none
Assigns an MD5 key to the interface.
enable
Enables OSPF interface.
disable
Disables OSPF interface.
delete
Deletes OSPF interface.
current
Displays the current settings for OSPF interface.
/cfg/l3/ospf/virt
OSPF Virtual Link Configuration Menu
[OSPF Virtual
aindex
hello
dead
trans
retra
nbr
key
mdkey
enable
disable
delete
current
13N0340, March 2004
Link 1 Menu]
- Set area index
- Set hello interval in seconds
- Set dead interval in seconds
- Set transit delay in seconds
- Set retransmit interval in seconds
- Set router ID of virtual neighbor
- Set authentication key
- Set MD5 key ID
- Enable interface
- Disable interface
- Delete interface
- Display current OSPF interface configuration
Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 207
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
Table 6-40 OSPF Virtual Link Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3/ospf/virt)
Command Syntax and Usage
aindex <area index [0-2]>
Displays the OSPF area index.
hello <value [1-65535]>
Displays the authentication parameters of a hello packet, which is set to be in an interval of
seconds.
dead <value [1-65535]>
Displays the health parameters of a hello packet, which is set to be in an interval of seconds.
Default is 40 seconds.
trans <value [1-3600]>
Displays the delay in transit in seconds. Default is one seconds.
retra <value [1-3600]>
Displays the retransmit interval in seconds. Default is five seconds.
nbr <NBR router ID (IP address)>
Displays the router ID of the virtual neighbor. Default is 0.0.0.0.
key <password>
Displays the password (up to eight characters) for each virtual link. Default is none.
mdkey <key ID [1-256]>|none
Sets MD5 key ID for each virtual link. Default is none.
enable
Enables OSPF virtual link.
disable
Disables OSPF virtual link.
delete
Deletes OSPF virtual link.
current
Displays the current OSPF virtual link settings.
208 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
13N0340, March 2004
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
/cfg/l3/ospf/host
OSPF Host Entry Configuration Menu
[OSPF Host Entry 1 Menu]
addr
- Set host entry IP address
aindex - Set area index
cost
- Set cost of this host entry
enable - Enable host entry
disable - Disable host entry
delete - Delete host entry
current - Display current OSPF host entry configuration
Table 6-41 OSPF Host Entry Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3/ospf/host)
Command Syntax and Usage
addr <IP address (such as, 192.4.17.101)>
Displays the base IP address for the host entry.
aindex <area index [0-2]>
Displays the area index of the host.
cost <cost value [1-65535]>
Displays the cost value of the host.
enable
Enables OSPF host entry.
disable
Disables OSPF host entry.
delete
Deletes OSPF host entry.
current
Displays the current OSPF host entries.
13N0340, March 2004
Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 209
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
/cfg/l3/ospf/redist/
<fixed|static|rip|ebgp|ibgp>
OSPF Route Redistribution Configuration Menu.
[OSPF Redistribute Fixed Menu]
add
- Add rmap into route redistribution list
rem
- Remove rmap from route redistribution list
export - Export all routes of this protocol
cur
- Display current route-maps added
Table 6-42 OSPF Route Redistribution Menu Options (/cfg/l3/ospf/redist)
Command Syntax and Usage
add (<route map [1-32]> <route map [1-32]>)|all
Adds selected routing maps to the rmap list.To add all the 32 route maps, enter all. To add specific route maps, enter routing map numbers one per line, NULL at the end.
This option adds a route map to the route redistribution list. The routes of the redistribution protocol matched by the route maps in the route redistribution list will be redistributed.
rem (<route map [1-32]> <route map [1-32]>) ... |all
Removes the route map from the route redistribution list.
Removes routing maps from the rmap list. To remove all 32 route maps, enter all. To remove
specific route maps, enter routing map numbers one per line, NULL at end.
export <metric [1-16777215]><metric type [1|2]> |none
Exports the routes of this protocol as external OSPF AS-external LSAs in which the metric and
metric type are specified. To remove a previous configuration and stop exporting the routes of the
protocol, enter none.
cur
Displays the current route map settings.
210 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
13N0340, March 2004
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
/cfg/l3/ospf/md5key
OSPF MD5 Key Configuration Menu
[OSPF MD5 Key
key
delete
cur
1
-
Menu]
Set authentication key
Delete key
Display current MD5 key configuration
Table 6-43 OSPF MD5 Key Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/ip/ospf/md5key)
Command Syntax and Usage
key
Sets the authentication key for this OSPF packet.
delete
Deletes the authentication key for this OSPF packet.
cur
Displays the current MD5 key configuration.
/cfg/l3/bgp
Border Gateway Protocol Configuration
[Border Gateway
peer
aggr
as
pref
on
off
current -
Protocol Menu]
Peer menu
Aggregation menu
Set Autonomous System (AS) number
Set Local Preference
Globally turn BGP ON
Globally turn BGP OFF
Display current BGP configuration
Border Gateway Protocol (BGP) is an Internet protocol that enables routers on a network to
share routing information with each other and advertise information about the segments of the
IP address space they can access within their network with routers on external networks. BGP
allows you to decide what is the “best” route for a packet to take from your network to a destination on another network, rather than simply setting a default route from your border router(s)
to your upstream provider(s). You can configure BGP either within an autonomous system or
between different autonomous systems. When run within an autonomous system, it's called
internal BGP (iBGP). When run between different autonomous systems, it's called external
BGP (eBGP). BGP is defined in RFC 1771.
13N0340, March 2004
Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 211
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
The BGP Menu enables you to configure the switch to receive routes and to advertise static
routes, fixed routes and virtual server IP addresses with other internal and external routers. In
the current Alteon OS implementation, the GbE Switch Module does not advertise BGP routes
that are learned from other BGP “speakers”.
The BGP menu option is turned off by default.
NOTE – Fixed routes are subnet routes. There is one fixed route per IP interface.
Table 6-44 Border Gateway Protocol Menu (/cfg/l3/bgp)
Command Syntax and Usage
peer <peer number (1-16)>
Displays the menu used to configure each BGP peer. Each border router, within an autonomous
system, exchanges routing information with routers on other external networks. To view menu
options, see page 213.
aggr <aggregate number (1-16)>
Displays the Aggregation Menu. To view menu options, see page 216.
as <1 - 65535>
Set Autonomous System number.
pref <local preference (0-4294967294)>
Sets the local preference. The path with the higher value is preferred.
When multiple peers advertise the same route, use the route with the shortest AS path as
the preferred route if you are using eBGP, or use the local preference if you are using
iBGP.
on
Globally turns BGP on.
off
Globally turns BGP off.
cur
Displays the current BGP configuration.
212 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
13N0340, March 2004
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
/cfg/l3/bgp/peer <peer number>
BGP Peer Configuration Menu
[BGP Peer 1 Menu]
redist - Redistribution menu
addr
- Set remote IP address
ras
- Set remote autonomous system number
hold
- Set hold time
alive
- Set keep alive time
advert - Set min time between advertisements
retry
- Set connect retry interval
orig
- Set min time between route originations
ttl
- Set time-to-live of IP datagrams
addi
- Add rmap into in-rmap list
addo
- Add rmap into out-rmap list
remi
- Remove rmap from in-rmap list
remo
- Remove rmap from out-rmap list
enable - Enable peer
disable - Disable peer
delete - Delete peer
current - Display current peer configuration
This menu is used to configure BGP peers, which are border routers that exchange routing
information with routers on internal and external networks. The peer option is disabled by
default.
Table 6-45 BGP Peer Configuration Options (/cfg/l3/bgp/peer)
Command Syntax and Usage
redist
Displays BGP Redistribution Menu. To view the the menu options, see page 215.
addr <IP address (such as 192.4.17.101)>
Defines the IP address for the specified peer (border router), using dotted decimal notation. The
default address is 0.0.0.0.
ras <AS number (0-65535)>
Sets the remote autonomous system number for the specified peer.
hold <hold time (0, 3-65535)>
Sets the period of time, in seconds, that will elapse before the peer session is torn down because the
switch hasn’t received a “keep alive” message from the peer. It is set at 90 seconds by default.
alive <keepalive time (0, 1-21845)>
Sets the keep-alive time for the specified peer in seconds. It is set at 0 by default.
13N0340, March 2004
Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 213
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
Table 6-45 BGP Peer Configuration Options (/cfg/l3/bgp/peer)
Command Syntax and Usage
advert <min adv time (1-65535)>
Sets time in seconds between advertisements.
retry <connect retry interval (1-65535)>
Sets connection retry interval in seconds.
orig <min orig time (1-65535)>
Sets the minimum time between route originations in seconds.
ttl <number of router hops (1-255)>
Time-to-live (TTL) is a value in an IP packet that tells a network router whether or not the packet
has been in the network too long and should be discarded. TTL specifies a certain time span in seconds that, when exhausted, would cause the packet to be discarded. The TTL is determined by the
number of router hops the packet is allowed before it must be discarded.
This command specifies the number of router hops that the IP packet can make. This value is used
to restrict the number of “hops” the advertisement makes. It is also used to support multi-hops,
which allow BGP peers to talk across a routed network. The default number is set at 1.
addi <route map ID (1-32)>
Adds route map into in-route map list.
addo <route map ID (1-32)>
Adds route map into out-route map list.
remi <route map ID (1-32)>
Removes route map from in-route map list.
remo <route map ID (1-32)>
Removes route map from out-route map list.
ena
Enables this peer configuration.
dis
Disables this peer configuration.
del
Deletes this peer configuration.
cur
Displays the current BGP peer configuration.
214 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
13N0340, March 2004
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
/cfg/l3/bgp/peer/redist
BGP Redistribution Configuration Menu
[Redistribution
metric default rip
ospf
fixed
static vip
current -
Menu]
Set default-metric of advertised routes
Set default route action
Enable/disable advertising RIP routes
Enable/disable advertising OSPF routes
Enable/disable advertising fixed routes
Enable/disable advertising static routes
Enable/disable advertising VIP routes
Display current redistribution configuration
Table 6-46 BGP Redistribution Configuration Menu Options
(/cfg/l3/bgp/peer/redist)
Command Syntax and Usage
metric <metric (1-4294967294)>|none
Sets default metric of advertised routes.
default none|import|originate|redistribute
Sets default route action.
Defaults routes can be configured as import, originate, redistribute, or none.
None: No routes are configured
Import: Import these routes.
Originate: The switch sends a default route to peers even though it does not have any default
routes in its routing table.
Redistribute: Default routes are either configured through default gateway or learned through
other protocols and redistributed to peer. If the routes are learned from default gateway configuration, you have to enable static routes since the routes from default gateway are static routes. Similarly, if the routes are learned from a certain routing protocol, you have to enable that protocol in
this redistribute submenu.
rip disable|enable
Enables or disables advertising RIP routes
ospf disable|enable
Enables or disables advertising OSPF routes.
fixed disable|enable
Enables or disables advertising fixed routes.
static disable|enable
Enables or disables advertising static routes.
13N0340, March 2004
Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 215
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
Table 6-46 BGP Redistribution Configuration Menu Options
(/cfg/l3/bgp/peer/redist)
Command Syntax and Usage
vip disable|enable
Enables or disables advertising VIP routes.
current
Displays current redistribution configuration.
/cfg/l3/bgp/aggr (aggregation number)
BGP Aggregation Configuration
[BGP Aggr 1 Menu]
addr
- Set aggregation IP address
mask
- Set aggregation network mask
enable - Enable aggregation
disable - Disable aggregation
delete - Delete aggregation
current - Display current aggregation configuration
This menu enables you to configure filters that specify the routes/range of IP destinations a
peer router will accept from other peers. A route must match a filter to be installed in the routing table. By default, the first filter is enabled and the rest of the filters are disabled.
Table 6-47 BGP Filter Configuration Options (/cfg/l3/bgp/aggr)
Command Syntax and Usage
addr <IP address (such as 192.4.17.101)>
Defines the starting IP address for this filter, using dotted decimal notation. The default address is
0.0.0.0.
mask <IP subnet mask (such as, 255.255.255.0)>
This IP address mask is used with addr to define the range of IP addresses that will be accepted
by the peer when the filter is enabled. The default address is 0.0.0.0.
ena
Enables this BGP filter.
dis
Disables this BGP filter.
216 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
13N0340, March 2004
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
Table 6-47 BGP Filter Configuration Options (/cfg/l3/bgp/aggr)
Command Syntax and Usage
del
Deletes this BGP filter.
cur
Displays the current BGP filter configuration.
/cfg/l3/port <port alias or number>
IP Port Configuration
[IP Forwarding Port INT1 Menu]
on
- Turn Forwarding ON
off
- Turn Forwarding OFF
cur
- Display current port configuration
The IP Port Menu allows you to turn IP forwarding on or off on a port-by-port basis. By
default, the port forwarding option is turned on.
Table 6-48 IP Forwarding Port Options (/cfg/l3/port)
Command Syntax and Usage
on
Enables IP forwarding for the current port.
off
Disables IP forwarding for the current port.
cur
Displays the current IP forwarding settings.
13N0340, March 2004
Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 217
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
/cfg/l3/dns
Domain Name System Configuration
[Domain Name System Menu]
prima
- Set IP address of primary DNS server
secon
- Set IP address of secondary DNS server
dname
- Set default domain name
cur
- Display current DNS configuration
The Domain Name System (DNS) Menu is used for defining the primary and secondary DNS
servers on your local network, and for setting the default domain name served by the switch
services. DNS parameters must be configured prior to using hostname parameters with the
ping, traceroute, and tftp commands.
Table 6-49 Domain Name Service Menu Options (/cfg/l3/dns)
Command Syntax and Usage
prima <IP address (such as 192.4.17.101)>
You will be prompted to set the IP address for your primary DNS server. Use dotted decimal notation.
secon <IP address (such as 192.4.17.101)>
You will be prompted to set the IP address for your secondary DNS server. If the primary DNS
server fails, the configured secondary will be used instead. Enter the IP address using dotted decimal notation.
dname <dotted DNS notation>|none
Sets the default domain name used by the switch.
For example: mycompany.com
cur
Displays the current Domain Name System settings.
218 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
13N0340, March 2004
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
/cfg/l3/bootp
Bootstrap Protocol Relay Configuration
[Bootstrap Protocol Relay Menu]
addr
- Set IP address of BOOTP server
addr2
- Set IP address of second BOOTP server
on
- Globally turn BOOTP relay ON
off
- Globally turn BOOTP relay OFF
cur
- Display current BOOTP relay configuration
The Bootstrap Protocol (BOOTP) Relay Menu is used to allow hosts to obtain their configurations from a Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) server. The BOOTP configuration
enables the switch to forward a client request for an IP address to two DHCP/BOOTP servers
with IP addresses that have been configured on the GbE Switch Module.
BOOTP relay menu is turned off by default.
Table 6-50 Bootstrap Protocol Relay Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3/bootp)
Command Syntax and Usage
addr <IP address (such as, 192.4.17.101>
Sets the IP address of the BOOTP server.
addr2 <IP address (such as, 192.4.17.101>>
Sets the IP address of the second BOOTP server.
on
Globally turns on BOOTP relay.
off
Globally turns off BOOTP relay.
cur
Displays the current BOOTP relay configuration.
13N0340, March 2004
Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 219
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
/cfg/l3/vrrp
VRRP Configuration
[Virtual Router
vr
group
if
track
on
off
cur
-
Redundancy Protocol Menu]
VRRP Virtual Router menu
VRRP Virtual Router Group menu
VRRP Interface menu
VRRP Priority Tracking menu
Globally turn VRRP ON
Globally turn VRRP OFF
Display current VRRP configuration
Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol (VRRP) support on GbE Switch Modules provides redundancy between routers in a LAN. This is accomplished by configuring the same virtual router IP
address and ID number on each participating VRRP-capable routing device. One of the virtual
routers is then elected as the master, based on a number of priority criteria, and assumes control
of the shared virtual router IP address. If the master fails, one of the backup virtual routers will
assume routing authority and take control of the virtual router IP address.
By default, VRRP is disabled. Alteon WebSystems has extended VRRP to include virtual servers as well, allowing for full active/active redundancy between its Layer 4 switches. For more
information on VRRP, see the “High Availability” chapter in the Alteon OS 20.1 Application
Guide.
Table 6-51 Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol Options (/cfg/l3/vrrp)
Command Syntax and Usage
vr <virtual router number (1-128)>
Displays the VRRP Virtual Router Menu. This menu is used for configuring up to 128 virtual routers on this switch. To view menu options, see page 221.
group
Displays the VRRP virtual router group menu, used to combine all virtual routers together as one
logical entity. Group options must be configured when using two or more Alteon switches in a hotstandby failover configuration where only one switch is active at any given time. To view menu
options, see page 226.
if <interface number (1-128)>
Displays the VRRP Virtual Router Interface Menu. To view menu options, see page 230.
track
Displays the VRRP Tracking Menu. This menu is used for weighting the criteria used when modifying priority levels in the master router election process. To view menu options, see page 231.
220 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
13N0340, March 2004
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
Table 6-51 Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol Options (/cfg/l3/vrrp)
Command Syntax and Usage
on
Globally enables VRRP on this switch.
off
Globally disables VRRP on this switch.
cur
Displays the current VRRP parameters.
/cfg/l3/vrrp/vr <router number>
Virtual Router Configuration
[VRRP Virtual
track
vrid
addr
if
prio
adver
preem
ena
dis
del
cur
Router 1 Menu]
- Priority Tracking Menu
- Set virtual router ID
- Set IP address
- Set interface number
- Set renter priority
- Set advertisement interval
- Enable or disable preemption
- Enable virtual router
- Disable virtual router
- Delete virtual router
- Display current VRRP virtual router configuration
This menu is used for configuring up to 128 virtual routers for this switch. A virtual router is
defined by its virtual router ID and an IP address. On each VRRP-capable routing device participating in redundancy for this virtual router, a virtual router will be configured to share the
same virtual router ID and IP address.
Virtual routers are disabled by default.
13N0340, March 2004
Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 221
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
Table 6-52 VRRP Virtual Router Options (/cfg/l3/vrrp/vr)
Command Syntax and Usage
track
Displays the VRRP Priority Tracking Menu for this virtual router. Tracking is an Alteon WebSystems proprietary extension to VRRP, used for modifying the standard priority system used for
electing the master router. To view menu options, see page 224.
vrid <virtual router ID (1-255)>
Defines the virtual router ID. This is used in conjunction with addr (below) to define a virtual
router on this switch. To create a pool of VRRP-enabled routing devices which can provide redundancy to each other, each participating VRRP device must be configured with the same virtual
router: one that shares the same vrid and addr combination.
The vrid for standard virtual routers (where the virtual router IP address is not the same as any
virtual server) can be any integer between 1 and 255. The default value is 1.
All vrid values must be unique within the VLAN to which the virtual router’s IP interface
belongs.
addr <IP address (such as, 192.4.17.101)>
Defines the IP address for this virtual router using dotted decimal notation. This is used in conjunction with the vrid (above) to configure the same virtual router on each participating VRRP
device. The default address is 0.0.0.0.
if <interface number (1-128)>
Selects a switch IP interface (between 1 and 128). If the IP interface has the same IP address as the
addr option above, this switch is considered the “owner” of the defined virtual router. An owner
has a special priority of 255 (highest) and will always assume the role of master router, even if it
must preempt another virtual router which has assumed master routing authority. This preemption
occurs even if the preem option below is disabled. The default value is 1.
prio <priority (1-254)>
Defines the election priority bias for this virtual server. This can be any integer between 1 and 254.
The default value is 100.
During the master router election process, the routing device with the highest virtual router priority
number wins. If there is a tie, the device with the highest IP interface address wins. If this virtual
router’s IP address (addr) is the same as the one used by the IP interface, the priority for this virtual router will automatically be set to 255 (highest).
When priority tracking is used (/cfg/l3/vrrp/track or /cfg/l3/vrrp/vr #/track),
this base priority value can be modified according to a number of performance and operational criteria.
adver <seconds (1-255)>
Defines the time interval between VRRP master advertisements. This can be any integer between 1
and 255 seconds. The default value is 1.
222 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
13N0340, March 2004
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
Table 6-52 VRRP Virtual Router Options (/cfg/l3/vrrp/vr)
Command Syntax and Usage
preem disable|enable
Enables or disables master preemption. When enabled, if this virtual router is in backup mode but
has a higher priority than the current master, this virtual router will preempt the lower priority master and assume control. Note that even when preem is disabled, this virtual router will always preempt any other master if this switch is the owner (the IP interface address and virtual router addr
are the same). By default, this option is enabled.
ena
Enables this virtual router.
dis
Disables this virtual router.
del
Deletes this virtual router from the switch configuration.
cur
Displays the current configuration information for this virtual router.
13N0340, March 2004
Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 223
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
/cfg/l3/vrrp/vr <router number>/track
Virtual Router Priority Tracking Configuration
[VRRP Virtual
vrs
ifs
ports
l4pts
reals
hsrp
hsrv
cur
Router 1 Priority Tracking Menu]
- Enable/disable tracking master virtual routers
- Enable/disable tracking other interfaces
- Enable/disable tracking VLAN switch ports
- Enable/disable tracking L4 switch ports
- Enable/disable tracking L4 real servers
- Enable/disable tracking HSRP
- Enable/disable tracking HSRP by VLAN
- Display current VRRP virtual router configuration
This menu is used for modifying the priority system used when electing the master router from
a pool of virtual routers. Various tracking criteria can be used to bias the election results. Each
time one of the tracking criteria is met, the priority level for the virtual router is increased by an
amount defined through the VRRP Tracking Menu (see page 231).
Criteria are tracked dynamically, continuously updating virtual router priority levels when
enabled. If the virtual router preemption option (see preem in Table 6-52 on page 222) is
enabled, this virtual router can assume master routing authority when its priority level rises
above that of the current master.
Some tracking criteria (vrs, ifs, and ports below) apply to standard virtual routers, otherwise called “virtual interface routers.” Other tracking criteria (l4pts, reals, and hsrp)
apply to “virtual server routers,” which perform Layer 4 Server Load Balancing functions. A
virtual server router is defined as any virtual router whose IP address (addr) is the same as
any configured virtual server IP address.
Table 6-53 VRRP Priority Tracking Options (/cfg/l3/vrrp/vr #/track)
Command Syntax and Usage
vrs disable|enable
When enabled, the priority for this virtual router will be increased for each virtual router in master
mode on this switch. This is useful for making sure that traffic for any particular client/server pairing are handled by the same switch, increasing routing and load balancing efficiency. This command is disabled by default.
ifs disable|enable
When enabled, the priority for this virtual router will be increased for each other IP interface active
on this switch. An IP interface is considered active when there is at least one active port on the
same VLAN. This helps elect the virtual routers with the most available routes as the master. This
command is disabled by default.
224 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
13N0340, March 2004
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
Table 6-53 VRRP Priority Tracking Options (/cfg/l3/vrrp/vr #/track)
Command Syntax and Usage
ports disable|enable
When enabled, the priority for this virtual router will be increased for each active port on the same
VLAN. A port is considered “active” if it has a link and is forwarding traffic. This helps elect the
virtual routers with the most available ports as the master. This command is disabled by default.
l4pts disable|enable
When enabled for virtual server routers, the priority for this virtual router will be increased for
each physical switch port which has active Layer 4 processing on this switch. This helps elect the
main Layer 4 switch as the master. This command is disabled by default.
reals disable|enable
When enabled for virtual server routers, the priority for this virtual router will be increased for
each healthy real server behind the virtual server IP address of the same IP address as the virtual
router on this switch. This helps elect the switch with the largest server pool as the master, increasing Layer 4 efficiency. This command is disabled by default.
hsrp disable|enable <priority (1-254)>
Hot Standby Router Protocol (HSRP) is used with some types of routers for establishing router
failover. In networks where HSRP is used, enable this switch option to increase the priority of this
virtual router for each Layer 4 client-only port that receives HSRP advertisements. Enabling HSRP
helps elect the switch closest to the master HSRP router as the master, optimizing routing efficiency. This command is disabled by default.
hsrv disable|enable
Hot Standby Router on VLAN (HSRV) is used to work in VLAN-tagged environments. Enable
this switch option to increment only that vrrp instance that is on the same VLAN as the tagged
hsrp master flagged packet. This command is disabled by default.
cur
Displays the current configuration for priority tracking for this virtual router.
13N0340, March 2004
Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 225
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
/cfg/l3/vrrp/group
Virtual Router Group Configuration
[VRRP Virtual
track
vrid
if
prio
adver
preem
ena
dis
del
cur
Router Group Menu]
- Priority Tracking Menu
- Set virtual router ID
- Set interface number
- Set renter priority
- Set advertisement interval
- Enable or disable preemption
- Enable virtual router
- Disable virtual router
- Delete virtual router
- Display current VRRP virtual router configuration
The Virtual Router Group menu is used for associating all virtual routers into a single logical
virtual router, which forces all virtual routers on the GbE Switch Module to either be master or
backup as a group. A virtual router is defined by its virtual router ID and an IP address. On
each VRRP-capable routing device participating in redundancy for this virtual router, a virtual
router will be configured to share the same virtual router ID and IP address.
NOTE – This option is required to be configured only when using at least two GbE Switch Modulees in a hot-standby failover configuration, where only one switch is active at any time.
Table 6-54 VRRP Virtual Router Group Options (/cfg/l3/vrrp/group)
Command Syntax and Usage
track
Displays the VRRP Priority Tracking Menu for the virtual router group. Tracking is an Alteon
WebSystems proprietary extension to VRRP, used for modifying the standard priority system used
for electing the master router. To view menu options, see page 228.
vrid <virtual router ID (1-255)>
Defines the virtual router ID.
The vrid for standard virtual routers (where the virtual router IP address is not the same as any
virtual server) can be any integer between 1 and 255. All vrid values must be unique within the
VLAN to which the virtual router’s IP interface (see if below) belongs. The default virtual router
ID is 1.
if <interface number (1-128)>
Selects a switch IP interface (between 1 and 128). The default switch IP interface number is 1.
226 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
13N0340, March 2004
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
Table 6-54 VRRP Virtual Router Group Options (/cfg/l3/vrrp/group)
Command Syntax and Usage
prio <priority (1-254)>
Defines the election priority bias for this virtual router group. This can be any integer between 1
and 254. The default value is 100.
During the master router election process, the routing device with the highest virtual router priority
number wins. If there is a tie, the device with the highest IP interface address wins. If this virtual
router’s IP address (addr) is the same as the one used by the IP interface, the priority for this virtual router will automatically be set to 255 (highest).
When priority tracking is used (/cfg/l3/vrrp/track or /cfg/l3/vrrp/vr #/track),
this base priority value can be modified according to a number of performance and operational criteria.
adver <seconds (1-255)>
Defines the time interval between VRRP master advertisements. This can be any integer between 1
and 255 seconds. The default is 1.
preem disable|enable
Enables or disables master preemption. When enabled, if the virtual router group is in backup
mode but has a higher priority than the current master, this virtual router will preempt the lower
priority master and assume control. Note that even when preem is disabled, this virtual router will
always preempt any other master if this switch is the owner (the IP interface address and virtual
router addr are the same). By default, this option is enabled.
ena
Enables the virtual router group.
dis
Disables the virtual router group.
del
Deletes the virtual router group from the switch configuration.
cur
Displays the current configuration information for the virtual router group.
13N0340, March 2004
Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 227
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
/cfg/l3/vrrp/group/track
Virtual Router Group Priority Tracking Configuration
[Virtual Router
vrs
ifs
ports
l4pts
reals
hsrp
hsrv
cur
-
Group Priority Tracking Menu]
Enable/disable tracking master virtual routers
Enable/disable tracking other interfaces
Enable/disable tracking VLAN switch ports
Enable/disable tracking L4 switch ports
Enable/disable tracking L4 real servers
Enable/disable tracking HSRP
Enable/disable tracking HSRP by VLAN
Display current VRRP Group Tracking configuration
NOTE – If Virtual Router Group Tracking is enabled, then the tracking option will be available
only under group option. The tracking setting for the other individual virtual routers will be
ignored.
Table 6-55 Virtual Router Group Priority Tracking Options (/cfg/l3/vr/group/track)
Command Syntax and Usage
vrs disable|enable
When enabled, the priority for this virtual router will be increased for each virtual router in master
mode on this switch. This is useful for making sure that traffic for any particular client/server pairing are handled by the same switch, increasing routing and load balancing efficiency. This command is disabled by default.
ifs disable|enable
When enabled, the priority for this virtual router will be increased for each other IP interface active
on this switch. An IP interface is considered active when there is at least one active port on the
same VLAN. This helps elect the virtual routers with the most available routes as the master. This
command is disabled by default.
ports disable|enable
When enabled, the priority for this virtual router will be increased for each active port on the same
VLAN. A port is considered “active” if it has a link and is forwarding traffic. This helps elect the
virtual routers with the most available ports as the master. This command is disabled by default.
l4pts disable|enable
When enabled for virtual server routers, the priority for this virtual router will be increased for
each physical switch port which has active Layer 4 processing on this switch. This helps elect the
main Layer 4 switch as the master. This command is disabled by default.
228 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
13N0340, March 2004
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
Table 6-55 Virtual Router Group Priority Tracking Options (/cfg/l3/vr/group/track)
Command Syntax and Usage
reals disable|enable
When enabled for virtual server routers, the priority for this virtual router will be increased for
each healthy real server. This helps elect the switch with the largest server pool as the master,
increasing Layer 4 efficiency. This command is disabled by default.
hsrp disable|enable
Enables Hot Standby Router Protocol (HSRP) for this virtual router group. HSRP is used with
some types of routers for establishing router failover. In networks where HSRP is used, enable this
switch option to increase the priority of this virtual router for each Layer 4 client-only port that
receives HSRP advertisements. This helps elect the switch closest to the master HSRP router as the
master, optimizing routing efficiency. This command is disabled by default.
hsrv disable|enable
Hot Standby Router on VLAN (HSRV) is used to work in VLAN-tagged environments. Enable
this switch option to increment only that vrrp instance that is on the same VLAN as the tagged
hsrp master flagged packet. This command is disabled by default.
cur
Displays the current configuration for priority tracking for this virtual router.
13N0340, March 2004
Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 229
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
/cfg/l3/vrrp/if <interface number>
VRRP Interface Configuration
NOTE – The interface-number (1 to 128) represents the IP interface on which authentication
parameters must be configured.
[VRRP Interface
auth
passw
del
cur
-
1 Menu]
Set authentication types
Set plain-text password
Delete interface
Display current VRRP interface configuration
This menu is used for configuring VRRP authentication parameters for the IP interfaces used
with the virtual routers.
Table 6-56 VRRP Interface Menu Options (/cfg/l3/vrrp/if)
Command Syntax and Usage
auth none|password
Defines the type of authentication that will be used: none (no authentication), or password
(password authentication).
passw <password>
Defines a plain text password up to eight characters long. This password will be added to each
VRRP packet transmitted by this interface when password authentication is chosen (see auth
above).
del
Clears the authentication configuration parameters for this IP interface. The IP interface itself is
not deleted.
cur
Displays the current configuration for this IP interface’s authentication parameters.
230 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
13N0340, March 2004
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
/cfg/l3/vrrp/track
VRRP Tracking Configuration
[VRRP Tracking Menu]
vrs
- Set priority increment for virtual router tracking
ifs
- Set priority increment for IP interface tracking
ports
- Set priority increment for VLAN switch port tracking
l4pts
- Set priority increment for L4 switch port tracking
reals
- Set priority increment for L4 real server tracking
hsrp
- Set priority increment for HSRP tracking
hsrv
- Set priority increment for HSRP by VLAN tracking
cur
- Display current VRRP Priority Tracking configuration
This menu is used for setting weights for the various criteria used to modify priority levels during the master router election process. Each time one of the tracking criteria is met (see “VRRP
Virtual Router Priority Tracking Menu” on page 224), the priority level for the virtual router is
increased by an amount defined through this menu.
Table 6-57 VRRP Tracking Options (/cfg/l3/vrrp/track)
Command Syntax and Usage
vrs <0-254>
Defines the priority increment value (1 through 254) for virtual routers in master mode detected on
this switch. The default value is 2.
ifs <0-254>
Defines the priority increment value (1 through 254) for active IP interfaces detected on this
switch. The default value is 2.
ports <0-254>
Defines the priority increment value (1 through 254) for active ports on the virtual router’s VLAN.
The default value is 2.
l4pts <0-254>
Defines the priority increment value (1 through 254) for physical switch ports with active Layer 4
processing. The default value is 2.
reals <0-254>
Defines the priority increment value (1 through 254) for healthy real servers behind the virtual
server router. The default value is 2.
hsrp <0-254>
Defines the priority increment value (1 through 254) for switch ports with Layer 4 client-only processing that receive HSRP broadcasts. The default value is 10.
13N0340, March 2004
Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 231
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
Table 6-57 VRRP Tracking Options (/cfg/l3/vrrp/track)
Command Syntax and Usage
hsrv <0-254>
Defines the priority increment value (1 through 254) for vrrp instances that are on the same
VLAN.
The default value is 10.
cur
Displays the current configuration of priority tracking increment values.
NOTE – These priority tracking options only define increment values. These options do not
affect the VRRP master router election process until options under the VRRP Virtual Router
Priority Tracking Menu (see page 224) are enabled.
/cfg/l3/metrc <metric name>
Default Gateway Metrics
If multiple default gateways are configured and enabled, a metric can be set to determine
which primary gateway is selected. There are two metrics, which are described in the table .
Table 6-58 Default Gateway Metrics (/cfg/l3/metrc)
Option
Description
strict
The gateway number determines its level of preference. Gateway #1 acts as
the preferred default IP gateway until it fails or is disabled, at which point the
next in line will take over as the default IP gateway.
roundrobin
This provides basic gateway load balancing. The switch sends each new gateway request to the next healthy, enabled gateway in line. All gateway requests
to the same destination IP address are resolved to the same gateway.
232 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
13N0340, March 2004
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
/cfg/setup
Setup
The setup program steps you through configuring the system date and time, BOOTP, IP, Spanning Tree, port speed/mode, VLAN parameters, and IP interfaces.
To start the setup program, at the Configuration# prompt, enter:
Configuration# setup
For a complete description of how to use setup, see Chapter 2, “First-Time Configuration.”
/cfg/dump
Dump
The dump program writes the current switch configuration to the terminal screen. To start the
dump program, at the Configuration# prompt, enter:
Configuration# dump
The configuration is displayed with parameters that have been changed from the default values. The screen display can be captured, edited, and placed in a script file, which can be used to
configure other switches through a Telnet connection. When using Telnet to configure a new
switch, paste the configuration commands from the script file at the command line prompt of
the switch. The active configuration can also be saved or loaded via TFTP, as described on
page 234.
13N0340, March 2004
Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 233
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
/cfg/ptcfg <TFTP server> <filename>
Saving the Active Switch Configuration
When the ptcfg command is used, the switch’s active configuration commands (as displayed
using /cfg/dump) will be uploaded to the specified script configuration file on the TFTP
server. To start the switch configuration upload, at the Configuration# prompt, enter:
Configuration# ptcfg <TFTP server> <filename>
Where server is the TFTP server IP address or hostname, and filename is the name of the target
script configuration file.
NOTE – The output file is formatted with line-breaks but no carriage returns—the file cannot
be viewed with editors that require carriage returns (such as Microsoft Notepad).
NOTE – If the TFTP server is running SunOS or the Solaris operating system, the specified
ptcfg file must exist prior to executing the ptcfg command and must be writable (set with
proper permission, and not locked by any application). The contents of the specified file will
be replaced with the current configuration data.
/cfg/gtcfg <TFTP server> <filename>
Restoring the Active Switch Configuration
When the gtcfg command is used, the active configuration will be replaced with the commands found in the specified configuration file. The file can contain a full switch configuration
or a partial switch configuration. The configuration loaded using gtcfg is not activated until
the apply command is used. If the apply command is found in the configuration script file
loaded using this command, the apply action will be performed automatically.
To start the switch configuration download, at the Configuration# prompt, enter:
Configuration# gtcfg <TFTP server> <filename>
Where server is the TFTP server IP address or hostname, and filename is the name of the target
script configuration file.
234 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
13N0340, March 2004
CHAPTER 7
The SLB Configuration Menu
This chapter discusses how to use the Command Line Interface (CLI) for configuring Server
Load Balancing (SLB) on the GbE Switch Module.
/cfg/slb
SLB Configuration
[Layer 4 Menu]
real
group
virt
filt
port
layer7 wap
sync
adv
advhc
pip
on
off
cur
-
Real Server Menu
Real Server Group Menu
Virtual Server Menu
Filtering Menu
Layer 4 Port Menu
Layer 7 Resource Definition Menu
WAP Menu
Config Synch Menu
Layer 4 Advanced Menu
Layer 4 Advanced Health Check Menu
Proxy IP Address Menu
Globally turn Layer 4 processing ON
Globally turn Layer 4 processing OFF
Display current Layer 4 configuration
Table 7-1 Server Load Balancing Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/slb)
Command Syntax and Usage
real <real server number (1-63)>
Displays the menu for configuring real servers. To view menu options, see page 237.
group <real server group number (1-64)>
Displays the menu for placing real servers into real server groups. To view menu options, see
page 242.
235
13N0340, March 2004
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
Table 7-1 Server Load Balancing Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/slb)
Command Syntax and Usage
virt <virtual server number (1-64)>
Displays the menu for defining virtual servers. To view menu options, see page 247.
filt <filter ID (1-1024)>
Displays the menu for Filtering and Application Redirection. To view menu options, see page 255.
port <port alias or number (1-20)>
Displays the menu for setting physical switch port states for Layer 4 activity. To view menu
options, see page 266.
layer7
Displays later 7 Resource Definition Menu. To view menu options, see page 268.
wap
Displays WAP Menu. To view menu options, see page 271
sync
Displays the Synch Peer Switch Menu. To view menu options, see page 272.
adv
Displays the Layer 4 Advanced Menu. To view menu options, see page 274.
advhc
Displays the Layer 4 Advanced Health Check Menu. To view menu options, see page 277.
pip
This menu is used to set the switch proxy IP address using dotted decimal notation. When the pip
is defined, client address information in Layer 4 requests is replaced with this proxy IP address.To
view options, see page 280.
on
Globally turns on Layer 4 software services for Server Load Balancing and Application Redirection. Enabling Layer 4 services is not necessary for using filters only to allow, deny, or NAT traffic.
off
Globally disables Layer 4 services. All configuration information will remain in place
(if applied or saved), but the software processes will no longer be active in the switch
cur
Displays the current Server Load Balancing configuration.
236 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu
13N0340, March 2004
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
Filtering and Layer 4 (Server Load Balancing)
Filters configured to allow, deny, or perform Network Address Translation (NAT) on traffic do
not require Layer 4 software to be activated. These filters are not affected by the Server Load
Balancing on and off commands in this menu.
Application Redirection filters, however, require Layer 4 software services. Layer 4 processing
must be turned on before redirection filters will work.
/cfg/slb/real <server number>
Real Server SLB Configuration
[Real server
layer7 rip
name
weight maxcon tmout
backup inter
retry
restr
addport remport remote proxy
submac ena
dis
del
cur
-
1 Menu]
Real Server Layer 7 Command Menu
Set IP addr of real server
Set server name
Set server weight
Set maximum number of connections
Set minutes inactive connection remains open
Set backup real server
Set interval between health checks
Set number of failed attempts to declare server DOWN
Set number of successful attempts to declare server UP
Add real port to server
Remove real port to server
Enable/disable remote site operation
Enable/disable client proxy operation
Enable/disable source MAC address substitution
Enable real server
Disable real server
Delete real server
Display current real server configuration
This menu is used for configuring information about real servers that participate in a server
pool for Server Load Balancing or Application Redirection. The required parameters are:
Real server IP address
Real server enabled (disabled by default)
13N0340, March 2004
Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 237
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
Table 7-2 Real Server Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/slb/real)
Command Syntax and Usage
layer7
Displays the Layer 7 Menu. To view menu options, see page 241.
rip <real server IP address>
Sets the IP address of the real server in dotted decimal format. When this command is used, the
address entered is PINGed to determine if the server is up, and the administrator will be warned if
the server does not respond.
name <string, maximum 31 characters>| none
Defines a 15-character alias for each real server. This will enable the network administrator to
quickly identify the server by a natural language keyword value.
weight <real server weight (1-48)>
Sets the weighting value (1 to 48) that this real server will be given in the load balancing algorithms. Higher weighting values force the server to receive more connections than the other servers
configured in the same real server group. By default, each real server is given a weight setting of 1.
A setting of 10 would assign the server roughly 10 times the number of connections as a server
with a weight of 1.
Weights are not applied when using the hash or minmisses metrics (see “Server Load Balancing Metrics” on page 245).
maxcon <maximum connections (0-200000)>
Sets the maximum number of connections that this server should simultaneously support. By
default, the number of maximum connections is set at 20,000. This option sets a threshold as an
artificial barrier, such that new connections will not be issued to this server if the maxcon limit is
reached. New connections will be issued again to this server once the number of current connections has decreased below the maxcon setting.
If all servers in a real server group for a virtual server reach their maxcon limit at the same time,
client requests will be sent to the backup/overflow server or backup/overflow server group. If no
backup servers/server group are configured, client requests will be dropped by the virtual server.
238 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu
13N0340, March 2004
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
Table 7-2 Real Server Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/slb/real)
Command Syntax and Usage
tmout <even number of minutes (2-30)>
Sets the number of minutes an inactive session remains open (in even numbered increments).
Every client-to-server session being load balanced is recorded in the switch's Session Table. When
a client makes a request, the session is recorded in the table, the data is transferred until the client
ends the session, and the session table entry is then removed.
In certain circumstances, such as when a client application is abnormally terminated by the client's
system, TCP/UDP connections will remain registered in the switch's binding table. In order to prevent table overflow, these orphaned entries must be aged out of the binding table.
Using the tmout option, you can set the number of minutes to wait before removing orphan table
entries. Settings must be specified in even numbered increments between 2 and 30 minutes. The
default setting is 10.
This option is also used with the Persistent option (see /cfg/slb/virt/pbind). When persistent is activated, this option sets how long an idle client is allowed to remain associated with a particular server.
backup <real server number (1-1023)>|none
Sets the real server used as the backup/overflow server for this real server.
To prevent loss of service if a particular real server fails, use this option to assign a backup real
server number. Then, if the real server becomes inoperative, the switch will activate the backup
real server until the original becomes operative again.
The backup server is also used in overflow situations. If the real server reaches its maxcon (maximum connections) limit, the backup comes online to provide additional processing power until the
original server becomes desaturated.
The same backup/overflow server may be assigned to more than one real server at the same time
inter <number of seconds between health checks (0-60)>
Sets the interval between real server health verification attempts.
Determining the health of each real server is a necessary function for Layer 4 switching. For TCP
services, the switch verifies that real servers and their corresponding services are operational by
opening a TCP connection to each service, using the defined service ports configured as part of
each virtual service. For UDP services, the switch pings servers to determine their status.
The inter option lets you choose the time between health checks. The range is from 1 to 60 seconds. The default interval is 2 seconds. An interval of “0” disables health checking for the server.
retry <number of consecutive health checks (1-63)>
Sets the number of failed health check attempts required before declaring this real server inoperative. The range is from 1 to 63 attempts. The default is 4 attempts
restr <number of consecutive health checks (1-63)>
Sets the number of successful health check attempts required before declaring a UDP service operational. The range is from 1 to 63 attempts. The default is 8 attempts
13N0340, March 2004
Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 239
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
Table 7-2 Real Server Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/slb/real)
Command Syntax and Usage
addport <real server port (2–65534)>
Add multiple service ports to the server.
remport <real server port (2–65534)>
Remove multiple service ports from the server.
remote disable|enable
Enables or disables remote site operation for this server. This option should be enabled when the
real IP address supplied above represents a remote server (real or virtual) that this switch will
access as part of its Global Server Load Balancing network. By default, this option is disabled.
proxy disable|enable
Enables or disables proxy IP address translation. With this option enabled (default), a client request
from any application can be proxied using a load-balancing Proxy IP address (PIP).
submac disable|enable
Enables or disables source MAC address substitution. By default, this option is disabled.
enable
You must perform this command to enable this real server for Layer 4 service. When enabled, the
real server can process virtual server requests associated with its real server group. This option,
when the apply and save commands are used, enables this real server for operation until explicitly disabled.
See /oper/slb/ena on page 284 for an operations-level command.
dis
Disables this real server from Layer 4 service. Any disabled server will no longer process virtual
server requests as part of the real server group to which it is assigned. This option, when the
apply is used, disables this real server until it is explicitly re-enabled. This option does not perform a graceful server shutdown.
See /oper/slb/dis on page 284 for an operations-level command.
del
Deletes this real server from the Layer 4 switching software configuration. This removes the real
server from operation within its real server groups. Use this command with caution, as it will
delete any configuration options that have been set for this real server. This option does not perform a graceful server shutdown.
cur
Displays the current configuration information for this real server.
240 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu
13N0340, March 2004
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
/cfg/slb/real <server number>/layer7
Real Server Layer 7 Configuration
[Layer 7 Commands Menu]
addlb
- Add URL path for URL load balance
remlb
- Remove URL path for URL load balance
cookser - Enable/disable cookie assignment server
exclude - Enable/disable exclusionary string matching
cur
- Display current real server configuration
This menu is used for entering commands and strings for Layer 7 processing.
Table 7-3 Layer 7 Commands Menu Options (/cfg/slb/real/layer7)
Command Syntax and Usage
addlb <URL path ID [1-512]>
Adds the predefined URL loadbalance string ID to the real server.
remlb <URL path ID [1-512]>
Removes the predefined URL loadbalance string ID from the real server.
cookser disable|enable
Enables or disables the real server to handle client requests that don’t contain a cookie. This option
is used if you want to designate a specific server to assign cookies only. This server gets the client
request, assigns the cookie, and embeds the IP address of the real server that will handle the subsequent requests from the client.
By default, this option is disabled.
exclude disable|enable
Enables or disables exclusionary string matching. By default, this option is disabled.
cur
Displays the current real server configuration.
13N0340, March 2004
Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 241
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
/cfg/slb/group <real server group number>
Real Server Group SLB Configuration
[Real server group 1 Menu]
metric - Set metric used to select next server in group
content - Set health check content
health - Set health check type
backup - Set backup real server or group
name
- Set real server group name
realthr - Set real server failure threshold
viphlth - Enable/disable VIP health checking in DSR mode
ids
- Enable/disable Intrusion Detection
idsrprt - Set Intrusion Detection Port
idsfld - Enable/disable Intrusion Detection Group Flood
add
- Add real server
rem
- Remove real server
del
- Delete real server group
cur
- Display current group configuration
This menu is used for combining real servers into real server groups. Each real server group
should consist of all the real servers which provide a specific service for load balancing. Each
group must consist of at least one real server. Each real server can belong to more than one group.
Real server groups are used both for Server Load Balancing and Application Redirection.
Table 7-4 Real Server Group Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/slb/group)
Command Syntax and Usage
metric leastconns|roundrobin|minmisses|hash|response|bandwidth
Set the load balancing metric used for determining which real server in the group will be the target
of the next client request. The default setting is leastconns. See “Server Load Balancing Metrics” on page 245.
content <filename>|//<host>/<filename>|none
This option defines the specific content which is examined during health checks. The content
depends on the type of health check specified in the health option (see below).
242 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu
13N0340, March 2004
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
Table 7-4 Real Server Group Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/slb/group)
Command Syntax and Usage
health
link|arp|icmp|tcp|http|dns|pop3|smtp|nntp|ftp|imap|radius|sslh|
script<n>|udpdns|wsp|wtls|ldap
Sets the type of health checking performed. The default is tcp. The options are as follows:
link
arp
icmp
tcp
http
dns
pop3
smtp
nntp
ftp
imap
radius
sslh
script
wsp
udpdns
wtls
ldap
13N0340, March 2004
For IDSLB group only, checks status of port for each server.
For Layer 2 health checking, sends an ARP request.
For Layer 3 health checking, pings the server.
For TCP service, opens and closes a TCP/IP connection to the server.
For HTTP service, use HTTP 1.1 GETS when a HOST: header is required to check
that the URL content is specified in content command. Otherwise, an HTTP/1.0
GET occurs.
Note: If the content is not specified, the health check will revert back to TCP on the
port that is being load balanced.
For Domain Name Service, check that the domain name specified in content can be
resolved by the server.
For user mail service, check that the user:password account specified in content
exists on the server.
For mail-server services, check that the user specified in content is accessible on
the server.
For newsgroup services, check that the newsgroup name specified in content is
accessible on the server.
For FTP services, check that the filename specified in content is accessible on the
server through anonymous login.
For user mail service, check that the user:password value specified in content
exists on the serve
For RADIUS remote access server authentication, check that the user:password value
specified in content exists on the GbE Switch Module and the server. To perform
application health checking to a RADIUS server, the network administrator must also
configure the /cfg/slb/secrt parameter. The secrt value is a field of up to 32
alphanumeric characters that is used by the switch to encrypt a password during the
RSA Message Digest Algorithm (MD5) and by the RADIUS server to decrypt the
password during verification.
Enables the switch to query the health of the SSL servers by sending an SSL client
“Hello” packet and then verify the contents of the server’s “Hello” response. During
the handshake, the user and server exchange security certificates, negotiate an encryption and compression method, and establish a session ID for each session.
Enables the use of script-based health checks in send/expect format to check for application and content availability. <n> denotes the health script number (1-8).
Enables connectionless WSP content health checks for WAP gateways. The content
under /cfg/slb/advhc/waphc (see page 279) must also be configured.
Allows the user to perform health checking using UDP DNS queries.
Provides Wireless Transport Layer Security (WTLS) Hello-based health check for
encrypted and connection-oriented WTLS traffic on port 9203.
Sets the health check type to LDAP.
Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 243
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
Table 7-4 Real Server Group Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/slb/group)
Command Syntax and Usage
backup r<real server number (1-64)>|g<group number>|none
Sets the real server or real server group used as the backup/overflow server/server group for this
real server group.
To prevent loss of service if the entire real server group fails, use this option to assign a backup real
server/real server group number. Then, if the real server group becomes inoperative, the switch
will activate the backup real server /server group until one of the original real servers becomes
operative again.
The backup server/server group is also used in overflow situations. If all the servers in the real
server group reach their maxcon (maximum connections) limit, the backup server/server group
comes online to provide additional processing power until one of the original servers becomes
desaturated.
The same backup/overflow server/server group may be assigned to more than one real server
group at the same time.
name <string, maximum 31 characters>|none
Defines a 15-character alias for each Real Server Group. This will enable the network administrator to quickly identify the server group by a natural language keyword value.
realthr <real servers (1-15, 0 for disabled)>
Specifies a minimum number of real servers available. If any time, the number reaches this minimum limit, a SYSLOG ALERT message is sent to the configured SYSLOG servers stating that the
real server threshold has been reached for the concerned server load balancing group. The default
threshold is 0, which also means the option is disabled
viphlth disable|enable
Enables or disables VIP health checking in a service. This feature is enabled by default. However,
it works only when the service has DSR (Direct Server Return) feature enabled. When viphlth
is disabled, the switch uses RIP to perform all health checks, whether DSR is enabled or disabled.
ids disable|enable
Enables or disables this group of servers for IDS load balancing.
idsrprt <real server port (2-65534)>|any
Sets real server port for Intrusion Detection Server.
idsfld disable|enable
Enables or disables the Intrusion Detection flood.
add <real server number (1-63)>
Adds a real server to this real server group. You will be prompted to enter the number of the real
server to add to this group.
rem <real server number (1-63)>
Remove a real server from this real server group. You will be prompted for the ID number for the
real server to remove from this group.
244 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu
13N0340, March 2004
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
Table 7-4 Real Server Group Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/slb/group)
Command Syntax and Usage
del
Deletes this real server group from the Layer 4 software configuration. This removes the group
from operation under all virtual servers it is assigned to. Use this command with caution: if you
remove the only group that is assigned to a virtual server, the virtual server will become inoperative.
cur
Displays the current configuration parameters for this real server group.
Server Load Balancing Metrics
Using the metric command, you can set a number of metrics for selecting which real server
in a group gets the next client request. These metrics are described in the following table:
Table 7-5 Real Server Group Metrics (/cfg/slb/group/metric)
Option and Description
minmisses
Minimum misses. This metric is optimized for Application Redirection. When minmisses is
specified for a real server group performing Application Redirection, all requests for a specific IP
destination address will be sent to the same server. This is particularly useful in caching applications, helping to maximize successful cache hits. Best statistical load balancing is achieved when
the IP address destinations of load balanced frames are spread across a broad range of IP subnets.
Minmisses can also be used for Server Load Balancing. When specified for a real server group performing Server Load Balancing, all requests from a specific client will be sent to the same server.
This is useful for applications where client information must be retained on the server between sessions. Server load with this metric becomes most evenly balanced as the number of active clients
increases.
hash
Like minmisses, the hash metric uses IP address information in the client request to select a
server.
For Application Redirection, all requests for a specific IP destination address will be sent to the
same server. This is particularly useful for maximizing successful cache hits.
For Server Load Balancing, all requests from a specific client will be sent to the same server. This
is useful for applications where client information must be retained between sessions.
The hash metric should be used if the statistical load balancing achieved using minmisses is
not as optimal as desired. Although the hash metric can provide more even load balancing at any
given instance, it is not as effective as minmisses when servers leave and reenter service.
If the Load Balancing statistics indicate that one server is processing significantly more requests
over time than other servers, consider using the hash metric.
13N0340, March 2004
Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 245
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
Table 7-5 Real Server Group Metrics (/cfg/slb/group/metric)
Option and Description
leastconns
Least connections. With this option, the number of connections currently open on each real server
is measured in real time. The server with the fewest current connections is considered to be the
best choice for the next client connection request.
This option is the most self-regulating, with the fastest servers typically getting the most connections over time, due to their ability to accept, process, and shut down connections faster than
slower servers.
roundrobin
Round robin. With this option, new connections are issued to each server in turn: the first real
server in this group gets the first connection, the second real server gets the next connection, followed by the third real server, and so on. When all the real servers in this group have received at
least one connection, the issuing process starts over with the first real server.
response
Real server response time. With this option, the switch monitors and records the amount of time
that each real server takes to reply to a health check. The response time is used to adjust the real
server weights. The weights are adjusted so they are inversely proportional to a moving average of
response time.
bandwidth
Bandwidth Metric. With this option, the real server weights are adjusted so they are inversely proportional to the number of octets that the real server processes during a given interval. The higher
the bandwidth used, the smaller is the weight assigned to that server.
NOTE – Under the leastconns and roundrobin metrics, when real servers are configured with weights (see the weight option on page 238), a higher proportion of connections
are given to servers with higher weights. This can improve load balancing among servers of
different performance levels. Weights are not applied when using the hash or minmisses
metrics.
246 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu
13N0340, March 2004
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
/cfg/slb/virt <virtual server number>
Virtual Server SLB Configuration
[Virtual Server
service vip
dname
layr3
ena
dis
del
cur
-
1 Menu]
Virtual Service Menu
Set IP addr of virtual server
Set domain name of virtual server
Enable/disable layer 3 only balancing
Enable virtual server
Disable virtual server
Delete virtual server
Display current virtual configuration
This menu is used for configuring the virtual servers which will be the target for client requests
for Server Load Balancing. Configuring a virtual server requires the following parameters:
Creating a virtual server IP address
Adding TCP/UDP port and real server group
Enabling the virtual server (disabled by default)
Table 7-6 Virtual Server Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/slb/virt)
Command Syntax and Usage
service <virtual port or name>
Displays the Virtual Services Menu. The virtual port name can be a well-known port name, such as
http, ftp, the service number, and so on. To get more information about well-known ports, see the
sport command on page 257. To view services menu options, see page 249.
vip <virtual server IP address>
Sets the IP address of the virtual server using dotted-decimal notation. The virtual server created
within the switch will respond to ARPs and PINGs from network ports as if it was a normal server.
Client requests directed to the virtual server’s IP address will be balanced among the real servers
available to it through real server group assignments.
dname <34 character domain name>|none
Sets the domain name for this virtual server. The domain name typically includes the name of the
company or organization, and the Internet group code (.com, .edu, .gov, .org, and so forth). An
example would be foocorp.com. It does not include the hostname portion (www, www2, ftp, and
so forth). The maximum number of characters that can be used in a domain name is 34. To define
the hostname, see hname below. To clear the dname, specify the name as none.
13N0340, March 2004
Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 247
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
Table 7-6 Virtual Server Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/slb/virt)
Command Syntax and Usage
layr3 disable|enable
Normally, the client IP address is used with the client Layer 4 port number to produce a session
identifier. When the layr3 option is enabled (disabled by default), the switch uses only the client
IP address as the session identifier. It associates all the connections from the same client with the
same real server while any connection exists between them.
This option is necessary for some server applications where state information about the client system is divided across different simultaneous connections, and also in applications where TCP fragments are generated.
If the real server to which the client is assigned becomes unavailable, the Layer 4 software will
allow the client to connect to a different server.
ena
Enables this virtual server. This option activates the virtual server within the switch so that it can
service client requests sent to its defined IP address.
dis
This option disables the virtual server so that it no longer services client requests.
del
This command removes this virtual server from operation within the switch and deletes it from the
Layer 4 switching software configuration. Use this command with caution, as it will delete the
options that have been set for this virtual server.
cur
Displays the current configuration of the specified virtual server.
248 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu
13N0340, March 2004
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
/cfg/slb/virt <server number>/service
<virtual port or name>
Virtual Server Service Configuration
This menu is used for configuring services assigned to a virtual server. The following example
shows a menu for http (port 80) services.
NOTE – Select virtual service port 554 to configure RTSP traffic. See page 253 to view the
menu options for configuring virtual services on port 554 for RTSP.
[Virtual Server
group
rport
hname
httpslb pbind
rcount dbind
udp
frag
nonat
dnsslb ftpp
del
cur
-
13N0340, March 2004
1 http Service Menu]
Set real server group number
Set real port
Set hostname
Set HTTP SLB processing
Set persistent binding type
Set multi response count
Enable/disable delayed binding
Enable/disable UDP balancing
Enable/disable remapping UDP server fragments
Enable/disable only substituting MAC addresses
Enable/disable DNS query load balancing
Enable/disable FTP SLB parsing for virtual server
Delete virtual service
Display current virtual service configuration
Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 249
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
Table 7-7 Virtual Server Service Configuration Options (/cfg/slb/virt/service)
Command Syntax and Usage
group <real server group number (1-64)>
Sets a real server group for this service. The default is set at 1. You will be prompted to enter
the number (1 to 64) of the real server group to add to this service.
rport <real server port (0-65534)>
Defines the real server TCP or UDP port assigned to this service. By default, this is the same
as the virtual port (service virtual port). If rport is configured to be different than the virtual
port defined in /cfg/slb/virt <number>/service <virtual port>, the switch will
map the virtual port to this real port.
hname <hostname>|none
Sets the hostname for a service added. This is used in conjunction with dname (above) to create a full host/domain name for individual services.
The format for this command is: # hname <hostname>
For example, to add a hostname for Web services, you could specify www as the hostname. If
a dname of “foocorp.com” was defined (above), “www.foocorp.com” would be the full host/
domain name for the service.
To clear the hostname for a service, use the command: # hname none
dbind disable|enable
Enables or disables Layer 4 Delayed Binding for TCP service and ports. Enabling this command protects the server from Denial of Service (DoS) attacks. This option is disabled by
default.
httpslb urlslb|host|cookie|browser|urlhash|headerhash|others|none
Load balances on the following applications:
urlslb: Enable or disable URL SLB
host: Enable or disable for virtual hosting
cookie: Enable or disable cookie-based SLB for cookie-based preferential load balanc-
ing. You will be prompted for the following: Cookie name, starting point of the cookie
value, number of bytes to be extracted, enable/disable checking for cookie in URI
browser: Enable or disable SLB, based on browser type
urlhash: Enable or disable URL hashing based on URI
headerhash: Hashes on any HTTP header value.
others: Requires inputs for a particular header field
none: To clear all applications for httpslb, specify none.
You may choose to combine or select applications to load balance using the commands and
and/or or. For example:
httpslb <application>
httpslb <application> and|or <application>
250 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu
13N0340, March 2004
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
Table 7-7 Virtual Server Service Configuration Options (/cfg/slb/virt/service)
Command Syntax and Usage
pbind clientip|cookie<p|r|i>|sslid|disable
Enables or disables persistent bindings for a real server (disabled by default). This may be
necessary for some server applications where state information about the client system is
retained on the server over a series of sequential connections, such as with SSL (Secure
Socket Layer, HTTPS), Web site search results, or multi-page Web forms.
The clientip option uses the client IP address as an identifier, and associates all con-
nections from the same client with the same real server until the client becomes inactive
and the connection is aged out of the binding table. The connection timeout value (set in
the Real Server Menu) is used to control how long these inactive but persistent connections
remain associated with their real servers. When the client resumes activity after their connection has been aged out, they will be connected to the most appropriate real server based
on the load balancing metric.
An alternative approach may be to use the real server group metrics minmisses or hash
(see Server Load Balancing Metrics).
The cookie option uses a cookie defined in the HTTP header or placed in the URI for
hashing. For more information on cookie option, see “Cookie-Based Persistence” on
page 254. For detailed information on Cookie-Based Persistence, see the Persistence chapter in the Alteon OS Application Guide.
The sslid option is for Secure Sockets Layer (SSL), which is a set of protocols built on
top of TCP/IP that allow an application server and user to communicate over an encrypted
HTTP session. SSL provides authentication, non-repudiation, and security. The session ID
is a value comprising 32 random bytes chosen by the SSL server that gets stored in a session hash table. By enabling the sslid option, all subsequent SSL sessions which present
the same session ID will be directed to the same real server.
The disable option enables you to disable presistent binding, if it has previously been
enabled for a particular application.
rcount <response count number (1–16)>
Sets the maximum response counter for cookie-based persistence. The GbE Switch Module
will examine each server response until the cookie is found, or until the maximum count is
reached. The default number is 1.
udp disable|enable|stateless
Enables or disables UDP load balancing for a virtual port (disabled by default). You can configure this option if the service(s) to be load balanced include UDP and TCP: for example,
DNS uses UDP and TCP. In those environments, you must activate UDP balancing for the
particular virtual servers that clients will communicate with using UDP.
When stateless is enabled, no session table entry is created.
Since no session is created, you have to bind to a new server every time.
Note: If applying a filter to the same virtual server IP address on which UDP load balancing is
enabled, disable caching on that filter for optimal performance. For more information, see the
cache command in Table 7-12 on page 261.
13N0340, March 2004
Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 251
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
Table 7-7 Virtual Server Service Configuration Options (/cfg/slb/virt/service)
Command Syntax and Usage
frag disable|enable
Enables or disables remapping server fragments for virtual port. This option is enabled by
default.
nonat disable|enable
Enables or disables substituting only the MAC address of the real server (disabled by default).
This option does not substitute IP addresses. This option is used for Direct Server Return
(DSR) in an one-armed load balancing setup, so that frames returning from server to the client
do not have to pass through the switch.
dnsslb disable|enable
Enables or disables DNS-based Layer 7 content load balancing.
ftpp disable|enable
Enables or disables FTP SLB parsing for this virtual server (disabled by default). When this
option is enabled, the switch modifies the appropriate FTP method/command to support FTP
servers on a private network for both active and passive FTP modes.
To do this, the switch looks deeper into the packet and modifies the port command for active
FTP or the “entering the passive mode” command for passive FTP.
del
This command removes this virtual service from operation within the switch and deletes it
from the Layer 4 switching software configuration. Use this command with caution, as it will
delete the options that have been set for this virtual service.
cur
Displays the current configuration of services on the specified virtual server.
252 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu
13N0340, March 2004
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
/cfg/slb/virt <server number>/service 554
Virtual Server RTSP Configuration
This menu displays virtual services configured on service port 554 for RTSP traffic.
See “/cfg/slb/virt <server number>/service <virtual port or name>” on page 249 to view the
menu options for configuring virtual services on port 80.
[Virtual Server
group
rtspslb del
cur
-
1 rtsp Service Menu]
Set real server group number
Set RTSP URL load balancing type
Delete virtual service
Display current virtual service configuration
Table 7-8 Virtual Server Service Configuration Menu Options
(/cfg/slb/virt 1/service 554)
Command Syntax and Usage
group <real server group number (1-64)>
Sets real server group number.
rtspslb hash|patternMatch|disable
This Layer 7 load balancing option sets the type of rtspslb (hash|patternMatch, thereby
enabling the service), or disables rtspslb service altogether with disable command.
To enable Layer 7 load balancing for RTSP service, group must be configured under the menu /
cfg/slb/virt <virtual server number>/service 80. If you don’t configure group, service 80 and service RTSP will load balance the default group, which is group 1. See command
group in the table “Virtual Server Service Configuration Options (/cfg/slb/virt/service)” on page
250 for details on how to configure group.
del
Deletes this virtual service.
cur
Displays the current virtual service configuration.
13N0340, March 2004
Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 253
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
Cookie-Based Persistence
The cookie option is used to establish cookie-based persistence, and has the following command syntax and usage:
pbind cookie <mode> <name> <offset> <length> <URI>
Each parameter is explained in the following table.
Table 7-9 Command Syntax and Usage for pbind cookie Options
(/cfg/slb/virt/service/pbind cookie)
Option
Description
<mode>
Specify the mode for cookie-based persistence. The following three modes are available:
p: Passive mode. In this mode, the network administrator configures the Web
server to embed a cookie in the server response that the switch looks for in subsequent requests from the same client.
r: Rewrite mode. In active cookie mode (or cookie rewrite mode), the switch,
and not the network administrator, generates the cookie value on behalf of the
server. The switch intercepts this persistence cookie and rewrites the value to
include server-specific information before sending it to the client.
i: Insert mode. When a client sends a request without a cookie, the server
responds with the data, and the switch inserts an Alteon persistence cookie into
the data packet. The switch uses this cookie to bind to the appropriate server.
Insert cookie mode expiration parameters are as follows:
Enter insert-cookie expiration as either:
... a date <MM/dd/yy[@hh:mm]> (e.g. 12/31/01@23:59)
... a duration <days[:hours[:minutes]]> (e.g. 45:30:90)
... or none <return>
<name>
Enter the name of the cookie.
<offset>
Enter the starting point of the cookie value (1-64)
<length>
Enter number of bytes to extract (1-64). For cookie rewrite, the extracting length must be
8 or 16.
<URI>
Look for cookie in the URI. If you want to look for cookie name or value in the URI,
enter e to enable this option. To look for cookie in the HTTP header, enter d to disable
this option.
For more information on Cookie-Based Persistence, see the Alteon OS 20.1 Application
Guide.
254 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu
13N0340, March 2004
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
/cfg/slb/filt <filter number>
SLB Filter Configuration
[Filter 1
Menu]
adv
- Filter Advanced Menu
name
- Set filter name
smac
- Set source MAC address
dmac
- Set destination MAC address
sip
- Set source IP address
smask
- Set source IP mask
dip
- Set destination IP address
dmask
- Set destination IP mask
proto
- Set IP protocol
sport
- Set source TCP/UDP port or range
dport
- Set destination TCP/UDP port or range
action - Set action
group
- Set real server group for redirection
rport
- Set real server port for redirection
nat
- Set which addresses are network address translated
vlan
- Set vlan id
invert - Enable/disable filter inversion
ena
- Enable filter
dis
- Disable filter
del
- Delete filter
cur
- Display current filter configuration
The switch supports up to 1024 traffic filters. Each filter can be configured to allow, deny, redirect or perform Network Address Translation on traffic according to a variety of address and
protocol specifications, and each physical switch port can be configured to use any combination of filters. This command is disabled by default.
There are several options available in the Filter Advanced Menu (/cfg/slb/filt/adv,
page 260) that can be used to provide more information through syslog. The types of information include:
IP protocol
TCP/UDP ports
TCP flags
ICMP message type
13N0340, March 2004
Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 255
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
The following parameters are required for filtering:
Set the address, masks, and/or protocol that will be affected by the filter
Set the filter action (allow, deny, redirect, nat)
Enable the filter
Add the filter to a switch port
Enable filtering on the GbE Switch Module port
Table 7-10 Filter Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/slb/filt)
Command Syntax and Usage
adv
Displays the Filter Advanced Menu. To view menu options, see page 260.
name <31 character name>|none
Allows the user to assign a name to a filter.
smac <MAC address (such as, 00:60:cf:40:56:00)>|any
Sets the source MAC address. The default is any.
dmac <MAC address (such as, 00:60:cf:40:56:00)>|any
Sets the destination MAC address. The default is any.
sip <IP address>|any
If defined, traffic with this source IP address will be affected by this filter. Specify an IP
address in dotted decimal notation, or any. A range of IP addresses is produced when used
with the smask below. The default is any if the source MAC address is any.
smask <<IP subnet mask (such as, 255.255.255.0>
This IP address mask is used with the sip to select traffic which this filter will affect. See
details below for more information on producing address ranges. For more information, see
“Defining IP Address Ranges for Filters” on page 259.
dip <IP address>|any
If defined, traffic with this destination IP address will be affected by this filter. Specify an IP
address in dotted decimal notation, or any. A range of IP addresses is produced when used
with the dmask below. The default is any if the destination MAC address is any. For more
information, see “Defining IP Address Ranges for Filters” on page 259.
dmask <IP subnet mask (such as, 255.255.255.0)>
This IP address mask is used with the dip to select traffic which this filter will affect.
256 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu
13N0340, March 2004
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
Table 7-10 Filter Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/slb/filt)
Command Syntax and Usage
proto <number>|<name>|any
If defined, traffic from the specified protocol is affected by this filter. Specify the protocol
number, name, or “any”. The default is any. Listed below are some of the well-known protocols.
Number
1
2
6
17
89
112
Name
icmp
igmp
tcp
udp
ospf
vrrp
sport <name>|<port>|<port>-<port>|any
If defined, traffic with the specified TCP or UDP source port will be affected by this filter.
Specify the port number, range, name, or “any”. The default is any. Listed below are some
of the well-known ports::
Number
20
21
22
23
25
37
42
43
53
69
70
79
80
109
110
Name
ftp-data
ftp
ssh
telnet
smtp
time
name
whois
domain
tftp
gopher
finger
http
pop2
pop3
dport <name>|<port>|<port>-<port>|any
If defined, traffic with the specified real server TCP or UDP destination port will be affected
by this filter. Specify the port number, range, name, or “any”, just as with sport above. The
default is set at any.
13N0340, March 2004
Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 257
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
Table 7-10 Filter Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/slb/filt)
Command Syntax and Usage
action allow|deny|redir|nat
Specify the action this filter takes:
allow
deny
redir
nat
Allow the frame to pass (by default).
Discard frames that fit this filter’s profile. This can be used for building basic
security profiles.
Redirect frames that fit this filter’s profile, such as for web cache redirection. In
addition, Layer 4 processing must be activated (see the /cfg/slb/on command on page 235).
Perform generic Network Address Translation (NAT). This can be used to map
the source or destination IP address and port information of a private network
scheme to/from the advertised network IP address and ports. This is used in conjunction with the nat option below and can also be combined with proxies.
group <real server group number (1-64)>
This option applies only when redir is specified at the filter action. Define a real server
group (1 to 16) to which redirected traffic will be sent. The default is group 1
rport <real server port (0-65535)>
This option applies only when redir is specified at the filter action. This defines the real
server TCP or UDP port to which redirected traffic will be sent. For valid Layer 4 health
checks, this must be configured whenever TCP protocol traffic is redirected. Also, if transparent proxies are used for Network Address Translation (NAT) on the GbE Switch Module (see
the pip option in Table 7-17 on page 266), rport must be configured for all Application
Redirection filters. The default is set at 0.
nat source|dest
When nat is set as the filter action (see above), this command specifies whether Network
Address Translation (NAT) is performed on the source or the destination information. Destination (dest) is set as the default filter. If source is specified, the frame’s source IP address
(sip) and port number (sport) are replaced with the dip and dport values. If dest is
specified, the frame’s destination IP address (dip) and port number (dport) are replaced
with the sip and sport values.
vlan <VLAN ID (1 - 4095)>|any
Sets the ID of the VLAN that is to be filtered. This option allows you to match the VLAN ID
of the switch against the VLAN ID of the incoming packet. The default is any, which means
the switch will match any VLAN ID of the incoming packet
This command allows filters to be configured on per VLAN basis, and applies a filter to a
VLAN that already has been configured. A VLAN has a set of member ports. But by applying
this filter to a VLAN, the filter does not get applied to all the member ports of this VLAN.
You have to manually add the filter to the port.
inver disable|enable
Inverts the filter logic. If the conditions of the filter are met, don’t act. If the conditions for the
filter are not met, perform the assigned action. This option is disabled by default.
258 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu
13N0340, March 2004
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
Table 7-10 Filter Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/slb/filt)
Command Syntax and Usage
ena
Enables this filter.
dis
Disables this filter.
del
Deletes this filter.
cur
Displays the current configuration of the filter.
Defining IP Address Ranges for Filters
You can specify a range of IP address for filtering both the source and/or destination IP address
for traffic. When a range of IP addresses is needed, the sip (source) or dip (destination)
defines the base IP address in the desired range, and the smask (source) or dmask (destination) is the mask which is applied to produce the range.
For example, to determine if a client request’s destination IP address should be redirected to
the cache servers attached to a particular switch, the destination IP address is masked (bitwise
AND) with the dmask and then compared to the dip.
As another example, you could configure the switch with two filters so that each would handle
traffic filtering for one half of the Internet. To do this, you could define the following parameters:
Table 7-11 Filtering IP Address Ranges
Filter
Internet Address Range
dip
dmask
#1
0.0.0.0 - 127.255.255.255
0.0.0.0
128.0.0.0
#2
128.0.0.0 - 255.255.255.255
128.0.0.0
128.0.0.0
13N0340, March 2004
Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 259
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
/cfg/slb/filt <filter number>/adv
Advanced Filter Configuration
[Filter 2 Advanced Menu]
tcp
- TCP Advanced Menu
ip
- IP Advanced Menu
layer7
- Layer 7 Advanced Menu
icmp
- Set ICMP message type
tmout
- Set NAT session timeout
idshash - Set hash parameter for intrusion detection SLB
thash
- Set hash parameter for Filter
proxy
- Enable/disable client proxy
cache
- Enable/disable caching sessions that match filter
log
- Enable/disable logging
linklb
- Enable/disable WAN link load balancing
dbind
- Enable/disable delayed binding for redirection
cur
- Display current advanced filter configuration
Table 7-12 Advanced Filter Menu (/cfg/slb/filt/adv)
Command Syntax and Usage
tcp
Displays the TCP Flags Advanced Menu. To view menu options, see page 262.
ip
Sets IP advanced menu. To view menu options, see page 263.
layer7
Displays the Layer 7 Advanced Menu. To view menu options, see page 264.
icmp <number>|<type; "icmp list" for list>|any
Sets the ICMP message type. The default is set at any. For a list of ICMP message types, see
Table 7-16 on page 265. For a detailed description of filtering and ICMP, see the Alteon OS 20.1
Application Guide.
tmout <even number of minutes, 4-30>
Sets the Network Address Translation (NAT) session timeout in an even number of minutes (4–
30). The default is set at 4 minutes.
idshash sip|dip|both
Sets the hash metric parameter for Intrusion Detection System Server Load Balancing
260 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu
13N0340, March 2004
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
Table 7-12 Advanced Filter Menu (/cfg/slb/filt/adv)
Command Syntax and Usage
thash auto|sip|dip|both|sip+sport
Allows you to choose hash parameter to use for filter redirection. The Default is auto. The sip
option allows you to perform tunable hash on source IP address for this filter. The option dip
allows you to perform tunable hash on destination IP address for this filter. The option both
allows you to perform tunable hash on both source IP address and the destination IP address at the
same time. The option sip+sport allows you to perform tunable hash on both source IP address
and source port at the same time.
proxy disable|enable
Enables or disables client proxy. This option applies only when redir or nat is specified as the
filter action. Enable or disable proxy IP address translation for traffic matching the filter criteria.
By default, this is enabled. If disabled, any proxy defined for the switch port using the pip command (see page 266) is not performed for traffic meeting the filter criteria. This is useful when certain traffic must retain original IP address information, or when other forms of translation (such as
Application Redirection or NAT) are preferred.
cache disable|enable
Enables or disables caching sessions that match the filter. Exercise caution while applying cacheenabled and cache-disabled filters to the same switch port. A cache-enabled filter creates a session
entry in the switch, so that the switch can bypass checking for subsequent frames that match the
same criteria. Cache is enabled by default.
Note: Cache should be disabled if applying a filter to virtual server IP address while performing
UDP load balancing (see “udp disable|enable|stateless” on page 251).
log disable|enable
Enables or disables logging filter messages. This option is disabled by default.
linklb disable|enable
Enables or disables WAN Link Load Balancing. By default, this option is disabled.
dbind disable|enable
Enables or disables delayed binding for redirection on this filter.
cur
Displays the current advanced filter configuration.
13N0340, March 2004
Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 261
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
/cfg/slb/filt <filter number>/adv/tcp
Advanced Filter TCP Configuration
[TCP advanced
urg
ack
psh
rst
syn
fin
ackrst
tcplim
maxconn
cur
menu Menu]
- Enable/disable TCP URG matching
- Enable/disable TCP ACK matching
- Enable/disable TCP PSH matching
- Enable/disable TCP RST matching
- Enable/disable TCP SYN matching
- Enable/disable TCP FIN matching
- Enable/disable TCP ACK or RST matching
- Enable/disable TCP connection rate limiting
- Set maximum connections for TCP rate limiting
- Display current TCP configuration
These commands can be used to configure packet filtering for specific TCP flags.
Table 7-13 Advanced Filter TCP Menu (/cfg/slb/filt/adv/tcp)
Command Syntax and Usage
urg disable|enable
Enables or disables TCP URG (urgent) flag matching. By default, this option is disabled.
ack disable|enable
Enables or disables TCP ACK (acknowledgement) flag matching. By default, this option is disabled.
psh disable|enable
Enables or disables TCP PSH (push) flag matching. By default, this option is disabled.
rst disable|enable
Enables or disables TCP RST (reset) flag matching. By default, this option is disabled.
syn disable|enable
Enables or disables TCP SYN (synchronize) flag matching. By default, this option is disabled.
fin disable|enable
Enables or disables TCP FIN (finish) flag matching. By default, this option is disabled.
ackrst disable|enable
Enables or disables TCP acknowledgement or reset flag matching. By default, this option is
disabled.
tcplim disable|enable
Enables or disables TCP connection rate limiting. By default, this option is disabled.
262 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu
13N0340, March 2004
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
Table 7-13 Advanced Filter TCP Menu (/cfg/slb/filt/adv/tcp)
Command Syntax and Usage
maxconn <number of connections in units of 10 (0-255)>
Sets the maximum limit for new TCP connections in units of 10. To set the maximum number of
connections (2,550), enter 250. To set the minimum number of connections (10, from the same
user), enter 1.
The default is 10 (100 connections).
cur
Displays the current Access Control List TCP filter configuration.
/cfg/slb/filt <filter number> /adv/ip
IP Advanced Menu
[IP advanced menu]
tos
- Set IP Type of Service
tmask
- Set IP TOS mask
newtos - Set new IP TOS
option - Enable/disable IP option matching
cur
- Display current IP configuration
Table 7-14 IP Advanced Menu Options (/cfg/slb/filt #/adv/ip)
Command Syntax and Usage
tos <0-255>
Sets IP type of service (ToS) and the value of the type of service. For more information on ToS,
refer to RFC 1340 and 1349.
tmask <0-255>
Sets IP type of service mask.
newtos <0-255>
Sets new IP type of service.
option disable|enable
Enables or disables IP option matching.
cur
Displays current advanced IP settings for the selected filter.
13N0340, March 2004
Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 263
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
/cfg/slb/filt <filter number> /adv/layer7
Layer 7 Advanced Menu
[Layer 7 Advanced Menu]
addstr
- Add string for layer 7 filtering
remstr
- Remove string for layer 7 filtering
rdsnp
- Enable/disable WAP RADIUS Snooping
ftpa
- Enable/disable active FTP NAT
l7lkup
- Enable/disable Layer 7 content lookup
cur
- Display current layer 7 configuration
Table 7-15 Layer 7 Advanced Menu Options (/cfg/slb/filt #/adv/layer7)
Command Syntax and Usage
addstr <string id (1-512)>
Adds the string ID to this filter for L7 filtering. The string is defined under: /cfg/slb/
layer7/slb/add.
remstr <string id (1-512)>
Removes the string ID for Layer 7 filtering. The string is defined under: /cfg/slb/layer7/
slb/add.
rdsnp disable|enable
Enables or disables WAP RADIUS Snooping capability of a filter. By default, this option is disabled.
ftpa disable|enable
Enables or disables active FTP Client Network Address Translation (NAT). When a client in active
FTP mode sends a PORT command to a remote FTP server, the switch will look into the data part
of the frame and replace the client 's private IP address with a proxy IP (PIP) address. The real
server port (RPORT) will be replaced with a proxy port (PPORT), that is PIP:PPORT. By default,
this option is disabled.
l7lkup
Enable/disable Layer 7 content lookup.
cur
Displays current advanced Layer 7 settings for the selected filter.
264 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu
13N0340, March 2004
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
ICMP Message Types
The following ICMP message types are used with the /cfg/slb/filt/adv/icmp command. You can list all ICMP message types with the /cfg/slb/filt/adv/icmp list
command.
Table 7-16 ICMP Message Types
Type # Message Type
Description
0
echorep
ICMP echo reply
3
destun
ICMP destination unreachable
4
quench
ICMP source quench
5
redir
ICMP redirect
8
echoreq
ICMP echo request
9
rtradv
ICMP router advertisement
10
rtrsol
ICMP router solicitation
11
timex
ICMP time exceeded
12
param
ICMP parameter problem
13
timereq
ICMP timestamp request
14
timerep
ICMP timestamp reply
15
inforeq
ICMP information request
16
inforep
ICMP information reply
17
maskreq
ICMP address mask request
18
maskrep
ICMP address mask reply
13N0340, March 2004
Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 265
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
/cfg/slb/port <port alias or number>
Port SLB Configuration
[SLB port INT1 Menu]
client - Enable/disable client processing
server - Enable/disable server processing
rts
- Enable/disable RTS processing
hotstan - Enable/disable hot-standby processing
intersw - Enable/disable inter-switch processing
proxy
- Enable/disable use of PIP for ingress traffic
filt
- Enable/disable filtering
add
- Add filter to port
rem
- Remove filter from port
idslb
- Enable/disable intrusion detection server load balancing
cur
- Display current port configuration
Alteon OS switch software allows you to enable or disable processing independently for each
type of Layer 4 traffic (client and server) on a per port basis, expanding your topology options.
NOTE – When changing the filters on a given port, it may take some time before the port session information is updated so that the filter changes take effect. To make port filter changes
take effect immediately, clear the session binding table for the port (see the clear command
in Table 8-3 on page 284).
Table 7-17 Port Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/slb/port)
Command Syntax and Usage
client disable|enable
For Server Load Balancing, the port can be enabled or disabled to process client Layer 4 traffic. Ports
configured to process client request traffic bind servers to clients and provide address translation
from the virtual server IP address to the real server IP address, re-mapping virtual server IP addresses
and port values to real server IP addresses and ports. Traffic not associated with virtual servers is
switched normally. Maximizing the number of these ports on the Layer 4 switch will improve the
switch’s potential for effective Server Load Balancing. This option is disabled by default.
server disable|enable
Ports configured to provide real server responses to client requests require real servers to be connected to the Layer 4 switch, directly or through a hub, router, or another switch. When server processing is enabled, the switch port re-maps real server IP addresses and Layer 4 port values to
virtual server IP addresses and Layer 4 ports. Traffic not associated with virtual servers is switched
normally. This option is disabled by default.
266 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu
13N0340, March 2004
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
Table 7-17 Port Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/slb/port)
rts disable|enable
Enables or disables Return to Sender (RTS) load balancing on this port. This option is used for
firewall load balancing or VPN load balancing applications. Enable rts on all client-side ports to
ensure that traffic ingresses and egresses through the same port. This option is disabled by default.
For more information on using rts, see the “Firewall Load Balancing” and “VPN Load Balancing” chapters in the Alteon OS 20.1 Application Guide.
hotstan disable|enable
Enables or disables hot-standby processing. Use this option and the intersw option in conjunction with VRRP hot-standby failover. This option is disabled by default.
intersw disable|enable
Enables or disables inter-switch processing. This option is enabled for ports connected to a peer
switch and is disabled by default.
proxy disable|enable
Enables or disables a proxy for traffic that ingresses this port. When the PIP is defined, client
address information in Layer 4 requests is replaced with this proxy IP address.
In Server Load Balancing applications, this forces response traffic to return through the switch,
rather than around it, as is possible in complex routing environments.
Proxies are also useful for Application Redirection and Network Address Translation (NAT).
When pip is used with Application Redirection filters, each filter’s rport parameter must also
be defined (see rport on page 256). This option is disabled by default.
filt disable|enable
Enables or disables filtering on this port. Enabling the filter sets up the Real Server to look into the
VPN session table. This option is disabled by default.
add <filter ID (1 to 1024)|block of IDs (first-last)>
Adds a filter or a block of filters for use on this port. Enter filter ID (1 to 1024) or a contiguous
block of filter IDs. For example, 1-100.
rem <filter ID (1 to 1024)|block of IDs (first-last)>
Removes a filter or a block of filters from use on this port. Enter filter ID (1 to 1024) or a
contiguous block of filter IDs. For example, 1-100.
idslb disable|enable
Enables or disables Intrusion Detection System Server Load Balancing for this port. This option is
disabled by default.
cur
Displays current system parameters.
13N0340, March 2004
Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 267
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
/cfg/slb/layer7
Layer 7 SLB Resource Definition Menu
[Layer 7 Resource Definition Menu]
redir
- Web Cache Redirection Menu
slb
- Server Load Balancing Menu
dbindtm - Set timeout for incomplete delayed binding connections
cur
- Display current Layer 7 configuration
Table 7-18 Layer 7 Resource Definition Menu Options (/cfg/slb/layer7)
Command Syntax and Usage
redir
Displays the Web Cache Redirection Menu. To view menu options, see page 269.
slb
Displays the Server Load Balancing Menu. To view menu options, see page 270.
dbindtm <10-60 seconds>
Sets the timeout for incomplete delayed binding connections.
cur
Displays the current Layer 7 configuration.
268 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu
13N0340, March 2004
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
/cfg/slb/layer7/redir
Web Cache Redirection Configuration
[Web Cache Redirection Menu]
urlal
- Enable/disable auto-ALLOW for non-GETs to origin servers
cookie - Enable/disable auto-ALLOW for Cookie to origin servers
nocache - Enable/disable no-cache control header to origin servers
hash
- Enable/disable URL hashing based on URI
header - Enable/disable server loadbalance based on HTTP header
cur
- Display current WCR configuration
Table 7-19 Web Cache Redirection Menu Options (/cfg/slb/layer7/redir)
Command Syntax and Usage
urlal disable|enable
Enables or disables auto-ALLOW for non-GETs to origin servers.
If this command is enabled, the switch will redirect all non-GET requests to the origin server.
If this command is disabled, the switch will compare the URI against the expression table to
determine whether all non-GET requests should be redirected to a cache server or origin server.
This option is enabled by default.
cookie disable|enable
Enables or disables auto-ALLOW for cookie to origin servers.
If this command is enabled, the switch will redirect all requests that contain Cookie: in the
HTTP header to the origin server.
If this command is disabled, the switch will compare the URI against the expression table to
determine whether it should redirect all requests that contain Cookie: in the HTTP header to a
cache server or origin server.
This option is disabled by default.
nocache disable|enable
Enables or disables no-cache control header to origin servers.
If this command is enabled, the switch will redirect all requests that contain Cache-Control: no-
cache in HTTP/1.1 header, or Pragma: no-cache in HTTP/1.0 header to the origin server.
If this command is disabled, the switch will compare the URI against the expression table to
determine whether it should redirect requests that contain Cache-Control: no-cache in HTTP/
1.1 header, or Pragma: no-cache in HTTP/1.0 header to a cache server or origin server.
This option is enabled by default.
hash disable|enable <number (1-255)>
Enables or disables URL hashing based on the URI.
If hashing is enabled, you can set the length of URI that will be used to hash into the cache
server.
If hashing is disabled, the switch will only use the host header field to calculate the hash key.
This option is disabled by default.
13N0340, March 2004
Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 269
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
Table 7-19 Web Cache Redirection Menu Options (/cfg/slb/layer7/redir)
Command Syntax and Usage
header disable|enable
Enables or disables server load balancing based on HTTP header. This option is disabled by
default.
cur
Displays the current URL expression table.
/cfg/slb/layer7/slb
Server Load Balance Resource Configuration Menu
[Server Loadbalance Resource Menu]
message - Set HTTP error message
add
- Add SLB string for load balance
rename - Rename SLB string for load balance
rem
- Remove SLB string for load balance
cur
- Display current configuration
Table 7-20 Server Load Balance Resource Menu Options (/cfg/slb/layer7/slb)
Command Syntax and Usage
message <64 byte error message>
Sets the message that will be displayed when an error occurs. The default message is “No available
server to handle this request.”
add <SLB string>
Adds the SLB string for load balancing.
rename <SLB string ID> <SLB string>
Renames the SLB string for load balancing.
rem <SLB string ID>
Removes the SLB string from load balancing.
cur
Displays the current configuration of SLB string.
270 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu
13N0340, March 2004
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
/cfg/slb/wap
WAP Configuration
[WAP Options Menu]
tpcp
- Enable/disable WAP TPCP external notification
debug
- WAP debug level
cur
- Display current WAP configuration
Table 7-21 WAP Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/slb/wap)
Command Syntax and Usage
tpcp disable|enable
Enables or disables the TPCP external notification for Add/Delete session requests. This option
is disabled by default.
debug <wap debug level (0-9)>
Sets the debug level for tracing the WAP related messages. The default is set at 0.
cur
Displays the current WAP configuration
13N0340, March 2004
Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 271
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
/cfg/slb/sync
Synchronize Peer Switch Configuration
[Config Synchronization Menu]
peer
- Synch peer switch menu
filt
- Enable or disable syncing filter configuration
ports
- Enable or disable syncing port configuration
prios
- Enable or disable syncing VRRP priorities
pips
- Enable or disable syncing proxy IP addresses
reals
- Enable/disable syncing real server configuration
state
- Enable or disable syncing persistent session state
update - Set stateful failover update period
cur
- Display current Layer 4 sync configuration
To synchronize the configuration between two switches, a peer must be configured and
enabled on each switch. Switches being synchronized must use the same administrator password. Peers are sent SLB, FILT, and VRRP configuration updates using /oper/slb/
synch.
Table 7-22 Synchronization Menu Options (/cfg/slb/sync)
Command Syntax and Usage
peer <peer switch number (1-2)>
Displays the Sync Peer Switch Menu. This option is enabled by default. To view menu options, see
page 273.
filt disable|enable
Enables or disables synchronizing filter configuration.
ports disable|enable
Enables or disables synchronizing Layer 4 port configuration. This option is enabled by default.
prios disable|enable
Enables or disables syncing VRRP priorities. This option is enabled by default.
pips disable|enable
Enables or disables synchronizing proxy IP addresses. This option is disabled by default.
reals
Enables or disables synchronizing real server configuration. This option is disabled by default.
state disable|enable
Enables or disables stateful failover for synchronizing the persistent session state. This option is
disabled by default.
272 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu
13N0340, March 2004
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
Table 7-22 Synchronization Menu Options (/cfg/slb/sync)
Command Syntax and Usage
update <seconds, 1–60>
Sets the stateful failover update interval. The active server sends update packets of persistent binding entries to the backup switch at the specified update interval. The default value is 30 seconds.
cur
Displays the current Layer 4 synchronization configuration.
/cfg/slb/sync/peer <peer switch number>
Peer Switch Configuration
[Peer Switch 1 Menu]
addr
- Set peer switch IP address
ena
- Enable peer switch
dis
- Disable peer switch
del
- Delete peer switch
cur
- Display current peer switch configuration
To synchronize the configuration between two switches, a peer must be configured and
enabled on each switch. Switches being synchronized must use the same administrator password.
Table 7-23 Peer Switch Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/slb/sync/peer)
Command Syntax and Usage
addr <IP address>
Sets the peer switch IP address. The default is 0.0.0.0
ena
Enables the peer for this switch. By default, this option is disabled.
dis
Disables the peer for this switch.
del
Deletes the peer for this switch
cur
Displays the current peer switch configuration.
13N0340, March 2004
Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 273
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
/cfg/slb/adv
Advanced Layer 4 Configuration
[Layer 4 Advanced Menu]
synatk
- SYN Attack Detection Menu
imask
- Set virtual and real IP address mask
mnet
- Set managment network
mmask
- Set management subnet mask
pmask
- Set persistent mask
timewin - Set time window for TCP rate limiting
holddur - Set hold down duration for TCP rate limiting
submac
- Enable/Disable Source MAC address substitution
direct
- Enable/disable Direct Access Mode
grace
- Enable/disable graceful real server failure
matrix
- Enable/disable Virtual Matrix Architecture
tpcp
- Enable/disable Transparent Proxy Cache Protocol
fastage - Session table fast-age (1 sec) period bit shift
slowage - Session table slow-age (2 min) period bit shift
cur
- Display current Layer 4 advanced configuration
Table 7-24 Layer 4 Advanced Menu Options (/cfg/slb/adv)
Command Syntax and Usage
synatk
Displays SYN Attack Detection Menu. To view menu options, see page 276.
imask <IP subnet mask (such as 255.255.255.0)>
Configures the real and virtual server IP address mask using dotted decimal notation. The default
is 255.255.255.255.
mnet <IP address>
If defined, management traffic with this source IP address will be allowed direct (non-Layer 4)
access to the real servers. Specify an IP address in dotted decimal notation. A range of IP addresses
is produced when used with the mmask option.
mmask <IP subnet mask (such as 255.255.255.0)>
This IP address mask is used with the mnet to select management traffic which is allowed direct
access to real servers. The default is 255.255.255.255.
pmask <IP subnet mask (such as 255.255.255.0)>
Sets persistent mask. The default is 255.255.255.255.
274 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu
13N0340, March 2004
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
Table 7-24 Layer 4 Advanced Menu Options (/cfg/slb/adv)
Command Syntax and Usage
timewin <multiple of fastage period (1-65535)>
Sets the parameter for time window for TCP rate limiting, which is a multiple of the fastage
period. For example, if the fastage parameter is 2 seconds, and the timewin is 3, then the
resulting time window is 6 seconds.
holddur <multiple of slowage period (1-65535)>
This command configures the hold down duration, which is a multiple of slowage. Hold down
(blocking of new TCP connections) occurs when the number of received SYN packets exceeds the
threshold of a pre-defined time window. For example, the parameter of slowage is 2 minutes,
and holddur is 5, then the resulting hold down duration is 10 minutes.
submac disable|enable
Enables or disables Source MAC address substitution. Typically, the source MAC is not modified
for the packets going to the servers in an SLB environment. But if you enable this command, the
switch will substitute the source MAC address (for the packets going to the server) with the mac
address of the switch.
direct disable|enable
Enable/disables Direct Access Mode to real servers/services. This option also allows any virtual
server to load balance any real server. By default, this option is disabled.
grace disable|enable
Enables or disables graceful real server failure. Allows existing connections to newly failed server
to gracefully continue. By default, this option is disabled.
matrix disable|enable
Enables or disables the use of Virtual Matrix Architecture on the GbE Switch Module. By default,
this option is enabled.
tpcp disable|enable
Enables or disables the TPCP (Transparent Proxy Cache Protocol). This command is used for
security reasons—the UDP port can be closed. By default, this option is disabled.
fastage <shift the fast-age (1sec) period 0-7 bits>
Controls how frequently a fastage scan is performed. The default interval is two seconds. Each
incremental increase of the value doubles the length of the interval.
The fastage scan is used to remove TCP sessions that have been closed with a FIN and sessions
that have been identified by the slowage scan as idle for the maximum allowed period. If a large
value of fastage is used, a session can remain in the session table for a few minutes. The default
is 0.
13N0340, March 2004
Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 275
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
Table 7-24 Layer 4 Advanced Menu Options (/cfg/slb/adv)
Command Syntax and Usage
slowage <shift the slow-age (2min) period 0-15 bits>
Controls how frequently a slowage scan is performed. The default interval is two minutes. Each
incremental increase of the value doubles the length of the interval. (Value is set in bits rather than
seconds, which causes the time to double per increment).
The slowage scan is used to remove idle or non-TCP sessions from the session at the specified
intervals. If a large value of slowage is used, a session can remain in the session table for months.
The default is 0.
cur
Displays the current Layer 4 advanced configuration.
/cfg/slb/adv/synatk
SYN Attack Detection Configuration
[SYN Attack Detection Menu]
intrval - Set SYN attack detection interval
thrshld - Set SYN attack alarm threshold
cur
- Display current SYN attack detection configuration
Table 7-25 SYN Attack Detection Menu Options (/cfg/slb/adv/synatk)
Command Syntax and Usage
intrval <SYN attack check interval in seconds (2-3600)>
Sets the interval of SYN attack inspection.
thrshld <SYN attack alarm threshold (new half-open sessions/second) (1-100000)>
Sets the threshold of SYN attack alarm.
cur
Displays the current SYN attack detection configuration.
276 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu
13N0340, March 2004
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
/cfg/slb/advhc
Advanced Layer 4 Health Check
[Layer 4 Advanced Health Check Menu]
script
- Scriptable Health Check Menu
waphc
- WAP Health Check Menu
aphttp
- Enable/disable Allow HTTP Health Check on any port
ldapver - LDAP version
secret
- Set RADIUS secret
minter
- Set interval of response and bandwidth metric updates
cur
- Display current Layer 4 advanced health check
configuration
Table 7-26 Advanced Health Check Menu Options (/cfg/slb/advhc)
Command Syntax and Usage
script <health script number (1-8)>
Displays the Scriptable Health Check Menu. To view menu options, see page 278.
waphc
Displays the WAP Health Check Menu. To view menu options, see page 279.
aphttp disable|enable
Enables or disables HTTP health checks on any port. By default, this option is disabled. When disabled, you can use HTTP health checks only for HTTP service. Enabling it will allow you to use it
on any port, like HTTPs.
ldapver <LDAP version>
Sets the LDAP version to 2 or 3. The default is 2.
secret <1-32 character secret>
To perform application health checking to a RADIUS server, the network administrator must configure two parameters in the switch: the /cfg/slb/advhc/secret value and the cntnt
parameter with a username:password value. The secret value is a field of up to 32 alphanumeric
characters that is used by the switch to encrypt a password during the RSA Message Digest Algorithm (MD5) and by the RADIUS server to decrypt the password during verification. The default
is none.
minter <number of seconds between updates (1-256)>
This command sets the interval of response and bandwidth metric updates. The default is set at 10.
cur
Displays the current Layer 4 advanced health check configuration.
13N0340, March 2004
Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 277
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
/cfg/slb/advhc/script <health script
number>
Scriptable Health Checks Configuration
[Health Script 1 Menu]
open
- Add open command to end of script
send
- Add send command to end of script
expect - Add expect command to end of script
close
- Add close command to end of script
rem
- Remove last command from script
del
- Delete script
cur
- Display current script configuration
The Health Script menu provides commands that can be used to define the health “script.” The
total number of characters cannot exceed 1024 bytes. Up to eight scripts can be configured.
Table 7-27 Scriptable Health Check Menu Options (/cfg/slb/advhc/script)
Command Syntax and Usage
open <real port or name (such as: http)>
Sets the TCP port to be opened.
send <text string>
Sends an ASCII string through open TCP port. For example, an HTTP request, such as,
"GET /default.asp HTTP/1.1\\r\\nHOST:
www.alteon.com\\r\\n\\r\\n."
expect <text string>
Expects an ASCII string for successful health check on open TCP port, such as an HTTP response:
HTTP/1.1 200
close
Closes TCP connection.
rem
Removes the last entered line from the script.
del
Deletes the current script.
cur
Lists the current script configuration.
278 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu
13N0340, March 2004
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
/cfg/slb/advhc/waphc
WAP Health Check Configuration
[WAP Health Check Menu]
wspport - WSP port number to health check
wtlsprt - WTLS port number to health check
offset - Offset in received WSP packet
sndcnt - Content to be sent to the WAP gateway
rcvcnt - Content to be received from the WAP gateway
cur
- Display current WAP health check configuration
Table 7-28 WAP Health Check Menu Options (/cfg/slb/advhc/waphc)
Command Syntax and Usage
wspport <port number (0-65534)>
Enter the port number on which WSP health checks will be performed. The default port number is
9200.
wtlsprt <port number (0-65534)>
Enter the port number on which WTLS health checks will be performed. The default port number
is 9203.
offset <Offset in the received WSP packet (0-256)>
Enter the offset value content of the received WSP packages. An offset value of 0 (default) sets the
switch to start comparisons from the beginning of the content of the received packet.
sndcnt <send content as a hexadecimal string>
Enter a hexidecimal string that represents a connectionless WSP request to a WSP gateway. This
string will be delivered to the WSP gateway.
rcvcnt <receive content as a hexadecimal string>
Enter a hexadecimal string that represents the content that the switch expects to receive from the
WSP gateway.
cur
Displays the current WAP Health Check configuration.
13N0340, March 2004
Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 279
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
/cfg/slb/pip
Proxy IP Address Configuration Menu
[Proxy IP Address Menu]
pip1
- Set Proxy IP address for odd-numbered ports
pip2
- Set Proxy IP address for even-numbered ports
pgarp
- Enable/disable Proxy Ip Gratuitous ARP
cur
- Display current Proxy IP address configuration
Table 7-29 Proxy IP Address Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/slb/pip)
Command Syntax and Usage
pip1 <IP address>
Sets the proxy IP address for odd-numbered ports using dotted decimal notation. When the pip is
defined, client address information in Layer 4 requests is replaced with this proxy IP address.
pip2 <IP address>
Sets the proxy IP address for even-numbered ports.
pgarp
Enable or disable Proxy IP Gratuitous ARP.
cur
Display current Proxy IP address configuration.
280 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu
13N0340, March 2004
CHAPTER 8
The Operations Menu
The Operations Menu is generally used for commands that affect switch performance immediately, but do not alter permanent switch configurations. For example, you can use the Operations Menu to immediately disable a port (without the need to apply or save the change), with
the understanding that when the switch is reset, the port returns to its normally configured
operation.
/oper
Operations Menu
[Operations Menu]
port
- Operational Port Menu
slb
- Operational Server Load Balancing Menu
vrrp
- Operational Virtual Router Redundancy Menu
ip
- Operational IP Menu
clrlog - Clear syslog messages
The commands of the Operations Menu enable you to alter switch operational characteristics
without affecting switch configuration.
Table 8-1 Operations Menu Options (/oper)
Command Syntax and Usage
port <port alias or number (1-20)>
Displays the Operational Port Menu. To view menu options, see page 283.
slb
Displays the Operational Layer 4 Menu. To view menu options, see page 284.
vrrp
Displays the Operational Virtual Router Redundancy Menu. To view menu options, see page 285.
281
13N0340, March 2004
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
Table 8-1 Operations Menu Options (/oper)
Command Syntax and Usage
ip
Displays the IP Operations Menu, which has one sub-menu/option, the Operational Border Gateway Protocol Menu. To view menu options, see page 285.
clrlog
Clears all Syslog messages.
282 Chapter 8: The Operations Menu
13N0340, March 2004
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
/oper/port <port alias or number>
Operations-Level Port Options
[Operations Port INT1 Menu]
rmon
- Enable/Disable RMON for port
ena
- Enable port
dis
- Disable port
cur
- Current port state
Operations-level port options are used for temporarily disabling or enabling a port, and for
changing Remote Monitoring (RMON) status on a port.
Table 8-2 Operations-Level Port Menu Options (/oper/port)
Command Syntax and Usage
rmon disable|enable
Temporarily enables/disables Remote Monitoring on the port. The port will be returned to its configured operation mode when the switch is reset.
ena
Temporarily enables the port. The port will be returned to its configured operation mode when the
switch is reset.
dis
Temporarily disables the port. The port will be returned to its configured operation mode when the
switch is reset.
cur
Displays the current settings for the port.
13N0340, March 2004
Chapter 8: The Operations Menu 283
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
/oper/slb
Operations-Level SLB Options
[Server Load Balancing Operations Menu]
sync
- Synchronize SLB, VRRP and other configurations on peers
ena
- Enable real server
dis
- Disable real server
clear
- Clear session table
cur
- Current layer 4 operational state
When the optional Layer 4 software is enabled, the operations-level Server Load Balancing
options are used for temporarily disabling or enabling real servers and synchronizing the configuration between the active/active switches.
Table 8-3 Server Load Balancing Operations Menu Options (/oper/slb)
Command Syntax and Usage
sync
Synchronizes the SLB, filter, VRRP, port, and VR priorities on a peer switch (a switch that owns
the IP address). To take effect, peers must be configured on the GbE Switch Module and the
administrator password on the switch must be identical.
ena <real server number (1-63)>
Temporarily enables a real server. The real server will be returned to its configured operation mode
when the switch is reset.
dis <real server number (1-63)> p|n
The disable command is used to temporarily disable real servers as follows:
Using the n (none) option, disables the real server entirely, removing it from operation within
its real server group and virtual server
Using the p (persistent) option, temporarily disables sessions except for persistent http 1.0 ses-
sions.
The real server will be returned to its configured operation mode when the switch is reset.
clear
Clears all session tables and allows port filter changes to take effect immediately.
Note: This command disrupts current Server Load Balancing and Application Redirection
sessions.
cur
Displays the current SLB operational state.
284 Chapter 8: The Operations Menu
13N0340, March 2004
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
/oper/vrrp
Operations-Level VRRP Options.
[VRRP Operations Menu]
back
- Set virtual router to backup
Table 8-4 Virtual Router Redundancy Operations Menu Options (/oper/vrrp)
Command Syntax and Usage
back <virtual router number (1-128)>
Forces the specified master virtual router on this switch into backup mode. This is generally used
for passing master control back to a preferred switch once the preferred switch has been returned to
service after a failure. When this command is executed, the current master gives up control and initiates a new election by temporarily advertising its own priority level as 0 (lowest). After the new
election, the virtual router forced into backup mode by this command will resume master control in
the following cases:
This switch owns the virtual router (the IP addresses of the virtual router and its IP interface are
the same)
This switch’s virtual router has a higher priority and preemption is enabled.
There are no other virtual routers available to take master control.
/oper/ip
Operations-Level IP Options
[IP Operations Menu]
bgp
- Operational Border Gateway Protocol Menu
Table 8-5 IP Operations Menu Options (/oper/ip)
Command Syntax and Usage
bgp
Displays the Border Gateway Protocol Operations Menu. To view the menu options see page 286.
13N0340, March 2004
Chapter 8: The Operations Menu 285
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
/oper/ip/bgp
Operations-Level BGP Options
[Border Gateway
start
stop
current -
Protocol Operations Menu]
Start peer session
Stop peer session
Current BGP operational state
Table 8-6 IP Operations Menu Options (/oper/ip)
Command Syntax and Usage
start <peer number (1-16)>
Starts the peer session.
stop <peer number (1-16)>
Stops the peer session.
cur
Displays the current BGP operational state.
286 Chapter 8: The Operations Menu
13N0340, March 2004
CHAPTER 9
The Boot Options Menu
To use the Boot Options Menu, you must be logged in to the switch as the administrator. The
Boot Options Menu provides options for:
Selecting a switch software image to be used when the switch is next reset
Selecting a configuration block to be used when the switch is next reset
Downloading or uploading a new software image to the switch via TFTP
/boot
Boot Menu
[Boot Options
image
conf
gtimg
ptimg
reset
cur
Menu]
- Select software image to use on next boot
- Select config block to use on next boot
- Download new software image via TFTP
- Upload selected software image via TFTP
- Reset switch [WARNING: Restarts Spanning Tree]
- Display current boot options
Each of these options is discussed in greater detail in the following sections.
287
13N0340, March 2004
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
Updating the Switch Software Image
The switch software image is the executable code running on the GbE Switch Module. A version
of the image ships with the switch, and comes pre-installed on the device. As new versions of
the image are released, you can upgrade the software running on your switch. To get the latest
version of software available for your GbE Switch Module, go to:
http://www.ibm.com/pc/support
Click on software updates. Use /boot/cur to determine the current software version.
Upgrading the software image on your switch requires the following:
Loading the new image onto a TFTP server on your network
Downloading the new image from the TFTP server to your switch
Selecting the new software image to be loaded into switch memory the next time the
switch is reset
Downloading New Software to Your Switch
The switch can store up to two different software images, called image1 and image2, as
well as boot software, called boot. When you download new software, you must specify
where it should be placed: either into image1, image2, or boot.
For example, if your active image is currently loaded into image1, you would probably load
the new image software into image2. This lets you test the new software and reload the original active image (stored in image1), if needed.
To download a new software to your switch, you will need the following:
The image or boot software loaded on a TFTP server on your network
The hostname or IP address of the TFTP server
The name of the new software image or boot file
NOTE – The DNS parameters must be configured if specifying hostnames. See “Domain Name
System Configuration” on page 218.
When the above requirements are met, use the following procedure to download the new software to your switch.
288 Chapter 9: The Boot Options Menu
13N0340, March 2004
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
1.
At the Boot Options# prompt, enter:
Boot Options# gtimg
2.
Enter the name of the switch software to be replaced:
Enter name of switch software image to be replaced
["image1"/"image2"/"boot"]: <image>
3.
Enter the hostname or IP address of the TFTP server.
Enter hostname or IP address of TFTP server: <server name or IP address>
4.
Enter the name of the new software file on the server.
Enter name of file on TFTP server: <filename>
The exact form of the name will vary by TFTP server. However, the file location is normally
relative to the TFTP directory (usually /tftpboot).
5.
The system prompts you to confirm your request.
You should next select a software image to run, as described below.
Selecting a Software Image to Run
You can select which software image (image1 or image2) you want to run in switch memory for the next reboot.
1.
At the Boot Options# prompt, enter:
Boot Options# image
2.
Enter the name of the image you want the switch to use upon the next boot.
The system informs you of which image is currently set to be loaded at the next reset, and
prompts you to enter a new choice:
Currently set to use switch software "image1" on next reset.
Specify new image to use on next reset ["image1"/"image2"]:
13N0340, March 2004
Chapter 9: The Boot Options Menu 289
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
Uploading a Software Image from Your Switch
You can upload a software image from the switch to a TFTP server.
1.
At the Boot Options# prompt, enter:
Boot Options# ptimg
2.
The system prompts you for information. Enter the desired image:
Enter name of switch software image to be uploaded
["image1"|"image2"|"boot"]: <image> <hostname or server-IP-addr> <server-file-
name>
3.
Enter the name or the IP address of the TFTP server:
Enter hostname or IP address of TFTP server: <server name or IP address>
4.
Enter the name of the file into which the image will be uploaded on the TFTP server:
Enter name of file on TFTP server: <filename>
5.
The system then requests confirmation of what you have entered. To have the file
uploaded, enter Y.
image2 currently contains Software Version 20.0.1.0
Upload will transfer image2 (1889411 bytes) to file "test"
on TFTP server 192.1.1.1.
Confirm upload operation [y/n]: y
290 Chapter 9: The Boot Options Menu
13N0340, March 2004
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
Selecting a Configuration Block
When you make configuration changes to the GbE Switch Module, you must save the changes so
that they are retained beyond the next time the switch is reset. When you perform the save
command, your new configuration changes are placed in the active configuration block. The
previous configuration is copied into the backup configuration block.
There is also a factory configuration block. This holds the default configuration set by the factory
when your GbE Switch Module was manufactured. Under certain circumstances, it may be desirable to reset the switch configuration to the default. This can be useful when a custom-configured
GbE Switch Module is moved to a network environment where it will be re configured for a different purpose.
Use the following procedure to set which configuration block you want the switch to load the
next time it is reset:
1.
At the Boot Options# prompt, enter:
Boot Options# conf
2.
Enter the name of the configuration block you want the switch to use:
The system informs you of which configuration block is currently set to be loaded at the next
reset, and prompts you to enter a new choice:
Currently set to use active configuration block on next reset.
Specify new block to use ["active"/"backup"/"factory"]:
13N0340, March 2004
Chapter 9: The Boot Options Menu 291
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
Resetting the Switch
You can reset the switch to make your software image file and configuration block changes occur.
NOTE – Resetting the switch causes the Spanning Tree Group to restart. This process can be
lengthy, depending on the topology of your network.
NOTE – Resetting the switch causes the date and time to revert to default values.
Use /cfg/sys/date and /cfg/sys/time to reenter the current date and time.
To reset the switch, at the Boot Options# prompt, enter:
>> Boot Options# reset
You are prompted to confirm your request.
292 Chapter 9: The Boot Options Menu
13N0340, March 2004
CHAPTER 10
The Maintenance Menu
The Maintenance Menu is used to manage dump information and forward database information. It also includes a debugging menu to help with troubleshooting.
/maint
Maintenance Menu
NOTE – To use the Maintenance Menu, you must be logged in to the switch as the administrator.
[Maintenance Menu]
sys
- System Maintenance Menu
fdb
- Forwarding Database Manipulation Menu
debug
- Debugging Menu
arp
- ARP Cache Manipulation Menu
route
- IP Route Manipulation Menu
uudmp
- Uuencode FLASH dump
ptdmp
- tftp put FLASH dump to tftp server
cldmp
- Clear FLASH dump
panic
- Dump state information to FLASH and reboot
tsdmp
- Tech support dump
gea
- GEA 5690 Menu
Dump information contains internal switch state data that is written to flash memory on the
GbE Switch Module after any one of the following occurs:
The switch administrator forces a switch panic. The panic option, found in the Maintenance Menu, causes the switch to dump state information to flash memory, and then
causes the switch to reboot.
The watchdog timer forces a switch reset. The purpose of the watchdog timer is to reboot
the switch if the switch software freezes.
The switch detects a hardware or software problem that requires a reboot.
293
13N0340, March 2004
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
Table 10-1 Maintenance Menu Options (/maint)
Command Syntax and Usage
sys
Displays the System Maintenance Menu. To view menu options, see page 295.
fdb
Displays the Forwarding Database Manipulation Menu. To view menu options, see page 295.
debug
Displays the Debugging Menu. To view menu options, see page 297.
arp
Displays the ARP Cache Manipulation Menu. To view menu options, see page 298.
route
Displays the IP Route Manipulation Menu. To view menu options, see page 299.
uudmp
Displays dump information in uuencoded format. For details, see page 300.
ptdmp hostname, filename [-mgmt|-data]
Saves the system dump information via TFTP. For details, see page 301.
cldmp
Clears dump information from flash memory. For details, see page 301.
panic
Dumps MP information to FLASH and reboots. For details, see page 302.
tsdmp
Dumps all GbE Switch Module information, statistics, and configuration.You can log the tsdump
output into a file.
gea
This menu is reserved for debugging purposes by the Tech Support group.
294 Chapter 10: The Maintenance Menu
13N0340, March 2004
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
/maint/sys
System Maintenance Options
This menu is reserved for use by IBM Service Support. The options are used to perform system
debugging.
[System Maintenance Menu]
flags
- Set NVRAM flag word
Table 10-2 System Maintenance Menu Options (/maint/sys)
Command Syntax and Usage
flags <new NVRAM flags word as 0xXXXXXXXX>
This command sets the flags that are used for debugging purposes by Tech support group.
/maint/fdb
Forwarding Database Options
[FDB Manipulation Menu]
find
- Show a single FDB entry by MAC address
port
- Show FDB entries for a single port
trunk
- Show FDB entries on a single trunk
vlan
- Show FDB entries for a single VLAN
refpt
- Show FDB entries referenced by a single port
dump
- Show all FDB entries
del
- Delete an FDB entry
clear
- Clear entire FDB
The Forwarding Database Manipulation Menu can be used to view information and to delete a
MAC address from the forwarding database or clear the entire forwarding database. This is
helpful in identifying problems associated with MAC address learning and packet forwarding
decisions.
13N0340, March 2004
Chapter 10: The Maintenance Menu 295
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
Table 10-3 FDB Manipulation Menu Options (/maint/fdb)
Command Syntax and Usage
find <MAC address> [<VLAN>]
Displays a single database entry by its MAC address. You are prompted to enter the MAC address
of the device. Enter the MAC address using the xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx format (such as
08:00:20:12:34:56) or xxxxxxxxxxxx format (such as 080020123456).
port <port alias or number, 0 for unknown>>
Displays all FDB entries for a particular port. Use “0” for unknown port number.
trunk
Displays all FDB entries on a single trunk.
vlan <VLAN number (1-4095)>
Displays all FDB entries on a single VLAN.
refpt <SP number (1-4)>
Displays all FDB entries reference by a single port.
dump
Displays all entries in the Forwarding Database. For details, see page 57.
del <MAC address> [<VLAN>]
Removes a single FDB entry.
clear
Clears the entire Forwarding Database from switch memory.
296 Chapter 10: The Maintenance Menu
13N0340, March 2004
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
/maint/debug
Debugging Options
[Miscellaneous Debug Menu]
tbuf
- Show MP trace buffer
snap
- Show MP snap (or post-mortem) trace buffer
sptb
- Show SP trace buffer
spall
- Show All SP trace buffers
clrcfg - Clear all flash configs
gea
- GEA 5690 Menu
The Miscellaneous Debug Menu displays trace buffer information about events that can be
helpful in understanding switch operation. You can view the following information using the
debug menu:
Events traced by the Management Processor (MP)
Events traced by the Switch Processor (SP)
Events traced to a buffer area when a reset occurs
If the switch resets for any reason, the MP trace buffer and SP trace buffers are saved into the
snap trace buffer area. The output from these commands can be interpreted by IBM Service
Support.
Table 10-4 Miscellaneous Debug Menu Options (/maint/debug)
Command Syntax and Usage
tbuf
Displays the Management Processor trace buffer. Header information similar to the following is shown:
MP trace buffer at 13:28:15 Fri May 25, 2001; mask: 0x2ffdf748
The buffer information is displayed after the header.
snap
Displays the Management Processor snap (or post-mortem) trace buffer. This buffer contains information traced at the time that a reset occurred.
sptb <port number (1-4)>
Displays the Switch Processor trace buffer. Header information similar to the following is shown:
SP 1 trace buffer at 10:56:35 Tue Jul 30, 2002; mask: 0x00800008
The buffer information is displayed after the header.
spall
Displays the Switch Processor trace buffer. Header information similar to the following is shown:
SP 1 trace buffer at 10:56:35 Tue Jul 30, 2002; mask: 0x00800008.
The buffer information is displayed after the header. Displays all SP trace buffers.
13N0340, March 2004
Chapter 10: The Maintenance Menu 297
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
Table 10-4 Miscellaneous Debug Menu Options (/maint/debug)
Command Syntax and Usage
clrcfg
Deletes all flash configuration blocks.
gea
This menu is reserved for debugging purposes by the Tech Support group.
/maint/arp
ARP Cache Options
[Address Resolution Protocol Menu]
find
- Show a single ARP entry by IP address
port
- Show ARP entries on a single port
vlan
- Show ARP entries on a single VLAN
refpt
- Show ARP entries referenced by a single port
dump
- Show all ARP entries
add
- Add a permanent ARP entry
del
- Delete an ARP entry
clear
- Clear ARP cache
addr
- Show ARP address list
298 Chapter 10: The Maintenance Menu
13N0340, March 2004
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
Table 10-5 Address Resolution Protocol Menu Options (/maint/arp)
Command Syntax and Usage
find <IP address (such as, 192.4.17.101)>
Shows a single ARP entry by IP address.
port <port alias or number (1-20)>
Shows ARP entries on a single port.
vlan <VLAN number>
Shows ARP entries on a single VLAN.
refpt <SP number (1-4)>
Shows all ARP entries referenced by a single port.
dump
Shows all ARP entries.
add <IP address> <MAC address> <VLAN number> <port>
Adds a single ARP entry from switch memory.
del <IP address (such as, 192.4.17.101)>
Removes a single ARP entry from switch memory.
clear
Clears the entire ARP list from switch memory.
addr
Shows the list of IP addresses which the switch will respond to for ARP requests.
NOTE – To display all ARP entries currently held in the switch, or a portion according to one
of the options listed on the menu above (find, port, vlan, refpt, dump), you can also
refer to “ARP Information” on page 68.
/maint/route
IP Route Manipulation
[IP Routing Menu]
find - Show a single route by destination IP address
gw
- Show routes to a single gateway
type - Show routes of a single type
tag
- Show routes of a single tag
if
- Show routes on a single interface
dump - Show all routes
clear - Clear route table
13N0340, March 2004
Chapter 10: The Maintenance Menu 299
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
Table 10-6 IP Route Manipulation Menu Options (/maint/route)
Command Syntax and Usage
find <IP address (such as, 192.4.17.101)>
Shows a single route by destination IP address.
gw <default gateway address (such as, 192.4.17.44)>
Shows routes to a default gateway.
type indirect|direct|local|broadcast|martian|multicast
Shows routes of a single type. For a description of IP routing types, see Table 4-9 on page 67
tag fixed|static|addr|rip|ospf|bgp|broadcast|martian|vip
Shows routes of a single tag. For a description of IP routing tags, see Table 4-10 on page 68
if <interface number (1-128)>
Shows routes on a single interface.
dump
Shows all routes.
clear
Clears the route table from switch memory.
NOTE – To display all routes, you can also refer to “IP Routing Information” on page 66.
/maint/uudmp
Uuencode Flash Dump
Using this command, dump information is presented in uuencoded format. This format makes
it easy to capture the dump information as a file or a string of characters.
If you want to capture dump information to a file, set your communication software on your
workstation to capture session data prior to issuing the uudmp command. This will ensure that
you do not lose any information. Once entered, the uudmp command will cause approximately
23,300 lines of data to be displayed on your screen and copied into the file.
Using the uudmp command, dump information can be read multiple times. The command
does not cause the information to be updated or cleared from flash memory.
NOTE – Dump information is not cleared automatically. In order for any subsequent dump
information to be written to flash memory, you must manually clear the dump region. For more
information on clearing the dump region, see page 301.
300 Chapter 10: The Maintenance Menu
13N0340, March 2004
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
To access dump information, at the Maintenance# prompt, enter:
Maintenance# uudmp
The dump information is displayed on your screen and, if you have configured your communication software to do so, captured to a file. If the dump region is empty, the following appears:
No FLASH dump available.
/maint/ptdmp <server> <filename>
TFTP System Dump Put
Use this command to put (save) the system dump to a TFTP server.
NOTE – If the TFTP server is running SunOS or the Solaris operating system, the specified
ptdmp file must exist prior to executing the ptdmp command, and must be writable (set with
proper permission, and not locked by any application). The contents of the specified file will
be replaced with the current dump data.
To save dump information via TFTP, at the Maintenance# prompt, enter:
Maintenance# ptdmp <server> <filename>
Where server is the TFTP server IP address or hostname, and filename is the target dump file.
/maint/cldmp
Clearing Dump Information
To clear dump information from flash memory, at the Maintenance# prompt, enter:
Maintenance# cldmp
The switch clears the dump region of flash memory and displays the following message:
FLASH dump region cleared.
If the flash dump region is already clear, the switch displays the following message:
FLASH dump region is already clear.
13N0340, March 2004
Chapter 10: The Maintenance Menu 301
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
/maint/panic
Panic Command
The panic command causes the switch to immediately dump state information to flash memory and automatically reboot.
To select panic, at the Maintenance# prompt, enter:
>> Maintenance# panic
A FLASH dump already exists.
Confirm replacing existing dump and reboot [y/n]:
Enter y to confirm the command:
Confirm dump and reboot [y/n]: y
The following messages are displayed:
Starting system dump...done.
Rebooted because of PANIC command.
Booting complete 0:01:01 Thu Jul 1, 2003:
Version 1.0.0.18 from FLASH image1, active config block.
No POST errors (0xff).
Production Mode.
Unscheduled System Dumps
If there is an unscheduled system dump to flash memory, the following message is displayed
when you log on to the switch:
Note: A system dump exists in FLASH. The dump was saved
at 13:43:22 Wednesday October 30, 2002. Use /maint/uudmp to
extract the dump for analysis and /maint/cldmp to
clear the FLASH region. The region must be cleared
before another dump can be saved.
302 Chapter 10: The Maintenance Menu
13N0340, March 2004
APPENDIX A
Alteon OS Syslog Messages
The following syntax is used when outputting syslog messages:
<Time stamp><Log Label>Web OS<Thread ID>:<Message>
where
<Timestamp>
The time of the message event is displayed in month day hour:minute:second format. For
example: Aug 19 14:20:30
<Log Label>
The following types of log messages are recorded: LOG_EMERG, LOG_ALERT,
LOG_CRIT, LOG_ERR, LOG_WARNING, LOG_NOTICE, LOG_INFO, and LOG_DEBUG
<Thread ID>
This is the software thread that reports the log message. The following thread IDs are
recorded: stg, ip, slb, console, telnet, vrrp, system, web server, ssh, and
bgp
<Message>: The log message
Following is a list of potential syslog messages. To keep this list as short as possible, only
<Thread ID> and <Message> are shown. The messages are sorted by <Log Label>.
Where the <Thread ID> is listed as mgmt, one of the following may be shown: console,
telnet, web server, or ssh.
LOG_WARNING
FILTER “filter <filter number> fired on port <port number>, <source IP address> -> <destination IP address>, [<ICMP type>], [<IP protocol>], [<layer-4 ports>], [<TCP f1ags>]”
303
13N0340, March 2004
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
LOG_ALERT
stp:
own BPDU received from port <port_id>
IP
cannot contact default gateway <ip_address>
vrrp:
received errored advertisement from <ip_address>
vrrp:
received incorrect password from <ip_address>
vrrp:
received incorrect addresses from <ip_address>
vrrp:
received incorrect advertisement interval <seconds> from <ip_address>
slb:
cannot contact real server <ip_address>
slb:
real server <ip_address> has reached maximum connections
slb:
cannot contact real service <ip_address:real_port>
slb:
real server failure threshold (<threshold>) has been reach for group <group_id>
slb:
real server <ip_address> disabled through configuration
slb:
Virtual Service Pool full. gSvcPool=MAX_SERVICES
bgp:
notification (<reason>) received from <BGP peer ip_address>
bgp:
session with <BGP peer ip_address> failed (<reason>)
vrrp:
Synchronization from non-configured peer <ip_address>
vrrp:
Synchronization from non-configured peer <ip_address> was blocked
dps:
hold down triggered: <ip_address> for <min> minutes
dps:
manual hold down: <ip_address>
syn_atk
SYN attack detected: <count> new half-open sessions per second
tcplim
hold down triggered: <ip_address> for <min> minutes
LOG_CRIT
SYSTEM: temperature at sensor <sensor_id> exceeded threshold
SYSTEM: internal power supply failed
SYSTEM: redundant power supply failed
304 Appendix A: Alteon OS Syslog Messages
13N0340, March 2004
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
LOG_CRIT (Continued)
SYSTEM: fan failure detected
SSH
can't allocate memory in load_MP_INT
LOG_ERR
13N0340, March 2004
mgmt:
PANIC at <file>:<line> in thread <thread id>
mgmt:
VERIFY at <file>:<line> in thread <thread id>
mgmt:
ASSERT at <file>:<line> in thread <thread id>
ntp:
cannot contact NTP server <ip_address>
ntp:
unable to listen to NTP port
isd:
unable to listen to BOOTP_SERVER_PORT port
stp:
Error: Error writing STG config to FLASH
stp:
Error: Error writing config to FLASH
mgmt:
Apply not done
mgmt:
Save not done
mgmt:
“ <““apply””|““save””> is issued by another user. Try later”
cli:
Error: Error writing %s config to FLASH
cli:
New Path Cost for Port <port_id> is invalid
cli:
PVID <vlan_id> for port <port_id> is not created
cli:
RADIUS secret must be 1-32 characters long
cli:
Please configure primary RADIUS server address
cli:
STP changes can't be applied since STP is OFF
cli:
Switch reset is required to turn STP on/off
cli:
Trunk group <trunk_id> contains ports with different PVIDs
cli:
Trunk group <trunk_id> has more than <max_trunk_ports> ports
cli:
Trunk group <trunk_id> contains no ports but is enabled
cli:
Not all ports in trunk group <trunk_id> are in VLAN <vlan_id>
cli:
Trunk groups <trunk_id> and <trunk_id> can not share the same port
Appendix A: Alteon OS Syslog Messages 305
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
LOG_ERR (Continued)
port_mirr: Port Mirroring changes are not applied
cli:
Broadcast address for IP interface <interface_id> is invalid
cli:
IP Interfaces <interface_id> and <interface_id> are on the same subnet
cli:
Multiple static routes have same destination
cli:
Virtual router <vr_id> must have sharing disabled when hotstandby is enabled
cli:
Virtual router group must be enabled when hotstandby is enabled
cli:
At least one virtual router must be enabled when group is enabled
cli:
Virtual router group must have sharing disabled when hotstandby is enabled
cli:
Virtual router group must have preemption enabled when hotstandby is enabled
cli:
Virtual router <vr_id> must have an IP address
cli:
Virtual router <vr_id> cannot have same VRID and VLAN as <vlan_id>
cli:
Virtual router <vr_id> cannot have same IP address as <ip_address>
cli:
Virtual router <vr_id> corresponding virtual server <server_id> is not enabled
cli:
Hot-standby must be enabled when a virtual router has a PIP address
cli:
Virtual router <vr_id> IP interface should be <interface_id>
cli:
Enabled real server <server_id> has no IP address
cli:
Real server <server_id> has same IP address as IP interface <interface_id>
cli:
Real server <server_id> has same IP address as switch
cli:
Real server <server_id> (Backup for <server_id>) is not enabled
cli:
Real server <server_id> has same IP address as virtual server <server_id>
cli:
Real server <server_id> has same IP address as real server <server_id>
cli:
Real server group <group_id> cannot backup itself
cli:
Real server <server_id> cannot be added to same group
cli:
Enabled virtual server <server_id> has no IP address
cli:
Virtual server <server_id> has same IP address as IP interface <interface_id>
cli:
Virtual server <server_id> has same IP address as switch
306 Appendix A: Alteon OS Syslog Messages
13N0340, March 2004
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
LOG_ERR (Continued)
13N0340, March 2004
cli:
Virtual servers <server_id> and <server_id> with same IP address must support same layr3
configuration
cli:
Real server <server_id> cannot be backup server for both real server <server_id> and
group <group_id>
cli:
Virtual server <server_id> has same IP address and vport as virtual server <server_id>
cli:
RS <server_id> can't exist for VS <server_id> vport <virtual_port>
cli:
Switch port <port_id> has same proxy IP address as port <port_id>
cli:
Switch port <port_id> has same IP address as IP interface <interface_id>
cli:
A hot-standby port cannot also be an inter-switch port
cli:
There must be at least one inter-switch port if any hot-standby port exist
cli:
“With VMA, ports 1-8 must all have a PIP if any one does”
cli:
Client bindings are not supported with proxy IP addresses
cli:
DAM must be turned on or a PIP must be enabled for port <port_id> in order for virtual
server to support FTP parsing
cli:
Real server <server_id> and group %u cannot both have backups configured
cli:
Virtual server <server_id> : port mapping but layer3 bindings
cli:
Extracting length has to set to 8 or 16 for cookie rewrite mode
cli:
DAM must be turned on or a PIP must be enabled for port <port_id> in order for virtural
server <server_id> to support URL parsing
cli:
Port filtering must be disabled on port <port_id> in order to support cookie based persistence for virtual server <server_id>
cli:
Virtual server <server_id>: port mapping but Direct Access Mode
cli:
Virtual server %lu: support nonat IP but not layer 3 bindings
cli:
Virtual servers: all that support IP must use same group
cli:
Virtual servers <server_id> and <server_id> that include the same real server <server_id>
cannot map the same real port or balance UDP
cli:
Virtual server <server_id>: UDP service <virtual_port> with out-of-range port number
cli:
Switch cannot support more than <MAX_VIRT_SERVICES> virtual services
cli:
Switch cannot support more than <MAX_SMT> real services
cli:
Trunk group (<trunk_id>) ports must have same L4 config
Appendix A: Alteon OS Syslog Messages 307
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
LOG_ERR (Continued)
cli:
Trunk group (<trunk_id>) ports must all have a PIP
cli:
DAM must be turned on or a PIP must be enabled for ports <port_id> in order to do URL
based redirection
cli:
“Two services have same hostname, <host_name>.<domain_name>”
cli:
Direct access mode is not supported with default gateway load balancing
cli:
SLB Radius secret must be 16 characters long
cli:
Dynamic NAT filter <filter_id> must be cached
cli:
NAT filter <filter_id> must have same smask and dmask
cli:
NAT filter <filter_id> cannot have port ranges
cli:
NAT filter <filter_id> must be cached
cli:
NAT filter <filter_id> dest range includes VIP <server_id>
cli:
NAT filter <filter_id> dest range includes RIP <server_id>
cli:
Redirection filter <filter_id> must be cached
cli:
Filter with L4 ports configured <port_id> must have IP protocol configured
cli:
Remote site <site_id> does not have a primary IP address
cli:
Primary and secondary remote site <site_id> switches must differ
cli:
Remote sites <site_id> and <site_id> must use different addresses
cli:
Remote site <site_id> and real server <server_id> must use different addresses
cli:
Remote site <site_id> and virtual server <server_id> must use different addresses
cli:
Only <MAX_SLB_SITES> remote servers are allowed per group
cli:
Only <MAX_SLB_SERVICES> remote services are supported
cli:
Enabled external lookup IP address has no IP address
cli:
domain name must be configured
cli:
Network <static_network_id> has no VIP address
cli:
duplicate default entry
cli:
BGP peer <bgp_peer_id> must have an IP address
cli:
BGP peers <bgp_peer_id> and <bgp_peer_id> have same address
308 Appendix A: Alteon OS Syslog Messages
13N0340, March 2004
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
LOG_ERR (Continued)
13N0340, March 2004
cli:
BGP peer <bgp_peer_id> have same address as IP interface <ip_interface_id>
cli:
BGP peer <bgp_peer_id> IP interface <ip_interface_id> is not enabled
cli:
Filter with ICMP types configured (<icmp_type>) must have IP protocol configure to
ICMP
cli:
“Two services have same hostname, <host_name>.<domain_name>”
cli:
Loadbalance string must be added to real server <server_id> in order to enable exclusionary string matching
cli:
intrval input value must be in the range [0-24]
mgmt:
unapplied changes reverted
mgmt:
unsaved changes reverted
mgmt:
Attempting to redirect a previously redirected output
vrrp:
Attempting to redirect a previously redirected output
vrrp:
cfg_sync_tx_putsn: ABORTED
vrrp:
Synchronization TX Error
vrrp:
Synchronization TX connection RESET
vrrp:
Synchronization TX connection TIMEOUT
vrrp:
Synchronization TX connection UNREACEABLE
vrrp:
Synchronization TX connection UNKNOWN CLOSE
vrrp:
Synchronization RX connection RESET
vrrp:
Synchronization RX connection TIMEOUT
vrrp:
Synchronization RX connection UNREACEABLE
vrrp:
Synchronization RX connection UNKNOWN CLOSE
vrrp:
Synchronization connection RCLOSE by peer
vrrp:
Synchronization connection RCLOSE before RX
vrrp:
Synchronization connection early RCLOSE in RX
vrrp:
Synchronization connection Wait-For-Close Timeout
vrrp:
Synchronization connection Transmit Timeout
vrrp:
Synchronization Receive Timeout
Appendix A: Alteon OS Syslog Messages 309
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
LOG_ERR (Continued)
vrrp:
Synchronization Receive UNKNOWN Timeout
vrrp:
Sync transmit in progress … cannot start Sync
vrrp:
Sync receive in progress … cannot start Sync
vrrp:
Sync already in progress … cannot start Sync
vrrp:
Config Sync route find error
vrrp:
Config Sync tcp_open error
vrrp:
Config Synchronization Timeout - Resuming Console thread
vrrp:
“<""apply""|""save""> is issued by another user. Try later”
vrrp:
new configuration did not validate (rc = )
vrrp:
new configuration did not apply (rc = )
vrrp:
new configuration did not save (rc = )
vrrp:
Sync config apply error
vrrp:
Restoring Current Config
vrrp:
Sync rx tcp open error
vrrp:
Sync Version/Password Failed-No Version/Password Line
vrrp:
Sync Version Failed - peer:%s config:%s
vrrp:
Sync Password Failed-Bad Password
vrrp:
Sync receive already in progress … cannot start Sync receive
vrrp:
Sync transmit in progress … cannot start Sync receive
310 Appendix A: Alteon OS Syslog Messages
13N0340, March 2004
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
LOG_NOTICE
13N0340, March 2004
system:
internal power supply ok
system:
redundant power supply present and ok
system:
temperature ok
system:
fan ok
system:
rebooted <last_reset_information>
system:
rebooted <last_reset_information> administrator logged in
mgmt:
boot config block changed
mgmt:
boot image changed
mgmt:
switch reset from CLI
mgmt:
syslog host changed to <ip_address>
mgmt:
syslog host changed to this host
mgmt:
second syslog host changed to <ip_address>
mgmt:
second syslog host changed to this host
mgmt:
Next boot will use active config block
mgmt:
user password changed
mgmt:
SLB operator password changed
mgmt:
L4 operator password changed
mgmt:
operator password changed
mgmt:
SLB administrator password changed
mgmt:
L4 administrator password changed
mgmt:
administrator password changed
ssh:
scp <login_level> login
ssh:
“scp <login_level> <""connection closed""|""idle timeout""|""logout"">”
mgmt:
RADIUS server timeouts
mgmt:
Failed login attempt via TELNET from host %s
mgmt:
PASSWORD FIX-UP MODE IN USE
mgmt:
<login_level> login on Console
Appendix A: Alteon OS Syslog Messages 311
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
LOG_NOTICE (Continued)
mgmt:
“<login_level> <""idle timeout""|""logout""> from Console”
mgmt:
PANIC command from CLI
port_mirr: “port mirroring is <""enabled""|""disabled"">”
vlan:
Default VLAN can not be deleted
mgmt:
<login_level> login from host <ip_address>
mgmt:
“<login_level> <""connection closed""|""idle timeout""|""logout""> from”
IP
“default gateway <ip_address> <""enabled""|""disabled"">”
IP
default gateway <ip_address> operational
vrrp:
virtual router <ip_address> is now master
vrrp:
virtual router <ip_address> is now backup
slb:
“backup server <ip_address> <""enabled""|""diabled""> for real server <server_id>”
slb:
“backup server <ip_address> <""enabled""|""disabled""> for real server group
<group_id>”
slb:
“backup group server <ip_address> <""enabled""|""disabled""> for real server group
group_id>”
slb:
“overflow server <ip_address> <""enabled""|""disabled""> for real server <server_id>”
slb:
“overflow server <ip_address> <""enabled""|""disabled""> for real server group
<group_id>”
slb:
“overflow group server <ip_address> <""enabled""|""disabled""> for real server group
<group_id>”
slb:
real server <ip_address> operational
slb:
real service <ip_address:real_port> operational
slb:
No services are available for Virtual Server <virtual_server>
slb:
Services are available for Virtual Server <virtual_server>
bgp:
session established with <BGP_peer_ip_address>
312 Appendix A: Alteon OS Syslog Messages
13N0340, March 2004
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
LOG_INFO
13N0340, March 2004
SYSTEM:
bootp response from <ip_address>
mgmt:
new configuration applied
mgmt:
new configuration saved
mgmt:
unsaved changes reverted
mgmt:
Could not revert unsaved changes
mgmt:
" <image1|image2> downloaded from host <ip_address>, file <file_name>
<software_version>"
mgmt:
serial EEPROM downloaded from host <ip_address> file <file_name>
ssh:
scp <login_level> login
ssh:
" scp <login_level> <""connection closed""|""idle timeout""|""logout"">"
mgmt:
<login_level> login on Console
mgmt:
" <login_level> <""idle timeout""|""logout""> from Console"
mgmt:
<login_level> login from host <ip_address>
mgmt:
" <login_level> <""connection closed""|""idle timeout""|""logout""> from Telnet/SSH."
ssh:
server key autogen starts
ssh:
server key autogen completes
ssh:
server key autogen timer timeouts
vrrp:
new synch configuration applied
vrrp:
new synch configuration saved
vrrp:
Synchronizing from <host_name>
vrrp:
Synchronizing to <host_name>
vrrp:
Config Synchronization Transmit Successful
vrrp:
Config Synchronization Receive Successful
vrrp:
new configuration VALIDATED
Appendix A: Alteon OS Syslog Messages 313
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
314 Appendix A: Alteon OS Syslog Messages
13N0340, March 2004
APPENDIX B
Alteon OS SNMP Agent
The Alteon OS SNMP agent supports SNMP Version 1. Security is provided through SNMP
community strings. The default community strings are “public” for SNMP GET operation and
“private” for SNMP SET operation. The community string can be modified only through the
Command Line Interface (CLI). Alteon WebSystems is registered as Vendor 1872. Detailed
SNMP MIBs and trap definitions of the Alteon OS SNMP agent can be found in the following
Alteon WebSystems enterprise MIB documents:
Altroot.mib -
AOSSwitch.mib
AOSPhysical.mib
AOSNetwork.mib
AOSLayer4.mib
AOSLayer7.mib
AOSTrap.mib
Users may specify up to two trap hosts for receiving SNMP Traps. The agent will send the
SNMP Trap to the specified hosts when appropriate. Traps will not be sent if there is no host
specified.
Alteon OS SNMP agent supports the following standard MIBs:
RFC 1213 - MIB II (System, Interface, Address Translation, IP, ICMP, TCP, UDP, SNMP
Groups)
RFC 1573 - MIB II Extension (IFX table)
RFC 1643 - EtherLike MIB
RFC 1493 - Bridge MIB
RFC 1757 - RMON MIB (Statistics, History, Alarm, Event Groups)
RFC 1850 for OSPF
RFC 1657 for BGP
RFC 2037
315
13N0340, March 2004
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
Alteon OS SNMP agent supports the following generic traps as defined in RFC 1215:
ColdStart
WarmStart
LinkDown
LinkUp
AuthenticationFailure
The SNMP agent also supports two Spanning Tree traps as defined in RFC 1493:
NewRoot
TopologyChange
The following are the enterprise SNMP traps supported in Alteon OS:
Table 10-7 Alteon OS-Supported Enterprise SNMP Traps
Trap Name
Description
altSwDefGwUp
Signifies that the default gateway is alive.
altSwDefGwDown
Signifies that the default gateway is down.
altSwDefGwInService
Signifies that the default gateway is up and in service
altSwDefGwNotInService
Signifies that the default gateway is alive but not in
service
altSwSlbRealServerUp
Signifies that the real server is up and operational
altSwSlbRealServerDown
Signifies that the real server is down and out of service
altSwSlbRealServerMaxConnReached
Signifies that the real server has reached maximum
connections
altSwSlbBkupRealServerAct
Signifies that the backup real server is activated due to
availablity of the primary real server
altSwSlbBkupRealServerDeact
Signifies that the backup real server is deactivated due
to the primary real server is available
altSwSlbBkupRealServerActOverflow
Signifies that the backup real server is deactivated due
to the primary real server is overflowed
altSwSlbBkupRealServerDeactOverflow
Signifies that the backup real server is deactivated due
to the primary real server is out from overflow situation
316 Appendix B: Alteon OS SNMP Agent
13N0340, March 2004
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
Table 10-7 Alteon OS-Supported Enterprise SNMP Traps
13N0340, March 2004
Trap Name
Description
altSwfltFilterFired
Signifies that the packet received on a switch port
matches the filter rule
altSwSlbRealServerServiceUp
Signifies that the service port of the real server is up
and operational
altSwSlbRealServerServiceDown
Signifies that the service port of the real server is down
and out of service
altSwVrrpNewMaster
The newMaster trap indicates that the sending agent has transitioned to 'Master' state.
altSwVrrpNewBackup
The newBackup trap indicates that the sending agent has
transitioned to 'Backup' state.
altSwVrrpAuthFailure
A vrrpAuthFailure trap signifies that a packet has been
received from a router whose authentication key or authentication type conflicts with this router's authentication key or
authentication type. Implementation of this trap is optional.
altSwLoginFailure
A altSwLoginFailure trap signifies that someone failed to
enter a valid username/password combination.
altSwSlbSynAttack
A altSwSlbSynAttack trap signifies that a SYN attack
has been detected.
altSwTcpHoldDown
A altSwTcpHoldDown trap signifies that new TCP connection requests from a particular client will be blocked for a
pre-determined amount of time since the rate of new TCP
connections from that client has reached a pre-determined
threshold.
altSwTempExceedThreshold
A altSwTempExceedThreshold trap signifies that the switch
temperature has exceeded maximum safety limits.
Appendix B: Alteon OS SNMP Agent 317
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
318 Appendix B: Alteon OS SNMP Agent
13N0340, March 2004
Glossary
DIP (Destination IP
Address)
The destination IP address of a frame.
Dport (Destination
Port)
The destination port (application socket: for example, http-80/https-443/DNS-53)
NAT (Network
Address Translation)
Any time an IP address is changed from one source IP or destination IP address to another
address, network address translation can be said to have taken place. In general, half NAT
is when the destination IP or source IP address is changed from one address to another.
Full NAT is when both addresses are changed from one address to another. No NAT is
when neither source nor destination IP addresses are translated. Virtual server-based load
balancing uses half NAT by design, because it translates the destination IP address from
the Virtual Server IP address, to that of one of the real servers.
Preemption
In VRRP, preemption will cause a Virtual Router that has a lower priority to go into
backup should a peer Virtual Router start advertising with a higher priority.
Priority
In VRRP, the value given to a Virtual Router to determine its ranking with its peer(s). Minimum value is 1 and maximum value is 254. Default is 100. A higher number will win out
for master designation.
Proto (Protocol)
The protocol of a frame. Can be any value represented by a 8-bit value in the IP header
adherent to the IP specification (for example, TCP, UDP, OSPF, ICMP, and so on.)
Real Server Group
A group of real servers that are associated with a Virtual Server IP address, or a filter.
319
13N0340, March 2004
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
Redirection or
Filter-Based Load
Balancing
A type of load balancing that operates differently from virtual server-based load balancing.
With this type of load balancing, requests are transparently intercepted and “redirected” to
a server group. “Transparently” means that requests are not specifically destined for a Virtual Server IP address that the switch owns. Instead, a filter is configured in the switch.
This filter intercepts traffic based on certain IP header criteria and load balances it.
Filters can be configured to filter on the SIP/Range (via netmask), DIP/Range (via netmask), Protocol, SPort/Range or DPort/Range. The action on a filter can be Allow, Deny,
Redirect to a Server Group, or NAT (translation of either the source IP or destination IP
address). In redirection-based load balancing, the destination IP address is not translated to
that of one of the real servers. Therefore, redirection-based load balancing is designed to
load balance devices that normally operate transparently in your network—such as a firewall, spam filter, or transparent Web cache.
RIP (Real Server)
Real Server IP Address. An IP addresses that the switch load balances to when requests
are made to a Virtual Server IP address (VIP).
SIP (Source IP
Address)
The source IP address of a frame.
SPort (Source Port)
The source port (application socket: for example, HTTP-80/HTTPS-443/DNS-53).
Tracking
In VRRP, a method to increase the priority of a virtual router and thus master designation
(with preemption enabled). Tracking can be very valuable in an active/active configuration.
You can track the following:
Vrs: Virtual Routers in Master Mode (increments priority by 2 for each)
Ifs: Active IP interfaces on the GbE Switch Module (increments priority by 2 for
each)
Ports: Active ports on the same VLAN (increments priority by 2 for each)
l4pts: Active Layer 4 Ports, client or server designation (increments priority by 2
for each
reals: healthy real servers (increments by 2 for each healthy real server)
hsrp: HSRP announcements heard on a client designated port (increments by 10
for each)
VIP (Virtual Server IP
Address)
An IP address that the switch owns and uses to load balance particular service requests
(like HTTP) to other servers.
VIR (Virtual Interface
Router)
A VRRP address that is an IP interface address shared between two or more virtual routers.
320 Glossary
13N0340, March 2004
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
Virtual Router
A shared address between two devices utilizing VRRP, as defined in RFC 2338. One virtual router is associated with an IP interface. This is one of the IP interfaces that the switch
is assigned. All IP interfaces on the GbE Switch Module must be in a VLAN. If there is
more than one VLAN defined on the GbE Switch Module, then the VRRP broadcasts will
only be sent out on the VLAN of which the associated IP interface is a member.
Virtual Server Load
Balancing
Classic load balancing. Requests destined for a Virtual Server IP address (VIP), which is
owned by the switch, are load balanced to a real server contained in the group associated
with the VIP. Network address translation is done back and forth, by the switch, as
requests come and go.
Frames come to the switch destined for the VIP. The switch then replaces the VIP and with
one of the real server IP addresses (RIP's), updates the relevant checksums, and forwards
the frame to the server for which it is now destined. This process of replacing the destination IP (VIP) with one of the real server addresses is called half NAT. If the frames were
not half NAT'ed to the address of one of the RIPs, a server would receive the frame that
was destined for it's MAC address, forcing the packet up to Layer 3. The server would
then drop the frame, since the packet would have the DIP of the VIP and not that of the
server (RIP).
VRID (Virtual Router
Identifier)
In VRRP, a value between 1 and 255 that is used by each virtual router to create its MAC
address and identify its peer for which it is sharing this VRRP address. The VRRP MAC
address as defined in the RFC is 00-00-5E-00-01-{VRID}. If you have a VRRP address
that two switches are sharing, then the VRID number needs to be identical on both
switches so each virtual router on each switch knows whom to share with.
VRRP (Virtual Router
Redundancy
Protocol)
A protocol that acts very similarly to Cisco's proprietary HSRP address sharing protocol.
The reason for both of these protocols is so devices have a next hop or default gateway that
is always available. Two or more devices sharing an IP interface are either advertising or
listening for advertisements. These advertisements are sent via a broadcast message to an
address such as 224.0.0.18.
With VRRP, one switch is considered the master and the other the backup. The master is
always advertising via the broadcasts. The backup switch is always listening for the broadcasts. Should the master stop advertising, the backup will take over ownership of the
VRRP IP and MAC addresses as defined by the specification. The switch announces this
change in ownership to the devices around it by way of a Gratuitous ARP, and advertisements. If the backup switch didn't do the Gratuitous ARP the Layer 2 devices attached to
the switch would not know that the MAC address had moved in the network. For a more
detailed description, refer to RFC 2338.
VSR (Virtual Server
Router)
A VRRP address that is a shared Virtual Server IP address. VSR is Alteon WebSystems’
proprietary extension to the VRRP specification. The switches must be able to share Virtual Server IP addresses, as well as IP interfaces. If they didn’t, the two switches would
fight for ownership of the Virtual Server IP address, and the ARP tables in the devices
around them would have two ARP entries with the same IP address but different MAC
addresses.
13N0340, March 2004
Glossary 321
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
322 Glossary
13N0340, March 2004
Index
Symbols
(MD5) .............................................................. 277
(SLB real server group option)
content ...................................................... 242
/ command .......................................................... 45
[ ]....................................................................... 13
A
abbreviating commands (CLI) .............................. 48
access control
user ........................................................... 168
action (SLB filtering option) ............................... 258
active configuration block .......................... 158, 291
active FTP SLB parsing statistics ........................ 135
active IP interface .............................................. 228
active Layer 4 processing ................................... 228
active port
VLAN ....................................................... 228
active switch configuration
gtcfg ......................................................... 234
ptcfg ......................................................... 234
restoring .................................................... 234
active switch, saving and loading configuration .... 234
add
ARP entry .................................................. 299
SLB port option .......................................... 267
addr
ARP entries................................................ 299
IP route tag .................................................. 68
Address Resolution Protocol (ARP)
add, delete entries ....................................... 299
address list ................................................. 299
administrator account ..................................... 23, 25
admpw (system option) ...................................... 170
advertisement of virtual IP addresses ................... 201
aging
STP bridge option ....................................... 178
STP information ........................................... 61
application redirection ................................ 237, 258
filter states.................................................... 79
filters ......................................................... 237
within real server groups .............................. 242
apply (global command) ..................................... 157
applying configuration changes ........................... 157
autoconfiguration
link.............................................................. 30
auto-negotiation
enable/disable on port .................................. 172
setup............................................................ 30
autonomous system filter action .......................... 199
autonomous system filter path
action ........................................................ 199
as .............................................................. 199
aspath ........................................................ 199
B
backup
SLB real server group option ........................ 244
backup configuration block ......................... 158, 291
backup server activations (SLB statistics) ............ 143
banner (system option) ....................................... 160
BBI .................................................................... 15
323
13N0340, March 2004
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
BGP
configuration...............................................211
eBGP .........................................................211
filters, aggregation configuration ...................216
iBGP ..........................................................211
in route .......................................................214
IP address, border router ...............................213
IP route tag ...................................................68
keep-alive time ............................................213
peer ...........................................................212
peer configuration ........................................213
redistribution configuration ...........................215
remote autonomous system ...........................213
router hops..................................................214
binding failure ...................................................143
binding table ......................................................251
BLOCKING (port state)........................................62
boot options menu ..............................................287
BOOTP ...............................................................20
setup (enable/disable) .....................................29
system option ..............................................160
bootstrap protocol ..............................................219
Border Gateway Protocol ......................................68
configuration...............................................211
Border Gateway Protocol (BGP)
operations-level options ................................286
BPDU. See Bridge Protocol Data Unit.
bridge parameter menu, for STP ..........................176
bridge priority ......................................................61
Bridge Protocol Data Unit (BPDU) ........................61
STP transmission frequency ..........................178
Bridge Spanning-Tree parameters ........................178
broadcast
IP route tag ...................................................68
IP route type .................................................67
Browser-Based Interface .......................................15
C
capture dump information to a file .......................300
Cisco Ether Channel ...........................................180
clear
ARP entries ................................................299
dump information ........................................301
FDB entry...................................................296
routing table ................................................300
clearing SLB statistics ........................................144
client traffic processing .......................................266
command (help) ...................................................45
324 Index
Command-Line Interface (CLI) ....... 15 to 24, 25, 43
commands
abbreviations ................................................ 48
conventions used in this manual ...................... 13
global commands .......................................... 45
shortcuts ...................................................... 48
stacking ....................................................... 48
tab completion .............................................. 48
configuration
administrator password ................................ 170
apply changes ............................................. 157
default gateway interval, for health checks ..... 191
default gateway IP address ........................... 191
dump command .......................................... 233
effect on Spanning-Tree Protocol .................. 157
flow control................................................ 172
Gigabit Ethernet.......................................... 170
IP static route ............................................. 192
Layer 4 administrator password .................... 169
operating mode ........................................... 172
port link speed ............................................ 172
port mirroring ............................................. 173
port trunking .............................................. 180
route cache ................................................. 194
save changes .............................................. 157
setup ......................................................... 233
setup command........................................... 233
switch IP address ........................................ 190
user password ............................................. 169
view changes .............................................. 157
VLAN default (PVID) ................................. 170
VLAN IP interface ...................................... 190
VLAN tagging............................................ 171
VRRP........................................................ 220
configuration block
active ........................................................ 291
backup ....................................................... 291
factory ....................................................... 291
selection .................................................... 291
configuration menu ............................................ 155
configuring routing information protocol ............. 200
connecting
via console ................................................... 16
connection timeout (Real Server Menu option) ..... 251
console port
connecting ................................................... 16
content
SLB real server group option ........................ 242
13N0340, March 2004
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
cost
STP information ........................................... 62
STP port option .......................................... 179
counters, No Server Available (dropped frames)... 143
CPU statistics.................................................... 148
CPU utilization ................................................. 148
cur (system option) ............................ 164, 165, 168
current bindings ................................................ 143
D
date
setup ........................................................... 28
system option ............................................. 160
daylight savings time ......................................... 164
debugging ......................................................... 293
default gateway
information .................................................. 65
interval, for health checks ............................ 191
metrics ...................................................... 232
round robin, load balancing for ..................... 232
default password ................................................. 23
delete
ARP entry .................................................. 299
FDB entry .................................................. 296
deny (filtering) .................................................. 143
designated port. ................................................... 69
diff (global) command, viewing changes ............. 157
dip (destination IP address for filtering) ............... 259
direct (IP route type) ............................................ 67
directed broadcasts ............................................ 193
DISABLED (port state)........................................ 62
disconnect idle timeout ........................................ 24
dmask
destination mask for filtering ........................ 259
DNS statistics ................................................... 116
Domain Name System (DNS)
health checks .............................................. 243
downloading software ........................................ 288
dropped frames (No Server Available) counter ..... 143
dump
configuration command ............................... 233
maintenance ............................................... 293
state information ......................................... 302
duplex mode
link status .............................................. 50, 86
dynamic routes .................................................. 300
13N0340, March 2004
E
EtherChannel
as used with port trunking ............................ 180
F
factory configuration block ................................. 291
factory default configuration ..................... 24, 25, 26
FDB statistics .................................................... 103
File Transfer Protocol ........................................ 135
filter statistics .................................................... 129
filtered (denied) frames ...................................... 143
filters
IP address ranges ........................................ 259
Final Steps .......................................................... 35
first-time configuration..........................24, 25 to 40
fixed
IP route tag ................................................... 68
flag field ............................................................. 70
flow control................................................... 50, 86
configuring ................................................. 172
setup............................................................ 29
forwarding configuration
IP forwarding configuration .......................... 193
forwarding database (FDB) ................................. 293
delete entry................................................. 296
Forwarding Database Information Menu ................ 55
Forwarding Database Menu ................................ 295
forwarding state (FWD) ........................... 57, 61, 62
FTP server health checks .................................... 243
FTP SLB maintenance statistics .......................... 136
FTP SLB statistics dump .................................... 137
fwd (STP bridge option) ..................................... 178
FwdDel (forward delay), bridge port...................... 61
G
gig (Port Menu option) ....................................... 170
Gigabit Ethernet
configuration .............................................. 170
Gigabit Ethernet Physical Link ............................ 170
global commands ................................................. 45
grace
graceful real server failure ............................ 275
Greenwich ........................................................ 164
Greenwich Mean Time (GMT)............................ 164
group ................................................................ 128
gtcfg (TFTP load command) ............................... 234
Index 325
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
H
hash metric ........................................................245
health checks .....................................................239
default gateway interval, retries .....................191
IDSLB .......................................................243
layer information ...........................................79
parameters for most protocols .......................243
redirection (rport) ........................................258
retry, number of failed health checks ..............191
script ..........................................................278
WAP..........................................................279
hello
STP information ............................................61
help ....................................................................45
host routes .........................................................201
Hot Standby Router on VLAN (HSRV)
use with VLAN-tagged environment ..............225
VRRP priority increment value .....................232
Hot Standby Router Protocol (HSRP)
priority increment value for L4 client ports .....231
use with VRRP....................................225, 229
VRRP priority increment value .....................231
Hot Standby Router VLAN (HSRV)
use with VRRP............................................229
hot-standby failover ............................................226
HP-OpenView .....................................................15
hprompt
system option ..............................................160
HSRP. See Hot Standby Router Protocol.
HSRV. See Hot Standby Router Protocol.
HTTP
application health checks ..............................243
HTTP health checks
on any port (aphttp)......................................277
I
ICMP statistics...................................................116
idle timeout
overview ......................................................24
IDSLB health checks ..........................................243
IEEE standards
802.1d Spanning-Tree Protocol ...............61, 176
image
downloading ...............................................288
software, selecting .......................................289
IMAP server health checks ..................................243
imask (IP address mask) .....................................274
326 Index
incorrect VIPs (statistic) ..................................... 143
incorrect Vports (dropped frames counter) ........... 143
indirect (IP route type) ......................................... 67
Information
Trunk Group Information ............................... 62
Information Menu................................................ 49
Interface change stats ......................................... 110
interface statistics .............................................. 118
IP address ........................................................... 32
ARP information .......................................... 69
BOOTP ....................................................... 20
configuring default gateway ......................... 191
filter ranges ................................................ 259
IP interface................................................... 32
local route cache ranges ............................... 194
IP address mask (mmask) ................................... 168
IP address mask for SLB .................................... 274
IP configuration via setup ..................................... 32
IP forwarding .................................................... 217
directed broadcasts ...................................... 193
local networks for route caching ................... 193
IP forwarding information .................................... 65
IP Information Menu ..................................... 65, 77
IP interface ....................................................... 190
active ........................................................ 228
configuring address ..................................... 190
configuring VLANs .................................... 190
IP interfaces .................................................. 32, 67
information .................................................. 65
IP route tag .................................................. 68
priority increment value (ifs) for VRRP ......... 231
IP network filter configuration ............................ 195
IP port configuration .......................................... 217
IP Route Manipulation Menu .............................. 299
IP routing............................................................ 32
tag parameters .............................................. 68
IP Static Route Menu ......................................... 192
IP statistics........................................................ 111
IP subnet mask .................................................... 33
IP switch processor statistics............................... 105
L
l4apw (L4 administrator system option) ............... 169
LACP ............................................................... 184
Layer 2 Menu ...................................................... 54
Layer 3 Menu ...................................................... 64
Layer 4
administrator account .................................... 23
13N0340, March 2004
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
Layer 4 processing
active ........................................................ 228
layer 7 SLB maintenance statistics ...................... 132
layer 7 SLB string statistics ................................ 131
layer7 redirection statistics ................................. 130
LDAP version ................................................... 277
LEARNING (port state) ................................. 61, 62
least connections (SLB Real Server metric) ......... 246
link
speed, configuring....................................... 172
Link Aggregation Control Protocol ..................... 184
link status ........................................................... 50
command ..................................................... 86
duplex mode .......................................... 50, 86
port speed .............................................. 50, 86
Link Status Information ....................................... 86
linkt (SNMP option) .......................................... 167
LISTENING (port state)....................................... 62
lmask (routing option).......................................... 65
lnet (routing option) ............................................. 65
local (IP route type) ............................................. 67
local network for route caching ........................... 193
local route cache
IP address ranges for ................................... 194
log
syslog messages.......................................... 161
M
MAC (media access control) address .. 51, 52, 55, 69,
295
switch location ............................................. 20
Main Menu ......................................................... 43
Command-Line Interface (CLI) ...................... 24
summary...................................................... 44
Maintenance Menu ............................................ 293
management module ............................................ 16
Management Processor (MP) .............................. 297
display MAC address .............................. 51, 52
manual style conventions ..................................... 13
martian
IP route tag (filtered) ..................................... 68
IP route type (filtered out) .............................. 67
mask
IP interface subnet address ........................... 190
mation ................................................................ 62
13N0340, March 2004
MaxAge (STP information) .................................. 61
mcon (maximum connections) .................... 143, 244
MD5 authentication key ..................................... 203
MD5 cryptographic authentication ...................... 204
MD5 key........................................................... 207
media access control. See MAC address.
metric
SLB real server group option ........................ 242
metrics, SLB ..................................................... 245
minimum misses (SLB real server metric) ............ 245
Miscellaneous Debug Menu ................................ 297
mmask
system option ............................................. 168
mnet
system option ............................................. 168
monitor port ...................................................... 174
mp
packet ........................................................ 146
MP. See Management Processor.
multicast
IP route type ................................................. 67
mxage (STP bridge option) ................................. 178
N
nbr change statistics ........................................... 109
Network Address Translation (NAT)
filter action ................................................. 258
network management ........................................... 15
non TCP/IP frames ............................................ 143
notice ............................................................... 160
NTP server menu ............................................... 164
NTP synchronization.......................................... 164
NTP time zone .................................................. 164
O
octet counters .................................................... 127
online help .......................................................... 45
operating mode, configuring ............................... 172
operations menu ................................................ 281
operations-level BGP options .............................. 286
operations-level IP options ................................. 285
Operations-Level Port Options ............................ 283
operations-level SLB options .............................. 284
operations-level VRRP options ........................... 285
Index 327
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
ospf
area index ...........................................202, 203
authentication key ........................................207
configuration...............................................202
cost of the selected path ................................206
cost value of the host ....................................209
dead, declaring a silent router to be down .......206
dead, health parameter of a hello packet .........208
export.........................................................210
fixed routes .................................................212
general .......................................................107
global .........................................................107
hello, authentication parameter of a hello packet ....
208
host entry configuration ................................209
host routes ..................................................202
interface .....................................................202
interface configuration .................................206
link state database ........................................202
MD5 authentication key ...............................203
Not-So-Stubby Area ....................................204
priority value of the switch interface ..............206
range number ..............................................202
redistribution menu ......................................202
route redistribution configuration ...................210
spf, shortest path first ...................................204
stub area .....................................................204
summary range configuration ........................205
transit area ..................................................204
transit delay ................................................206
type ...........................................................204
virtual link ..................................................202
virtual link configuration ..............................207
virtual neighbor, router ID ............................208
OSPF Database Information ..................................75
OSPF general.......................................................73
OSPF General Information ....................................74
OSPF Information ................................................73
OSPF Information Route Codes .............................76
OSPF statistics ...................................................106
overflow server activations..................................143
overflow servers .................................................239
P
panic
command....................................................302
switch (and Maintenance Menu option) ..........293
328 Index
parameters
tag............................................................... 68
type ............................................................. 67
Passive FTP SLB Parsing Statistics ..................... 136
Password
user access control ...................................... 169
password
administrator account .................................... 23
default ......................................................... 23
L4 administrator account................................ 23
user account ................................................. 22
VRRP authentication ................................... 230
passwords ........................................................... 22
persistent bindings
real server .................................................. 251
ping ............................................................ 46, 238
PIP ................................................................... 280
poisoned reverse, as used with split horizon ......... 200
POP3
server health checks .................................... 243
port configuration .............................................. 170
port flow control. See flow control.
Port Menu
configuration options ................................... 170
configuring Gigabit Ethernet (gig)................. 170
port mirroring
configuration .............................................. 173
Port number ........................................................ 86
port speed ..................................................... 50, 86
port states
UNK (unknown) ........................................... 57
port trunking
description ................................................. 180
port trunking configuration ................................. 180
ports
configuration ................................................ 29
disabling (temporarily) ................................ 173
information .................................................. 87
IP status ....................................................... 65
membership of the VLAN ........................ 55, 63
priority ........................................................ 61
SLB state information.................................... 79
STP port priority ......................................... 179
VLAN ID .............................................. 50, 87
preemption
assuming VRRP master routing authority ....... 224
virtual router ...................................... 223, 227
priority
virtual router .............................................. 227
13N0340, March 2004
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
priority (STP port option) ................................... 179
prisrv
primary radius server ................................... 163
proxies
IP address translation................................... 240
proxy IP address (PIP) ......................................... 79
proxy IP address (PIP) configuration ................... 280
ptcfg (TFTP save command) .............................. 234
PVID (port VLAN ID) ................................... 50, 87
pwd .................................................................... 46
Q
quiet (screen display option) ................................. 46
R
RADIUS
server authentication ................................... 243
RADIUS server menu ........................................ 163
read community string (SNMP option) ................ 166
real server
statistics ..................................................... 127
real server group options
add............................................................ 244
real server group SLB configuration .................... 242
real server group statistics .................................. 128
real server groups
combining servers into................................. 242
statistics ..................................................... 128
real server SLB configuration ............................. 237
real servers
backup....................................................... 244
priority increment value (reals) for VRRP ...... 231
SLB state information ................................... 79
reboot ....................................................... 293, 302
receive flow control ..................................... 30, 172
redir (SLB filtering option) ................................. 258
reference ports .................................................... 57
referenced port .................................................... 69
remote monitoring on the port (rmon) .................. 283
remote site servers ............................................. 240
restarting switch setup.......................................... 27
retries
radius server ............................................... 163
retry
health checks for default gateway.................. 191
rip
IP route tag .................................................. 68
13N0340, March 2004
RIP. See Routing Information Protocol.
round robin
as used in gateway load balancing ................. 232
roundrobin
SLB Real Server metric ............................... 246
route
cache configuration ..................................... 194
route statistics.................................................... 113
router hops ........................................................ 214
routing information protocol
configuration .............................................. 200
Routing Information Protocol (RIP)....................... 68
options ....................................................... 200
poisoned reverse ......................................... 200
split horizon ............................................... 200
version 1 parameters .................................... 200
rport
SLB virtual server option ............................. 250
RTSP SLB statistics ........................................... 138
rx flow control ..................................................... 30
Rx/Tx statistics .................................................. 108
S
save (global command) ...................................... 157
noback option ............................................. 158
save command ................................................... 291
script
health checks .............................................. 278
scriptable health checks configuration .................. 278
secret
radius server ............................................... 163
secsrv
secondary radius server ................................ 163
Secure Shell ...................................................... 161
Server Load Balancing
information .................................................. 79
operations-level options ............................... 284
real server weights....................................... 238
server load balancing
client traffic processing ................................ 266
metrics ....................................................... 245
port options ................................................ 267
server traffic processing ............................... 266
server load balancing configuration options .......... 235
Server Load Balancing Maintenance Statistics Menu ..
134, 135, 142
server port mapping ............................................. 79
server traffic processing ..................................... 266
Index 329
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
Session Binding Table ........................................239
session identifier ................................................248
setup
configuration...............................................233
setup command, configuration .............................233
setup facility ..................................................24, 25
BOOTP ........................................................29
IP configuration.............................................32
IP subnet mask ..............................................33
port auto-negotiation mode .............................30
port configuration ..........................................29
port flow control ............................................29
restarting ......................................................27
Spanning-Tree Protocol ..................................29
starting .........................................................26
stopping .......................................................27
system date ...................................................28
system time...................................................28
VLAN name .................................................31
VLAN tagging ..............................................30
VLANs ........................................................31
SFD statistics
mp specific .................................................148
shortcuts (CLI).....................................................48
SIP (source IP address for filtering) .....................259
SLB filtering option
action .........................................................258
SLB Information ..................................................79
SLB layer7 statistics ...........................................130
SLB real server group health checks
arp .............................................................243
dns.............................................................243
ftp..............................................................243
http ............................................................243
icmp ..........................................................243
imap ..........................................................243
ldap ...........................................................243
radius .........................................................243
script ..........................................................243
smtp...........................................................243
sslh ............................................................243
tcp .............................................................243
udpdns .......................................................243
wsp ............................................................243
wtls............................................................243
SLB real server group option
application health checking ...........................243
health checking ...........................................243
metric.........................................................242
330 Index
SLB real server option
backup ....................................................... 239
intr (interval) .............................................. 239
maxcon (maximum connections) .................. 238
name, alias for each real server ..................... 238
restr (restore) SLB real server UDP option ..... 239
retry .......................................................... 239
RIP, real server IP address............................ 238
submac ...................................................... 240
tmout (time out) .......................................... 239
weights ...................................................... 238
smask
source mask for filtering .............................. 259
smtp ................................................................. 160
SMTP server health checks................................. 243
snap traces
buffer ........................................................ 297
SNMP .......................................................... 15, 90
HP-OpenView .............................................. 15
menu options .............................................. 166
set and get access ........................................ 166
SNMP Agent..................................................... 315
SNMP statistics ................................................. 150
SNMP Support
optional setup for SNMP support .................... 36
software
image ........................................................ 288
image file and version.............................. 51, 52
SP specific statistics ........................................... 148
spanning tree
configuration .............................................. 176
Spanning-Tree Protocol................................ 62, 157
bridge aging option ..................................... 178
bridge parameters........................................ 178
bridge priority .............................................. 61
port cost option ........................................... 179
port priority option ...................................... 179
root bridge ........................................... 61, 178
setup (on/off)................................................ 29
switch reset effect ....................................... 292
split horizon ...................................................... 200
SSL .................................................................. 251
secure socket layer statistics ......................... 134
stacking commands (CLI) .................................... 48
starting switch setup ............................................ 26
state (STP information) ........................................ 62
state information, client system ........................... 251
static
IP route tag .................................................. 68
13N0340, March 2004
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
static route
rem ........................................................... 192
static routes
Routing Information Protocol (RIP) .............. 200
statis route
add............................................................ 192
statistics
group ........................................................ 128
management processor ................................ 145
Statistics Menu .................................................... 89
stopping switch setup ........................................... 27
subnet address maskconfiguration
IP subnet address ........................................ 190
subnet mask ........................................................ 33
subnets ............................................................... 32
IP interface ................................................ 189
switch
name and location ................................... 51, 52
resetting ..................................................... 292
Switch Processor (SP) ........................................ 297
display trace buffer ..................................... 297
SYN attack detection configuration ..................... 276
sync ................................................................. 284
synchronization
VRRP switch ..................................... 272, 284
syslog
system host log configuration ....................... 160
system
contact (SNMP option) ................................ 166
date and time .......................................... 51, 52
information .................................................. 52
location (SNMP option) ............................... 166
System Information ............................................. 50
System Maintenance Menu................................. 295
system options
admpw (administrator password) .................. 170
BOOTP ..................................................... 160
cur (current system parameters) .... 164, 165, 168
date ........................................................... 160
hprompt ..................................................... 160
l4apw (Layer 4 administrator password) ........ 169
login banner ............................................... 160
mmask ...................................................... 168
mnet.......................................................... 168
time .......................................................... 160
tnet ........................................................... 168
tnport ........................................................ 168
usrpw (user password) ................................. 169
wport ........................................................ 167
13N0340, March 2004
system parameters, current.................. 164, 165, 168
T
tab completion (CLI) ............................................ 48
TCP .................................................................. 105
fragments ........................................... 143, 248
health checking using .................................. 239
health checks .............................................. 243
source and destination ports .......................... 257
TCP statistics ............................................ 120, 147
Telnet
BOOTP ....................................................... 20
configuring switches using ........................... 233
telnet
radius server ............................................... 163
Telnet support
optional setup for Telnet support ..................... 36
text conventions................................................... 13
TFTP ................................................................ 288
PUT and GET commands ............................ 234
TFTP server ...................................................... 234
thash ................................................................. 181
time
setup............................................................ 28
system option ............................................. 160
timeout
radius server ............................................... 163
timeouts
idle connection ............................................. 24
timers kickoff .................................................... 110
tnet
system option ............................................. 168
tnport
system option ............................................. 168
TPCP (Transparent Proxy Cache Protocol) ........... 275
trace buffer........................................................ 297
Switch Processor ......................................... 297
traceroute ............................................................ 46
Tracking
VRRP ........................................................ 222
transmit flow control .................................... 30, 172
transparent proxies, when used for NAT .............. 258
trunk group failover ........................................... 180
Trunk Group Information ..................................... 62
trunk hash algorithm .......................................... 181
tx flow control ..................................................... 30
type of area
ospf ........................................................... 204
Index 331
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
type parameters ....................................................67
typographic conventions, manual ...........................13
tzone .................................................................164
U
UCB statistics ....................................................147
UDP .................................................................105
datagrams ...................................................143
server status using........................................239
source and destination ports ..........................257
UDP statistics ....................................................121
unknown (UNK) port state ....................................57
Unscheduled System Dump.................................302
upgrade, switch software .....................................288
URL for health checks ..........................................79
user access control configuration .........................168
user account .........................................................22
usrpw (system option).........................................169
Uuencode Flash Dump........................................300
V
verbose ...............................................................46
vip
advertisement of virtual IP addresses as Host
Routes ................................................201
IP route tag ...................................................68
virtual IP address (VIP) ........................................79
virtual port state, SLB information about ................79
virtual router
description ..................................................221
master mode ...............................................228
priority .......................................................227
tracking criteria ...........................................224
virtual router group
VRRP priority tracking.................................226
virtual router group configuration ........................226
virtual router group priority tracking ....................228
Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol (VRRP)
authentication parameters for IP interfaces ......230
group options (prio) .....................................227
operations-level options ................................285
password, authentication...............................230
priority election for the virtual router ..............222
priority tracking options ...............213, 216, 224
Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol configuration220
332 Index
virtual routers
HSRP failover .................................... 225, 229
HSRP priority increment value ..................... 231
HSRV ....................................................... 229
HSRV priority increment value..................... 232
increasing priority level of............................ 224
incrementing VRRP instance ........................ 225
master preemption (preem)........................... 227
master preemption (prio) .............................. 223
priority increment values (vrs) for VRRP ....... 231
virtual server SLB statistics ................................ 129
virtual servers.................................................... 245
SLB state information.................................... 79
statistics ..................................................... 129
VLAN
active port .................................................. 228
configuration .............................................. 186
VLAN tagging
port configuration ....................................... 171
port restrictions ........................................... 187
setup ........................................................... 30
VLANs ............................................................... 32
ARP entry information .................................. 69
information .................................................. 63
interface....................................................... 33
name ..................................................... 55, 63
name setup ................................................... 31
port membership ..................................... 55, 63
setting default number (PVID) ...................... 170
setup ........................................................... 31
tagging .................................... 30, 50, 87, 187
VLAN Number............................................. 63
VRID (virtual router ID) ............................ 222, 226
VRRP
interface configuration ................................. 230
master advertisements.................................. 222
tracking ..................................................... 222
tracking configuration.................................. 231
VRRP Information............................................... 77
VRRP master advertisements
time interval ............................................... 227
VRRP statistics ................................................. 115
W
WAP
health checks .............................................. 279
13N0340, March 2004
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
WAP health check
wspport ..................................................... 279
wtlsprt ....................................................... 279
WAP health check configuration ......................... 279
WAP SLB statistics ........................................... 140
watchdog timer ................................................. 293
weights
for SLB real servers .................................... 246
setting virtual router priority values ............... 231
13N0340, March 2004
wport ................................................................ 167
write community string (SNMP option) ............... 166
wspport
WAP health check....................................... 279
wtlsprt
WAP health check....................................... 279
Index 333
Alteon OS 20.1 Command Reference
334 Index
13N0340, March 2004
">